BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME 
 FROM THE 
 
 SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND 
 
 THE GIFT OF 
 
 iienrg W, Ma^^ 
 
 1891 
 
 A,/M/.3/ ^M-'V^- 
 
3 1924 024 493 649 
 
The original of tiiis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924024493649 
 
THE 
 
 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 KENYON 
 
HENRY FROWDE, M.A. 
 
 PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD 
 
 LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK 
 
THE 
 
 I ! 
 
 PALAEOGRAPHY 
 
 ' ' ll V 
 
 OF 
 
 GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 FREDERIC G. KENYON, M.A. 
 
 LATE FELLOW OF MAGDALEN COLLEGE 
 
 HON. PH.D. (hALLe), HON. D.LITT. (dURHAM) 
 
 ASSISTANT KEEPER OF MANUSCRIPTS, BRITISH MUSEUM 
 
 WITH TWENTY FACSIMILES 
 AND A TABLE OF ALPHABETS 
 
 AT THE CLARENDON PRESS 
 1899 
 
PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS 
 
 BY HORACE HART, M.A. 
 PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY 
 
PREFACE 
 
 The substance of the following treatise was originally 
 written as a dissertation for the Conington Prize in 1897, 
 and I had at first intended to defer its publication for some 
 time, in view of the accessions of new material which the 
 excavations conducted each year in Egypt are continually 
 bringing to light. It was represented, however (and that 
 by one whose judgement I was bound to respect), that, 
 although the work might gain in absolute accuracy by 
 such a delay, yet its usefulness to students would be greater 
 if it were published now, as enabling them to assimilate 
 the new material for themselves. Consequently it is with- 
 out any idea of having reached finality, but rather as an 
 assistance to investigation, that this book is now offered to 
 the consideration of students of palaeography. 
 
 It is, in fact, an essay in the strict sense of the term — an 
 attempt to formularize and classify the results of a number 
 of discoveries, most of which have occurred quite recently. 
 Hence, it will be understood, the conclusions stated in it are 
 in many instances only the impressions of a single student 
 of the subject, and do not (as is the case with treatises on 
 the palaeography of vellum manuscripts) express the con- 
 sensus of opinions of many experts and many ages. The 
 whole subject is new; fresh materials are coming to light 
 
vi PREFACE 
 
 year by year, and much of that which is already extant 
 has not been published in such a form as to make it avail- 
 able for students at a distance from the originals. Hence, 
 although the wealth of the British Museum in papyri (and 
 especially in literary papyri) gives a considerable advantage 
 to a student whose work lies in that sphere, it is possible 
 that the experts of Berlin and Vienna may sometimes have 
 been led by their experience among the yet un-photographed 
 documents in those collections to conclusions different from 
 those which are expressed in the following pages. Still, 
 the amount of accessible material is now so great, and 
 spread over such wide periods of time, that inductions may 
 be drawn from it with a fair amount of certainty; and 
 with regard to the literary papyri, which form by far the 
 most important branch of the subject, fortune has hitherto 
 brought nearly every manuscript of the first importance 
 to the British Museum ; so that it seems justifiable to try 
 to state some general results and principles to which 
 a study of these materials seems to lead us, in the hope 
 that the development of this branch of palaeographical 
 science may thereby be facilitated. 
 
 In conclusion I have to thank the Delegates of the 
 University Press for undertaking the publication of this 
 volume, and especially Prof. Bywater for his supervision 
 of it while passing through the press; and I wish also 
 gratefully to acknowledge the assistance of Sir E. Maunde 
 Thompson, K.C.B., Director of the British Museum, who 
 has found time to read the proof-sheets and to make many 
 valuable criticisms and suggestions. 
 
 F. G. K. 
 
 October 2a, 1898. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 CfiAP. PAOB 
 
 I. The Eahge of the Subject i 
 
 II. Papyrus as Writing Material 14 
 
 III. NoN-LITEKAaY PaPTEI 34 
 
 IV. Literary Papyri or the Ptolemaic Period .... 56 
 V. liTERART Papyri or the Roman Period .... 80 
 
 VI. The TRAirsrnoH to Vellum iia 
 
 Aj>peiidix I. Alphabets op Literary Papyri . . .127 
 
 ApPEHDix II. Catalogue of Lueraky Papyri . . . lag 
 Appendix III. The Principal Publications op Non-literary 
 
 Papyri 149 
 
 Appendix IV. Abbreviations and Symbols . . . .154 
 
 Index ■ • 'S7 
 
PLATES 
 
 I. Letter, B.C. 242 (Bodl. MS. Gr. class, 0. ai (P;) to face page 3^ 
 
 II. Petition, B.C. 161 (Brit. Mus. Pap. xMv) . . „ 39 
 
 III. Loan, B.C. 105 (Brit. Mus. Pap. ncivin) . . ,,40 
 
 IV. Official Letter, a.d. 15 (Brit. Mus. Pap. coLXXvi) . ,, 42 
 V. Register of poll-tax, a.d. 72-3 (Brit. Miis. Pap. 
 
 ocLx) ,, 43 
 
 VI. Receipt, a.d. 97 (Brit. Mus. Pap. oxliii) . . ,,44 
 
 VII. Receipt, a.d. 166 (Brit. Mus. Pap. cccxxxn) . „ 45 
 
 VIII. Letter, circ. a.d. 350 (Brit. Mus. Pap. coxxxvi) . „ 48 
 
 IX. Lease, 6th century (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxin. 3) . „ 50 
 
 X. Plato, Phaedo, 3rd century B.C. (Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 
 COOCLXXXVIIl) ,, 63 
 
 XI. Dialectical Fragment, early and centui-y B.C. 
 
 (Louvre Pap. a) „ 66 
 
 XII. Hyperides In Athenogenem, and century B.C. 
 
 (Louvre Pap.) , , 67 
 
 XIII. Bacchylides, ist century b.o. (Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 
 Dccxxxm) . ..... ,,76 
 
 XIV. Petition, circ. B.C. 10 (Brit. Mus. Pap. oooliv) . „ 83 
 XV. Homer, Odyssey III, early ist century (Brit. 
 
 Mus. Pap. ocLxxi) ,, 84 
 
 XVI. Hyperides In Demosthenem and Demosthenes, 
 
 OJi/«(ftiac II (Rossall School Library) . . ,, 86 
 
 XVII. Lease, a.d. 88 (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxii) ... ,,89 
 
 XVIII. Herodas, ist-and centuiy (Brit. Mus. Pap. oxxxv) „ 94 
 XIX. Homer, Iliad XIII, XIV, ist-and century (Brit. 
 
 Mus. Pap. Dccxxxii) ,, 97 
 
 XX. Homer, Miad II, and century (Bodl. MS. Gr. 
 
 class, a. 1. (P)) ...... ,, lOI 
 
 Table of alphabets to follow page laS 
 
PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 THE EANGE OF THE SUBJECT 
 
 The science of palaeography in its application to Greek 
 writing upon papyrus is a development of quite recent 
 years. Sixty years ago, Greek palaeography practically 
 began with the fifth century of our era, and dealt almost 
 wholly with writing upon vellum and paper. Even the two 
 great codices which now stand at the head of the list 
 of Greek vellum MSS. were not at that time within the 
 scope of the palaeographer ; for the Codex Vaticanus was 
 jealously secluded in the Vatican Library, and the Codex 
 Sinaiticus had not yet been discovered. It is true that some Previous 
 examples of Greek writing upon papyrus had been known ^f t^^g"'^ 
 since the latter part of the eighteenth century ; but these, subject, 
 with the exception of the charred (and only very partially 
 accessible) rolls from Herculaneum, did not contain literary 
 works, and were merely isolated documents, or groups of 
 documents, unconnected with one another or with the 
 known palaeography of vellum MSS. Shortly before the 
 middle of the present century, however, papyri began to be 
 found in Egypt in somewhat more considerable numbers, 
 and among them were several which contained works of 
 
2 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 literature. The discovery of a long roll, containing three 
 of the lost orations of Hyperides, besides being nearly 
 the first example of a literary MS. on papyrus in good 
 preservation, was the first-fruits of the harvest of lost 
 authors which Egypt has yielded, and is still likely to 
 yield, to the explorer. Some considerable portions of 
 Homer were also added to the stock of available material 
 at about the same time. But the progress of discovery 
 was slow at first, and these earlier successes were not 
 followed for several years by much that was important 
 either in quantity or in quality. It is only within the 
 last twenty years that the stream has begun to flow 
 with much fullness ; and only within the last seven years, 
 or less, has it become possible to give anything like a 
 continuous record of the character and development of 
 Greek writing during the period when papyrus was the 
 material mainly in use for its reception. 
 
 The recent discoveries of papyri have, in fact, added 
 a province of nearly a thousand years to the domain 
 of the palaeographer, beginning about three hundred years 
 before Christ, and coming down to a limit which is best 
 fixed by the Arab conquest of Egypt in a.d. 640. It is 
 only during the last three hundred years of this period 
 that it overlaps the sphere occupied by vellum MSS. For 
 six hundred years the papyri held the field alone, and only 
 now are we beginning to be able to realize their character 
 and understand the history of their development. That 
 history has never yet been written with any fullness of 
 detail ; even the outlines of it have hardly been laid down. 
 When Gardthausen wrote his Griechische Paldographie, in 
 1879, his treatment of papyrus-palaeography was based 
 upon a single group of documents belonging to the second 
 century B.C., and two or three isolated and non-literary 
 pieces scattered over the centuries between that date 
 and the rise of vellum MSS. The great Hyperides MS. 
 was the principal example of a literary hand accessible to 
 
RANGE OF THE SUBJECT 
 
 him, and of that the age was quite doubtful. His treat- 
 ment of the subject is, consequently, now out of date ; and 
 no palaeographical treatise on the same scale has been 
 written to take its place. The only work in which the 
 new material has been dealt with is Sir E. Maunde 
 Thompson's Handbook of Greek and Latin Palaeography 
 (1893), and that necessarily treats of it very briefly'. 
 Moreover, even since the date of that book the mass 
 of available material has been largely increased, and some 
 serious gaps in our knowledge have been filled up. Under 
 these circumstances, an attempt to set the material in 
 order, and to formulate, even if it be but provisionally, 
 the laws which regulated the development of Greek 
 writing upon papyrus, seems to be justifiable. Though 
 our knowledge is certainly destined to increase, and that 
 soon, it may be useful to mark the limits which have 
 hitherto been gained, and thereby to pave the way for 
 future progress. 
 
 The first discovery of Greek papyri in modem days was The ear- 
 made at Herculaneum in 1752. Before that date the only cowries of 
 papyri known to the palaeographer were a few survivals papyri- 
 from mediaeval times. Letters, papal bulls, and municipal 
 archives written upon papyrus in Latin existed in con- 
 siderable numbers, chiefly in Italy; but in Greek little 
 was extant at all, and that little was in extremely bad 
 condition^. The excavations at Herculaneum, however, 
 brought to light a mass of charred papyrus rolls, to which 
 must be assigned the honour of inaugurating the new era, 
 though it was forty years before these began to be made 
 
 ' A still more brief survey of the subject is given by Prof. Blass in 
 Miiller's Handbuch der klassischen Alteriumsmssmschaftf vol. i. (1891). The 
 last edition of Wattenbach's AnUitung zur griechischm PaldograpMe (1895) 
 attempts little more than a bibliography of the subject. 
 
 =i Montfaucon, writing in 1708, says ' Graecum autem papyreum codicem 
 nullum hactenus vidimus' {Palaeographia Graeca, p. 15), though he sub- 
 sequently describes some much mutilated fragments in the library of 
 St. Martin at Tours, and refers to the existence of a few others at Vienna. 
 
 B a 
 
PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 available to scholars, the first volume of facsimile texts 
 appearing at Naples in 1793. ^'^^^ tlien their publication 
 proceeded very slowly, especially during the troubled times 
 of the next thirty years; the Naples volumes were not 
 very easily accessible to scholars in general ; and the 
 charred condition of the rolls detracted greatly from their 
 value. Meanwhile a far more important mine was opened 
 in 1778 by the discovery in Egypt, probably in the province 
 of the Fayyum\ of some forty or fifty rolls of papyrus. 
 They were offered, by the natives who found them, to a 
 dealer, who bought one out of curiosity, but refused the 
 rest ; whereupon they were burnt by the natives for the 
 sake of the smell which they gave forth. The one survivor 
 was sent to Cardinal Stefano Borgia, and placed in his 
 Museum at Velletri, where it was edited by N. Schow 
 in 1788^. It contains nothing but a list of peasants 
 employed in forced labour on the embankments regu- 
 lating the Nile floods, and is of little importance save 
 as the forerunner of much more valuable discoveries. 
 For some time, however, discoveries came but slowly, and 
 the publications of the next five-and-thirty years are few 
 and unimportant. At last, about 1830, a new start was 
 made. A large group of papyri was found (again, it is 
 said, in an earthen pot) on the site of the Serapeum at 
 Memphis; and these, which are now divided between the 
 museums of Paris, London, Leyden, Rome, and Dresden, 
 form the foundation of our knowledge of the palaeography 
 of the second century B.C. Simultaneously papyri began 
 
 ' The find was reported to have been made at Gizeh, in a buried 
 earthenware pot ; but since the surviving document relates to the 
 local affairs of the village of Ptolcmaidis Hormus, in the Fayyum, it is 
 much more likely to have been found in that neighbourhood. The 
 statements of native discoverers as to the promnance of papyri are not 
 valuable as evidence. 
 
 ^ Charta papyracea Qraece scripta Musei Borgiani YelUris (Eome, 1788), with 
 specimen facsimiles. The document is of the end of the second century, 
 being dated (though Schow overlooked this) in the latter part of the thirty- 
 first year (of Commodus = A. n. 191). 
 
RANGE OF THE SUBJECT 
 
 to appear from other sources, and the study of the materials 
 thus provided soon led to the publication of several volumes 
 of considerable note in the bibliography of papyri. In 
 1 83 1 Mr. W. J. Bankes acquired a papyrus roll containing 
 the last book of the Iliad ' — the first literary papyrus to be 
 discovered, with the exception of those from Herculaneum. 
 In 1834 the publication of the Herculaneum papyri was 
 resumed at Oxford. Two years later came the publication 
 of the Turin papyri by Amadeo Peyron; while in 1839 
 those of the British Museum were edited by Forshall, 
 and in 1843 those of Leyden by Leemans. These three 
 volumes contained nothing but non-literary documents; 
 but in the years just before and after the middle of the 
 century several important literary papyri came to light. 
 In 1 847 Mr. Arden and Mr. Harris independently obtained 
 portions of a great roll containing three speeches of 
 Hyperides ^ — the first previously unknown classical author 
 to be recovered on papyrus; in 1849 and 1850 Mr. Harris 
 obtained two portions of a MS. of the seventeenth book 
 of the Iliad, and another, in book form, of books ii-iv^; 
 in 1855 M. Mariette secured for the Louvre a fragment 
 of Alcman * ; in 1 856 Mr. Stobart acquired the Funeral 
 Oration of Hyperides^. Some small portions of Homer 
 were also acquired for the Louvre about the same time ^. 
 
 With these discoveries the first age of papyrus-revelation Discove- 
 may be said to have ended. A pause followed for twenty [^^^ " ® 
 years, and then a new era was inaugurated, an era of twenty 
 discoveries on a large scale, in which we may be said 
 to be still living. In 1877 an enormous mass of papyri, 
 mainly non-literary, was unearthed about the site of 
 
 ^ Commonly refeired to as the Bankes Homer ; now Pap. oxiv in the 
 British Museum. 
 
 ^ Now Brit. Mus. Papp. cviii and cxv. 
 
 ' Now Brit. Mus. Papp. cvii and cxxti. The former (being the earlier 
 to be made known) is the MS. generally known as the Harris Homer. 
 
 * Louvre Pap. 70. ' Brit. Mus. Pap. xcvin. 
 
 ' Louvre Pap. 3, 3 •"', 3 '"'■. 
 
6 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Arsinoe in the Fayyum, of which the greater part went 
 to the collection of the Archduke Rainer at Vienna, though 
 Paris, London, Oxford, and Berlin also had a share. 
 
 The papyri of this first Fayyum find were almost entirely 
 of the Byzantine period, and for the most part were very 
 fragmentary. Since that date, though papyri have also 
 come from EshmunSn (Hermopolis), the neighbourhood of 
 Thebes, and elsewhere, the mounds of the Fayyum have 
 been the most prolific source of papyri, nearly all, however, 
 up to the present, having been of a non-literary character. 
 About 1892 another very large find was made in the same 
 district, principally, it would appear, from the site of 
 a village called Socnopaei Nesus ; and this time the lion's 
 share fell to Berlin, although the British Museum secured 
 a good representative selection, and others went to Vienna 
 and Geneva. This second great find differed from the first 
 in containing far more perfect documents, and in belonging 
 mainly to the Roman period, from the beginning of the 
 first to the middle of the third century after Christ. 
 Meanwhile the range of our knowledge had been extended 
 backwards by Mr. Flinders Petrie's discovery (in 1889-90) 
 of a number of mummy-coffins, the cartonnages of which 
 wejre composed of fragments of papyri written in the third 
 century B. c. Most of these were business documents ; but 
 the literary specimens included two very valuable items 
 in the fragments of Plato's Phaedo and the lost Antiope 
 of Euripides. About the same time the British Museum 
 acquired a most remarkable series of literary papyri, in- 
 cluding the lost 'Adriva'mv UoXinia of Aristotle, the Mimes 
 of Herodas, part of another oration of Hyperides, and 
 a long medical treatise, to say nothing of MSS. of 
 Homer, Demosthenes, and Isocrates. To these the Louvre 
 added in 1893 the greater part of Hyperides' masterpiece, 
 the Oration againd Athenogencs. In the same year a gap 
 in the chronological sequence of dated papyri was filled 
 by the acquisition on the part of the British Museum 
 
RANGE OF THE SUBJECT 
 
 and the Geneva Library of a group of documents from 
 the middle of the fourth century (the correspondence of 
 a Roman officer named Abinnaeus); while the papyri 
 obtained by Messrs. Grenfell and Hogarth in the years 
 1894-1896 have provided ample material for the palaeo- 
 graphy of the latter half of the second century B. c, and 
 have even extended our knowledge for some distance into 
 the previously blank first century B.C. The winter of 
 1896-7, however, threw into the shade all previous dis- 
 coveries, with the possible exception of those of 1890-1. 
 The British Museum acquired a papyrus containing con- 
 siderable portions of the odes of Bacchylides; M. Nicole, 
 of Geneva, secured some fragments, small but interesting, 
 of a comedy by Menander; while Messrs. Grenfell and 
 Hunt, excavating at Behnesa (Oxyrhynchus) on behalf of 
 the Egypt Exploration Fund, unearthed masses of papyri 
 which rival in quantity, and far surpass in quality, even 
 the great finds of Arsinoe and Socnopaei Nesus. The 
 thousands of papyri discovered on this occasion include, 
 along with masses of fragments, large numbers of non- 
 literary rolls in excellent condition; and, more valuable 
 but more tantalizing, scores of fragments of literary works, 
 known and unknown. The full list of these discoveries 
 has not yet been made public, but it includes the now 
 famous ' Logia ' of our Lord, and fragments of St. Matthew, 
 Sappho (probably), Thucydides, Sophocles, Plato, and other 
 authors, besides the inevitable Homer. It may safely be 
 predicted that the harvest of that season will not be 
 surpassed for many a year to come. 
 
 The general result, from the palaeographical point of Chrono- 
 view, of this series of discoveries, and especially of those jutribu- 
 of the last six years, is that we now have an almost un- ^'^^JJ.j^""' 
 interrupted series of dated documents from B.C. 270 to 
 A.D. 680. The third and second centuries B.C. are now 
 so fully represented that there seems little room for 
 serious error in dealing with MSS. of these periods. For 
 
PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 the first century, especially the transition from Ptolemaic 
 to Roman writing, material was until two years ago almost 
 wholly wanting, and still is but scanty. From the beginning 
 of the Christian era the supply begins to grow plentiful 
 again, and from about the middle of the first century until 
 the second quarter of the third century dated papyri exist 
 in such numbers that hardly a year is without many of 
 them. The last half of the third century is somewhat 
 thinly represented; but the age of Diocletian (a turning- 
 point in the history of palaeography) is covered by some 
 recent acquisitions of Mr. Grenfell's (now in the British 
 Museum), and the middle of the fourth century is fully 
 known from the papyri of Abinnaeus at London and 
 Geneva, to which reference has been made above. A few 
 documents dated about the year 400 have lately come to 
 light, but the fifth century is now the darkest period in 
 the palaeography of papyri. The sixth century and the 
 first half of the seventh, on the other hand, have yielded 
 a huge harvest; but the proportion of precisely dated 
 documents is small, and the accurate apportionment of 
 the various types of hands cannot be made with absolute 
 certainty. With the Arab conquest of Egypt the practice 
 of Greek writing on papyrus received its death-blow, and 
 during the latter half of the seventh century it slowly 
 flickered out. No dated document of the eighth century is 
 in existence, except two tiny receipts in Arabic and Greek, 
 though one long papyrus is assigned with apparently good 
 reason to this period. 
 Inferences The end of the papyrus period is, therefore, fixed and 
 use of "^ known ; but with the beginning it is diflferent. Recognizing 
 ■writing, that the material which we have from the early part of the 
 third century B.C. is sufficiently plentiful to allow us to 
 carry our inferences back for a generation or two, we may 
 fairly say that we know how men wrote in the days of 
 Aristotle and Menander; but we have not yet got back 
 to Pindar and Aeschylus, much less to Homer or (if a less 
 
RANGE OF THE SUBJECT 
 
 contentious name be preferred) Hesiod. There are, however, 
 certain broad generalizations and inferences which have 
 a bearing even upon these distant periods. In the first 
 place it is clear that, at the point where our knowledge 
 now begins, writing was a well established art, practised 
 not only by literarj' men and professional scribes, but by 
 soldiers, farmers, and working men and women of all sorts. 
 It was used for the daily affairs of life, to all appearance, 
 not less than it was in England a century ago. It could 
 be written with ease and elegance ; it could also be written 
 with a speed and fluency, which, if they sometimes offer 
 serious difficulties to the decipherer, prove at least that the 
 writer handled a ready pen. From this it is clear that it 
 was no newly acquired art, but had already a long history 
 behind it; how long, we have at present no sufficient 
 evidence to say, but there is no sort of reason to be chary 
 of generations. Further, it is obvious that the writing on 
 papyrus bears no recognizable relation to contemporary 
 inscriptions upon stone ; and therefore care is necessary in 
 using epigraphic evidence to determine the style of writing 
 in the preceding centuries. The characters used in inscrip- 
 tions may resemble the formal writing (or printing) of the 
 same age ; but they have no more bearing on the running 
 hands in common use than modern tombstones have on the 
 handwriting of to-day. Men may have carved formally and 
 with difficulty upon stone ; it does not follow that they 
 did not write upon papyrus with ease and fluency. 
 
 So far we have made no formal distinction between Distinc- 
 literary and non-literary papyri ; yet" the distinction is between 
 fundamental for the study of papyrus-palaeography. It literary 
 is a distinction that runs through the whole period of nterary 
 which we are speaking. Papyri which were meant to ^'ritings. 
 be books were written in quite different hands from the 
 papyri which were meant to be documents, whether official 
 or private. The difference is, in many cases, as marked 
 as that between writing and print at the present day; 
 
lo PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 and the development must be followed separately along 
 each line. A parallel may be found in the distinction 
 between the book -hands and the charter-hands of the 
 Middle Ages. The charters of the twelfth century may 
 bear some likeness, recognizable by the trained eye, to the 
 books of the same period; but from the thirteenth to 
 the fifteenth centuries the relationship is practically indis- 
 tinguishable, and a person who can date a charter of 
 Edward III or Henry VII with certainty may be quite at 
 sea with a chronicle or Bible of the same age. So with 
 papyri, an acquaintance with the succession of non-literary 
 hands only goes a little way towards enabling one to 
 fix the date of a literary MS. And there is this further 
 complication to be borne in mind, that whereas the 
 charter-hand of the Middle Ages is the hand of a trained 
 scribe just as much as the book-hand, the non-literary hand 
 of the papyri includes the writings of private individuals, 
 often very imperfectly acquainted with the use of the 
 pen, as well as those of official clerks. We have, in fact, 
 during the papyrus period what we have hardly at all 
 in the vellum period of palaeography, the casual every-day 
 writings of the common people; and consequently the 
 lines of classification which serve for vellum MSS. do not 
 apply. For this reason the palaeography of papyri forms 
 a branch apart, the principles of which must be stated 
 independently. 
 
 Greek writing upon vellum can be classified in two 
 broad and well-defined divisions, as uncial or minuscule, 
 the former being the earlier, the latter the later style, — 
 of course with some period of overlapping. Uncial writing 
 is never cursive, whereas minuscules are so commonly 
 connected by ligatures that the terms minuscule and cursive 
 are habitually used as synonymous, though they are not 
 properly so. In papyri the circumstances are quite difierent. 
 It is impossible to draw any distinction between uncial 
 and minuscule ; and uncials, no less than minuscules, may 
 
RANGE OF THE SUBJECT ii 
 
 be written cursively. An uncial hand without ligatures is 
 not necessarily earlier than one which has them ; and, for 
 non-literary purposes, hands of the most cursive character 
 are found in the very earliest papyri yet discovered. The 
 only classification which is of use in the study of papyri 
 is that which has been stated above, into literary and 
 non-literary hands ; and it will be necessary, in the present 
 treatment of the subject, to deal with them separately. 
 
 The material for the examination of these two branches 
 is, however, of very difierent character. It is of the nature 
 of a business document, such as a lease, a loan, or a receipt, 
 that it should be accurately dated ; it is only rarely that 
 a literary work will have any precise indication of the 
 same kind. The long series of dated documents, spoken 
 of in the preceding pages, consists almost exclusively of 
 non-Kterary hands. Consequently our knowledge of non- Non-liter- 
 literary palaeography is far more exact than that which we graphy 
 have of literary papyri. A non-literary document must '^ss im- 
 be written in a strange hand indeed if the doubts as to tut better 
 its period range over a hundred years, while those which ^^„°^" 
 are written in anything like the hand of a trained clerk literary. 
 can generally be placed approximately within the limits 
 of a generation. But the dates assigned to literary MSS. 
 have fluctuated over several centuries, and cannot even 
 now be fixed with absolute precision. Yet it is just 
 of these MSS. that it is most important to know 
 the age. The precise date of a petition from the fellah 
 Sarapion to the magistrate Hierax is a matter which 
 concerns a few specialists alone ; but the date of a MS. 
 of Hyperides interests Greek scholars in general, and 
 that of a copy of a Gospel, if one should be discovered, 
 would be a matter of the gravest importance to theologians. 
 The main object of the present essay is, consequently, to 
 show how far science has progressed in this department; 
 to examine the whole series of extant literary papyri ; to 
 show which can be dated accurately, and what are the 
 
12 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 probable dates of those which are still in doubt. Such an 
 examination will have to deal with the subject practically 
 de novo ; and it is hoped that this may be done without 
 the smallest appearance of disrespect for the eminent 
 scholars and palaeographers who have previously assigned 
 dates to the extant MSS. It is a case in which an access 
 of fresh material justifies a new comer in revising the 
 work of his betters; and the purpose of the following 
 pages is rather to show where new facts have come to 
 light than to add to the number of conjectural dicta. 
 Necessity Jn spite of the line which has been drawn between 
 ing both, literary and non-literary papyri, it will not be possible 
 to ignore the latter altogether in a study of the former. 
 In the first place, the non-literary documents furnish us 
 with certain broad criteria which are applicable to the 
 literary documents. The main division, which will be 
 made below, into Ptolemaic, Roman, and Byzantine periods, 
 though more noticeable in the non-literary hands, is trace- 
 able also with the literary; and certain forms of letters 
 are common to both. But in addition to this the evidence 
 on which literary papyri are dated not unf requently depends 
 on our knowledge of non-literary palaeography. Titles, 
 scholia, and corrections to a literary MS. are often written 
 in non-literary hands, and so supply at least a terminus 
 ante quern for the document in which they are found. 
 In other cases, one side of the papyrus may contain literary 
 writing, the other non-literary ; a knowledge of the manner 
 in which papyrus rolls were made and written determines 
 which of these writings is the earlier, and a knowledge 
 of non-literary palaeography gives us a date to guide us 
 in estimating the age of the more valuable writing. 
 
 On all these grounds, then, it has seemed advisable not 
 to limit this essay to the palaeography of literai'y papyri, 
 but to include in it a sketch of non-literary writing as 
 well. The latter will come first, because it is better 
 known, and because the results of it are required for the 
 
RANGE OF THE SUBJECT 13 
 
 examination of the less-known branch of the subject ; but, 
 both because it is better known and because it is less 
 important, it may be treated more briefly. The more 
 important literary papyri, on the other hand, will need 
 individual examination; even small scraps of writing 
 of this type have been noted as far as possible, since 
 they will sometimes be found to throw valuable light 
 upon the subject. But before proceeding to the palaeo- 
 graphy, strictly so called, of papyri, it will be necessary 
 to give some account of papyrus as a material for writing 
 on, — the Buchivesen of the papyrus period, if a German 
 word may be used where there is no exact equivalent in 
 English. It will not be necessary to treat of this ex- 
 haustively, since it would be useless to reproduce what 
 is already accessible in the recognized handbooks of the 
 subject ; but it will be useful to summarize what has been 
 previously known, and to add the further information which 
 is now available. Until recently, our knowledge of the 
 subject has been almost entirely derived from the statements 
 of ancient authors; but we are now able to test and 
 interpret these by an examination of the extant papyrus 
 MSS. which the sands of Egypt have restored to us. 
 
CHAPTER II 
 
 PAPYRUS AS WEITlNa MATERIAL 
 
 3iaily use The use of papyrus in Egypt, the country of its production, 
 In e'^^'V^ goes back to an indefinite antiquity. The earliest extant 
 specimen is a papyrus containing accounts of the reign 
 of king Assa, whose date, according to a moderate estimate 
 of Egyptian chronology, is about 3580-3536 b. c.^ ; while 
 the earliest literary work which has come down to us (the 
 Prisse Papyrus at Paris), although the copy which we have 
 of it seems to have been written between 3700 and 2500 B.C., 
 is stated to have been composed (and therefore originally 
 written down) in the same reign. In technical execution 
 the papyrus rolls of the Egyptian kingdom leave nothing 
 to be desired, and there is no reason to suppose that the 
 manner in which the material was prepared diifered at all 
 from that of Greek and Roman days. We have, however, 
 to pass over a period of some three thousand years before 
 reaching a date at which we can be sure that papyrus was 
 in use among the Greeks. The statement of Herodotus ^ 
 that the lonians still applied the name of hi^depai to books 
 made of papyrus, because they had formerly used skins 
 as writing material, shows at least that in his time the 
 Greeks of Asia used papyrus, and that its use was not 
 quite a new thing. It is safe, therefore, to assert that 
 it was the writing material of the Greeks at the beginning 
 of the fifth century; but how much further it can be 
 
 ' Petrie, History of Egypt, i. 81. ° Herod, v. 58. 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 15 
 
 carried back must remain doubtful. Formerly it was 
 held that the exclusiveness of the Egyptians in the matter 
 of foreign trade made it inadmissible to argue from the 
 practice of Egypt to that of Greece; but the proofs of 
 intercommunication have now increased so greatly that 
 this argument has lost force, and we must be prepared for 
 the possible appearance of evidence establishing the use 
 of papyrus by the Greeks at a much earlier period than 
 has hitherto been held probable. 
 
 With regard to the manner in which the writing material Prepara- 
 was prepared from the plant, and the methods of writing material. 
 upon it, not much has to be added to what has long been 
 known on the subject and may be found in the recognized 
 authorities, notably Birt, Gardthausen, and Thompson. 
 The locus classicus on the preparation of the material is 
 a well-known passage in the elder Pliny (iV. IL xiii. 
 1 1 -1 3), the interpretation of which must be guided by the 
 conclusions derivable from the papyrus documents actually 
 in existence. The pith of the stem of the papyrus plant 
 was cut into thin strips, the width of which was of course 
 determined by the thickness of the stem, while their length 
 varied considerably, as will be shown below. These strips 
 (Lat. philyrae) were laid side by side to form a sheet. 
 Each sheet was composed of two layers, in the one of which 
 the strips ran horizontally, while in the other they were 
 perpendicular. The layers were attached to one another 
 by glue, moistened with water, — preferably, it would appear, 
 the turbid water of the Nile, which was supposed to add 
 strength to the glue \ The sheets thus made were pressed, 
 dried in the sun, and polished, so as to remove unevenness 
 in the surface ; and they were then fit for use. 
 
 ' It is almost certain that this is the true sense of Pliny's 'turbidus 
 liquor vim glutinis praebet,' as held by Birt and Thompson. Apart from 
 the inherent improbability of the Nile water being able by itself to act as 
 glue, it may be added that traces of glue are visible in extant papyri. 
 The amount used was, no doubt, very small, so as to avoid affecting the 
 surface of the papyrus. 
 
i6 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Size of the The size of the sheets (KoXX^juara) varied according to the 
 quahty of the papyrus, only one rule being constant, that 
 the height is greater than the breadth, when the sheet 
 is held in the way in which it is meant to be used. Pliny 
 [L c.) gives the dimensions of the different qualities known 
 in his time, and his figures were formerly supposed to 
 apply to the height of the papyrus. This view is, however, 
 invalidated by the testimony of the extant papyri, and 
 Birt is no doubt right in referring Pliny's measurements to 
 the width. The largest size named by Pliny (which was also 
 the most valuable) is 13 digiti, or about gl inches; but 
 papyri are extant which are as tall as 154 inches, and 
 from 10 to 13 is quite common in documents which make 
 no pretence of special handsomeness or excellence. Further, 
 we do not find that poor people necessarily use papyrus 
 of very small height ; while it is true that narrow sheets 
 are often used for comparatively unimportant purposes. 
 Thus, to quote cases in which only a single sheet is required 
 for a document, the two most elaborately written petitions 
 in the British Museum (Papp. CCCLIV and CLXxvii), which 
 are addressed to the highest official in Egypt, measure 
 respectively 8| and 6 J inches in width; while receipts, 
 records of loans, and the like, are very commonly written 
 on papyrus not more than three inches wide. An examina- 
 tion, moreover, of such long rolls as are at present known 
 tends to confirm Birt's view that Pliny's dimensions refer 
 to the width of the Kokkruxara. The finest literary papyrus 
 in existence, the British Museum Odyssey (Pap. cclxxi) 
 has KoWrifxara of just over 9 inches in width ; while in the 
 Bacchylides papyrus, which is likewise a handsome roll, 
 they vary between 8 and 9 inches. In the Herodas MS., 
 which is small in height and unostentatiously written, they 
 are only 6 inches in width. The papyrus of Hyperides In 
 Philippidem and Demosthenes' Third Epistle, which is only 
 9 J inches in height, has KoWrnxara 7 i inches wide ; while 
 in a tax-register (Brit. Mus. Pap. ccLXviii), which reaches 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 17 
 
 the extraordinary height of 15^ inches, they are only 5 
 inches wide. The papyrus of the 'Adr^valoiv UoXirela, which 
 was originally intended merely for a farm-bailifFs accounts, 
 has KoAA,J7/iiara of 5 to 5^ inches in width ; and this is a very 
 common size for non-literary documents. 
 
 For non-literary documents, such as letters, receipts, 
 deeds of sale or lease, contracts, petitions, and the like, single 
 sheets of papyrus could often be used; but for literary 
 purposes a number of sheets were united to form a roll. 
 According to the ordinary interpretation of Pliny's words, 
 not more than twenty sheets went to a roll ; but this 
 statement is not confirmed by the extant papyri. Twenty Forma- 
 sheets of even the widest kind (9^ inches each, as stated in ^.^^g ^f 
 the last paragraph) would only give a roll of 16 feet; and papyrus, 
 this length was certainly often exceeded. Egyptian papyri 
 sometimes run to enormous lengths, in one case to as much 
 as 144 feet; but these need not be taken into account. 
 They were for show rather than for use, — editions de luxe 
 which the owner proposed to take with him to the next 
 world, where he might have strength to grapple with them, 
 but which he certainly did not want to read on earth. 
 But even Greek papyri, though they do not approach these 
 dimensions, often exceed the limit which the text of Pliny 
 appears to assign to them. From 20 to 30 feet may be Their 
 taken as a full size, the higher limit being rarely, if ever, "'^^ ' 
 exceeded ^ The largest papyrus of Hyperides (Brit. Mus. 
 Papp. cviii, cxv), containing the orations against Demo- 
 sthenes and in defence of Lycophron and Euxenippus, 
 must have measured, when complete, about 28 feet ; a MS. 
 of the last two books of the Iliad (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxvni), 
 about 25 feet; and that of the Mimes of Herodas (Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. cxxxv) perhaps about the same. On the other 
 
 ' The papyrus containing the Revenue Laws of Ptolemy Philadelphus, 
 obtained by Mr. Petrie and now in the Bodleian, measures 4a feet ; but 
 this is composed of several distinct documents attached to one another, 
 and, moreover, is not a literary work. 
 
 C 
 
i8 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 hand, a papyrus containing the De Pace of Isocrates (Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. cxxxit) measures 14 feet; while that of Hyperides 
 In Athenogenem cannot have measured, when complete, more 
 than about 7 feet. The true interpretation of Pliny's state- 
 ment, no doubt, is that in practice the sellers of papyrus 
 kept and sold it in lengths (Pliny's scapi) consisting of twenty 
 sheets. Egyptian rolls have been observed in which the 
 number 30 is marked at the end of each twentieth Ko'AArjjua, 
 and this no doubt indicates the end of each length of papyrus 
 as purchased by the author from the stationer ^ But the 
 author was no more limited by this fact than the modern 
 writer is limited by the fact that he purchases his foolscap 
 by the quire or the packet. He could join one length of 
 papyrus on to another, and when he had jfinished his work he 
 could cut off whatever papyrus was left blank. It is not in 
 the least probable a priori that there was any hard and fast 
 rule fixing the length of a papyrus book, nor do the facts 
 disclosed by the extant MSS. authorize such a supposition. 
 Their The height of a papyrus varies considerably, but the 
 average may be taken to be from 9 to 11 inches. The 
 tallest at present known is a tax-register in the British 
 Museum (Pap. cclxviii), which measures i^^ inches. Three 
 census rolls (Papp. cCLVii-ccLix) measure 134 inches; and 
 about II inches is quite a common height. Literary 
 MSS. are generally rather smaller. Of those mentioned 
 above, the principal Hyperides MS. measures la inches, 
 the Isocrates 11 inches, the Homer 9I inches; while 
 the Herodas (which must be regarded as a kind of 
 pocket volume, such as volumes of poetry often are in 
 modern times) is only 5 inches in height. The Louvre 
 Hyperides measures 9 inches, the British Museum MS. 
 of the same author's Oration againut Philippides 9^ 
 inches; while the two most handsome literary papyri 
 now extant, the British Museum Odyssey and Bacchylides, 
 
 ' See Borehardfc, Zdtschrift fur dgyptische Sprache xxvii. 120, Wilcken, 
 Sermes, xxviii. 167. 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 19 
 
 measure respectively 13 and 9I inches. To give the oldest 
 extant examples, the Petrie Phaedo measures 8^ inches in 
 height, and the Antiope 8^ inches. 
 
 The writing was normally on that side of the papyrus Recto and 
 on which the fibres lay horizontally (technically known ^^"''' 
 as the recto) ; and this is a rule of much importance ; for 
 when, as is frequently the case, a papyrus has been used 
 on both sides, it is often only by this rule that it can be 
 determined which writing is the earher. It is therefore 
 necessary to state the law somewhat precisely, following 
 Wilcken, to whom the first formulation of it is due ^. It 
 is obvious on reflection that, by holding the papyrus 
 differently, the fibres on either side can be made to lie 
 horizontally, only in one case they are parallel to the 
 height of the roll, and in the other to its length; but it 
 does not follow that either side can be made the true recto 
 at will. The true recto of the original sheets of papyrus 
 out of which a roll is made is that side on which the 
 shorter fibres are (probably because greater perfection and - 
 evenness could be secured with short fibres than with long 
 ones) ; and the right way of holding such a sheet is to make 
 these fibres lie horizontally (since thus the least obstacle 
 is offered to the pen). Hence, when several such sheets 
 are joined together, side by side, into a roll, all the fibres 
 on the side which is primarily intended for writing will lie 
 horizontally ; and, conversely, the side of a roll on which 
 the fibres run in the direction of the length of the roll is 
 that which is primarily intended for writing. If writing 
 is found running at right angles to the fibres, one of two 
 things must have happened : either the scribe has written 
 on the verso of the papyrus, or he is holding the recto in an 
 unusual way. Examples of both are found. The verso 
 is used when the recto already has writing upon it, or, 
 occasionally, in the Ptolemaic period, without obvious cause ; 
 
 ' 'Recto Oder Verso,' in Hermes, xxii. (1887). 
 
 c a 
 
20 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 never, so far as present experience goes, in Roman times, 
 unless the recto has been previously used. Writing on the 
 recto, but at right angles to the fibres, is found in a few- 
 Ptolemaic documents and in many of the Byzantine period. 
 In the former cases the roll has been made up in an unusual 
 manner, the sheets being joined together top and bottom, 
 instead of side by side ; so that the writing, though it is 
 across the fibres, still runs parallel to the length of the roll. 
 In the Byzantine documents, on the other hand, the roll is 
 made in the ordinary way, and the writing runs parallel to 
 the height of the roll, so that in reading the roll has to be 
 unfolded from the top downwards, instead of sideways. 
 This method is not applied, however, to works of literature. 
 The general rule, — invariable in the case of literary 
 works, apparently invariable in non-literary works of the 
 Roman period, and largely predominating in non-literary 
 works of the Ptolemaic period, — is that the first writing 
 on the papyrus is parallel to the fibres. The exceptions 
 ■ can easily be recognized after a little experience, — in the 
 ease of large papyri, by looking for the traces of the 
 original sheets, and in the case of small scraps by noticing 
 the greater smoothness of the true recto. It is rare to 
 find a work continued from the recto to the verso. A long 
 book of magical formulae (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxi) and an 
 account book (Pap. cclxti) are examples of this practice ; 
 but ordinarily if there is writing on the verso it is quite 
 independent of that on the recto. It may safely be assumed 
 that no MS. of a literary work intended for sale 
 was ever written on the verso; though copies for private 
 use might be, as in the case of the 'AdrivaCuiv IToXireia of 
 Aristotle. In a long medical papyrus in the British 
 Museum (Pap. cxxxvti), and in the Revenue Papyrus of 
 Philadelphus, notes or additions to the main work are 
 written on the verso; but neither of these is a literary 
 work intended for sale. 
 Width of The normal method of arranging the writing on a 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 21 
 
 papyrus roll was in columns, the lines of which run 
 parallel to the length of the roll, as above described. 
 For literary MSS. this method is invariable ; the Byzantine 
 documents mentioned above, in which the writing ran in 
 one large column down the whole papyrus, in lines at 
 right angles to its length, are of a non-literary character, 
 generally wills or leases. The width of these columns 
 ((TeAiSes) varied, but for literary MSS. intended for sale 
 the length of a hexameter line may be taken as determining 
 the extreme width. This, in a hand of good size, implies 
 a width of about 5 inches, besides the margins, which 
 might be as much as ij inches between the columns and 
 2 or 3 inches at the top and bottom ^. In pi'ose works, 
 so far as our present knowledge goes, the width of the 
 columns is generally much less. The widest are found 
 in the Louvre papyrus of Hyperides, which measure about 
 3^ inches ; the narrowest in one of the British Museum 
 papyri of the same author (the In PhilippideTti), which 
 are barely half that width (if inches). The large 
 Hyperides papyrus has columns 2 inches wide, while 
 those of the British Museum Isocrates measure a little 
 less than 3 inches. The only literary papyrus in which 
 these dimensions are exceeded is that of Aristotle's 
 ' A.dr]va(.u)v IToXireta, which has one column measuring as 
 much as II inches wide, while several others are 5 or 
 6 inches; but this does not constitute a real exception, 
 since the MS. is not written in a literary hand, nor 
 intended for publication^. In non-literary papyri much 
 
 ' These are the measurements in the British Museum papyrus fragment 
 of the Odyssey (Pap. colxxx';, which may be regarded as the handsomest 
 literary papyrus at present extant. In another well-written Homer MS. 
 (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxvni) the figures are slightly less. 
 
 " It has sometimes been supposed that the <r(\idfs correspond with the 
 KoWiiiiaTa, that is, that the writing was not allowed to cross the junctions 
 between the sheets of which the papyrus roll was composed ; but this 
 is not borne out by the facts. In the best-written MSS. (such as the 
 British Museum Odyssey and Bacchylides), no less than in the worst, 
 the writing frequently crosses the junctions. 
 
22 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 greater widths are sometimes found, their dimensions 
 being in fact determined by their contents. In census- 
 lists and some kinds of accounts the scribe preferred to 
 get each entry into a single line; hence in a document 
 of the former class (Brit. Mus. Pap. cclx) some of the 
 columns are lo inches in width, while in a tax-register 
 (Pap. cxix) they are as much as la and 13 inches. 
 Ptolemaic scribes had a fondness for writing such things 
 as wills, leases, loans, and the like, in one or two very 
 broad columns. To give two instances only, Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. DCLXXV is written in a single column measuring 
 15 inches in width and only 6 inches in height; while 
 Pap. Dcxxiii is in two columns of 13 inches, besides 
 a short abstract of the contents in a separate column. 
 These, however, are only examples of a temporary fashion, 
 which must have been found inconvenient in practical use, 
 and could never have been adopted for any composition 
 which was likely to be often read. 
 Titles. The mutilation of nearly every literary papyrus which 
 has come down to us renders it difBcult to lay down any 
 veiy certain rule as to the methods commonly employed 
 by the ancients to indicate the contents of a roll. It was 
 certainly not unusual to inscribe the title of a work at 
 the end of it, as is the case with the largest Hyperides 
 MS., the British Museum Isocrates, and several of the 
 papyri of Homer; but it was not invariably done, for it 
 is not found in the MS. of the In Philippidem, the end 
 of which is perfect, nor yet in the Aristotle papyrus. It 
 is also obvious that it would have been extremely incon- 
 venient to have to unroll the whole of a volume in order 
 to see what its contents were. It was usual to leave a 
 blank column at the beginning of a roll, as is found in the 
 papyri of Aristotle and Herodas and in the Harris Homer ; 
 but in none of these cases is the title written on it; and 
 in the great Hyperides MS., where the title was so written, 
 it is by a different and apparently later hand. It seems 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 23 
 
 certain, therefore, that the ordinary way of indicating the 
 title of a work was by the aCkXvlios, or little strip of papyrus 
 or vellum attached to and projecting from the roll; and 
 these, though known from the references in ancient 
 authors to have existed \ have in no case come down to us. 
 
 In all palaeographical works it is stated that the roll, Use of 
 when completed, was rolled on a stick (o/x^aXo's), ornamented '^°^^^'-'^- 
 at the ends with projecting knobs or tips (/ce'para); and 
 the statements of Latin writers ^ leave no doubt that this 
 was the habitual practice in the case of their works. 
 The actual papyri which have come to light of recent 
 years make it necessary to modify this proposition. In 
 no case (except in dummy rolls manufactured for sale to 
 tourists) has a wooden roller been found; many of the 
 Herculaneum papyri had a central core of papyrus ; some 
 burnt rolls brought from Egypt a few years ago had, in 
 some instances, a reed or quill in the middle ; but as a rule 
 there is no trace of any roller at all. This fact is perfectly 
 intelligible in itself, and may quite well be reconciled with 
 the statements of the Latin poets. Papyrus was not 
 originally the brittle material which, from its appearance 
 after the lapse of a score or so of centuries, one is apt to 
 imagine, and could quite easily be rolled upon itself; and 
 for this purpose, as well as to resist tearing, the ends of 
 the roll are often stiffened by an extra thickness of papyrus, 
 about an inch in breadth ^- In the case of common copies 
 this was, no doubt, the regular practice; while the 
 handsomer books would be provided with wooden rollers 
 and all the other appurtenances of style and luxury. The 
 distinction would be very much the same as that between 
 cloth-bound and paper-covered copies at the present day. 
 The Latin poets are speaking of the dainty copies of their 
 works which were to be seen in the bookshops and salons 
 
 ' Thompson, Greek and Latin, Palaeography, p. 57. ' lb- p. 56- 
 
 = A good instance may be found in the Harris Homer (Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. cvii). 
 
codices, 
 
 24 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 of the capital ; while the papyri which have come down 
 to us are generally from the houses and tombs of obscure 
 provincials in Upper and Middle Egypt. 
 
 On the further details of book production in the papyrus 
 period there is nothing new to be recorded. The allusions 
 in the Latin poets provide us with all we know as to 
 the (paivokrjs, or wrapper, with which the roll might be 
 covered, the cedar-oil by which it might be protected 
 against insects, the chest (resembling a bucket, to judge 
 from extant representations) in which it was kept. These 
 details have already been gathered together in the recognized 
 handbooks of palaeography, and it seems useless to repeat 
 them here. 'The discoveries of actual papyrus rolls have 
 added nothing to our knowledge on such points. 
 
 Papyrus The description of a papyrus book, which has been 
 given in the preceding pages, applies to nearly the whole 
 of the papyrus period, as at present known. But towards 
 the end of the period the codex, or modem book form, 
 is found coming into existence side by side with the 
 traditional roll form. The origin of the codex is, no 
 doubt, to be found in the sets of wax tablets which were 
 in use for note-books at least as far back as the first 
 century B.C., and probably much earlier. These tablets, 
 consisting of wax laid upon wood and surrounded by 
 raised wooden rims, were bound together by strings or 
 leather bands passing through holes bored in the rim 
 of one of the longer sides of each tablet, so as to form 
 something in the shape of a modern book. It was not 
 until several centuries later, however, that this shape 
 was adopted for literary compositions. As Sir E. Thompson 
 has pointed out^ the cause of the final victory of this 
 form was that it was possible to include so much more 
 matter in a codex than in a roll; and the requirements 
 of the churchmen and the lawyers agreed in giving it 
 
 ' Greek and Latin Palaeography, p, 61, 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 25 
 
 the preference. A single Gospel was as much as a papyrus 
 roll could contain, while a vellum codex could include 
 the entire Bible; and the great legal collections of the 
 reign of Justinian would have needed a whole library 
 of rolls. For a short time the experiment was tried of 
 making papyrus codices, the papyrus being cut up into 
 leaves and fastened together by strings or leather bands. 
 It does not appear, however, that the experiment gave 
 satisfaction, for very few instances of such papyrus books 
 have come down to us. A MS. of the second, third, 
 and fourth books of the Iliad, formerly assigned to the 
 fifth century, but, for reasons which will be given sub- 
 sequently, more probably belonging to the third (Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. cxxvi) ; a page of Menander at Geneva, 
 probably of somcAvhat later date; the Berlin fragments 
 of the 'A6r)va(a)v UoXiTfCa, probably of the fourth century ; 
 a copy of the prophet Zechariah, of the sixth or seventh 
 century, exhibited at the London Oriental Congress in 1892, 
 and last seen in a dealer's shop in Vienna; some leaves 
 of a Psalter of the same date, in the British Museum (Pap. 
 xxxvi) ; small portions of two Hesiod MSS. at Paris and 
 Vienna, of the fourth or fifth century ; a magical papyrus 
 in the British Museum (Pap. xlvi), and another in the 
 Bibliotheque Nationale (MS. Suppl. grec. 574), both of the 
 fourth century ; these are the principal examples of Greek 
 papyrus codices at present known to exist. There are 
 Coptic volumes of this kind of much greater size, resembling 
 the large vellum quartos and folios, but there is no sign 
 that these were ever adopted for Greek literature. The 
 rise of the codex was accompanied by the rise of vellum, 
 and the papyrus period, so far as Greek literary works 
 are concerned, was then coming to an end. 
 
 Before beginning the history of Greek writing on '^^^^^^' 
 papyrus, and of the evolution of the written characters ings, and 
 individually, it will be as well to dispose of some subsidiary ^t°ps- 
 
26 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 matters, such as punctuation, accentuation, and the use 
 of breathings. In all these respects papyrus MSS. are 
 in a very elementary stage. None has a full equipment 
 of stops, accents, and breathings; many have none at all. 
 Further, the use of them does not follow regular laws 
 of development; or rather, the materials now available 
 do not allow us to ascertain any law. The probability 
 is that, the higher the quality of a MS., the fuller is 
 its equipment in these subsidiary guides to intelligence. 
 Non-literary MSS. very rarely have any of them. 
 Accents are not found in them at all; breathings in 
 extreme rarity; and only a few have some show of 
 division of sentences. In the lower classes of literary 
 MSS. an occasional accent is found, probably when there 
 was some likelihood of a mistake as to the meaning of 
 a word; breathings are equally rare; and only important 
 breaks in the sense are indicated by punctuation-marks 
 or blank spaces. Of the highest class of MSS., those 
 which were intended for sale or for preservation in large 
 libraries, there are very few extant specimens; but 
 there is some indication that accents, breathings, and 
 punctuation-marks were more freely used in them, though 
 without any approach to the completeness of later usage. 
 Separation The most elementary form of assistance to the reader 
 consists of the separation of words from one another. 
 Where this exists, it is not usually very difficult to deter- 
 mine for oneself the pauses in the sense. But, perhaps 
 because it is so elementary, it is the last form of assistance 
 to be given in Greek MSS. There is sometimes an 
 approximation to it in non-literary papyri, where, the 
 text being written cursively, the writer not unnaturally 
 lifts his pen oftener at the end of a word than elsewhere ; 
 but this is so irregular and incomplete as to furnish very 
 little help. In literary papyri the separation of words 
 is almost wholly wanting; perhaps the only example of 
 it is in a short grammatical treatise, bearing the name 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 27 
 
 of Tryphon, written not earlier than the fourth century 
 on some blank pages in a MS. of Homer in the 
 British Museum (Pap. cxxYi). In other MSS. the nearest 
 approach to such a practice is the use of a dot, above 
 the line, to indicate the true word-division in cases where 
 the reader might easily make a mistake at first sight. 
 Thus Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxvi gives, in Homer, II. iii. 379, 
 h^r • empovcre ^ : and a similar system is found in the Mar- 
 seilles papyrus of Isocrates. It is however rare, the dot, if 
 used at all, being generally required to separate sentences 
 rather than words. A comma below the line is also found 
 occasionally for this purpose (e. g. Bacch. xvii. 102). 
 
 Punctuation in the ordinary sense of the word, or the Punctua- 
 indication of a break in the sense, is more common, though 
 still only sporadic. The earliest system would seem to be 
 that of leaving a slight space in the text, and placing a short 
 horizontal stroke {Trapdypa(j>os, more rarely irapaypa^)-/!) below 
 the beginning of the line in which the break occurs 2. This 
 use of the TTapdypa(j)os is mentioned by Aristotle ^ and is 
 found in some 9f the earliest extant papyri. Thus in the 
 fragment of the Antiope among the Petrie papyri (third 
 century B. c.) it is used to indicate the end of each actor's 
 speech ; and similarly, along with the double dots mentioned 
 below, in the Petrie Phaedo fragment. It is found also 
 in the Louvre Hyperides (second century B. c), the British 
 Museum MSS. of the same author (first century b. c. and 
 first century after Christ), the Herodas (first or second 
 century), and in several other MSS. In the Bacchylides 
 MS. (first century B. c.) it marks the end of each strophe, 
 antistrophe, and epode. Mistakes are sometimes made 
 by transcribers in placing the 'napaypa(\>os, but its proper 
 place is below the line in which the pause occurs. It 
 marks the end, not the beginning, of a sentence. 
 
 1 Classical Texts from Papyri in the British Museum, p. 82. 
 
 2 Spaces in the text, -without paragraphi, are found in some literary papyri 
 (e. g. the Herodas MS. sometimes), and not unfrequently in non-literary 
 papyri, especially those of a legal nature. = Shet 3. 8. 1409 a. 20. 
 
28 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 The use of dots for the same purpose is equally old. In the 
 Petrie Phaedo, which is of the same age as the Antiope, and 
 in the Vienna papyrus containing the ' Curse of Artemisia,' 
 which may be older, a double dot resembling a colon is 
 used to separate sentences. This occurs also in the Erotic 
 Fragment found and published by Mr. Grenfell (now Pap. 
 Bcv in the British Museum), which is of the second century 
 B. c. ; but it is not common. The single dot, generally placed 
 well above the line, is common. It is used freely, and 
 almost regularly, in the Bacchylides papyrus, occasionally 
 in the British Museum Odyssey MS. (Pap. coLXxi); and 
 it has been added by later hands to the three earliest 
 papyri of the ILiad in the British Museum (Papp. cvii, cxiv, 
 cxxviii). The use of the dot is known to have been 
 systematized by the Alexandrian critics (traditionally by 
 Aristophanes of Byzantium), and different values were 
 assigned to it according as it stood above the line (a full 
 stop), in the middle of the line (a comma), or on the line 
 (a semicolon); but this system cannot be traced in the 
 extant papyri, where the dot is generally above the line 
 (practically never on it), and is used to indicate minor 
 pauses, such as a semicolon or even a comma, quite as much 
 as for a full stop. 
 Accentua- Accentuation is rarer than punctuation in Greek papyri, 
 and quite as fluctuating in its appearance. It is not found 
 at all in non-literary documents, and in literary MSS. its 
 use is sporadic. It does not appear in the Petrie papyri 
 of the third century B. c, nor in the Louvre Hyperides of 
 the following century. The earliest example of the use 
 of accents is in the Bacchylides MS., where they are also 
 more plentiful than in any other papyrus ; and it is worth 
 noticing that this is likewise one of the most carefully 
 written papyri in existence, and is therefore probably 
 something more than a copy for private use. Accents are 
 also somewhat freely used in the Alcman fragment in the 
 Louvre, which is probably of the latter part of the first 
 
 tion. 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 29 
 
 century B. c. ; and more scantily in the British Museum 
 Odyssey papyrus (early first century) and two fragments of 
 the Eiad in the Louvre (first and second centuries). The 
 Harris and Bankes papyri of the Iliad, which will be found 
 placed below in the first and second centuries, though the 
 former has hitherto been held to be older, have many 
 accents, but not by the first hand, so that their date is 
 uncertain; and the same is true of the British Museum 
 papyrus of the last two books of the Iliad (Pap. cxxviii). 
 In the much later MS. of Iliad ii-iv (Pap. oxxvi), which 
 is probably of the third century, the accents are by the 
 first hand. None of the Hyperides MSS. in the British 
 Museum has accents, and the Herodas only a few isolated 
 examples. 
 
 It is thus clear that accents are not to be looked for in 
 papyri with any confidence, and are never used to the full 
 extent that has since become customary. Even fairly well 
 written MSS., such as the Petrie Phaedo and Antiope, the 
 Hjrperides papyri, and the British Museum Iliads (with 
 the exception of the latest), have none by the first hand. 
 It is perhaps significant that the only two texts (earlier 
 than the third century) in which they are at all largely 
 used are both of them lyric poets. It may well be that in 
 Bacchylides and Alcman the scribes felt that the reader 
 required more assistance than in Homer or Hyperides. In 
 these MSS. accents are especially applied to the longer 
 words, and particularly to compounds, which are somewhat 
 misleading to the eye. Prepositions, articles, pronouns, 
 and adverbs very rarely have them, unless there is some- 
 thing abnormal about them, as when a preposition follows 
 its case {e.g. Kparos v-aep in Bacch. xviii. 51). In the case 
 of diphthongs, the acute accent is generally on the first 
 letter, and the circumflex over both, contrary to modern 
 usage. In the Bacchylides the accent is never placed on 
 the final syllable in oxytone words, but the preceding 
 syllables have the grave accent; e.g. ■nayKpaTT]s, Kparos. 
 
30 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 The explanation of this is to be found in the original 
 theory of accentuation, according to which every syllable 
 has an accent, but only one in each word is acute, the rest 
 being grave; e.g. avdpa-iTos, xapSta, should be written 
 &v6ponTos, Kapbia. In practice the grave accents were 
 omitted ; but why they were revived, to the exclusion of the 
 acute, in oxytone words, is not clear. Traces of the same 
 practice are found in the Harris and Bankes Homers; 
 e.g. ekiov, ^peaiv, and (in a proparoxytone word) ejTfcra-evovTo''. 
 The general principle governing the use of accentuation 
 in the papyrus period would seem to be that accents were 
 only inserted if the scribe felt they were wanted as an aid 
 to reading, and (so far as yet appears) solely in texts of the 
 poets. Just at the end of the period they came into more 
 general use, and were sometimes supplied to previously 
 existing MSS. ; but at this stage the supersession of 
 papyrus by vellum came about, and accents once more 
 disappeared from Greek texts for some hundreds of years. 
 
 Breath- Much the Same may be said of breathings, which are 
 usually found in the same MSS. as accents. No papyrus 
 is early enough to show the letter H in its original use as 
 an aspirate; but the two halves of this letter, h and -\, 
 indicating the rough and smooth breathings respectively, 
 ai'e found in the Bacchylides MS. (though not uniformly), 
 and in a few instances in the British Museum Odyssey 
 papyrus. The more usual forms, however, both in these 
 MSS. and elsewhere, are "- and -',or r and ■> . The rounded 
 breathing is not found in papyri, though the inverted 
 comma (') is used as a mark of elision in the Bacchylides 
 and other MSS. As with the accents, breathings are only 
 used intermittently, when the scribe thought them neces- 
 sary in order to avoid confusion or mistake. 
 
 Other Marks of diaeresis (••) are often used over t and v, 
 especially at the beginnings of words. They are found in 
 non-literary as well as literary papyri. 
 
 1 Catalogue of Ancient MSS. (Greek) in tM British Museum, pp. i, 6. 
 
 jngs. 
 
 marks. 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 31 
 
 Dots are sometimes placed over letters, to indicate that 
 they are cancelled. This is especially found in the large 
 Hyperides MS. and the Herodas ; elsewhere it is more usual 
 to draw the pen through the cancelled letters. Corrections 
 are normally written between the lines, above the words 
 for which they are to be substituted ; occasionally (e. g. in 
 the Aristotle papyrus) they are inclosed between two dots, 
 but this is unessential. Omitted lines are supplied in the 
 upper and lower margins, with a mark at the place where 
 they are to be inserted {e.g. Bacchylides and Herodas 
 MSS.). The margins (lateral as well as upper and lower) 
 are also the place for scholia [e.g. Odyssey papyrus, Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. cxxviii, etc.). 
 
 Other marks, such as 7 or = to fill up blank spaces at 
 the end of a line (Brit. Mus. Hyperides MSS.), a hyphen 
 {J) under compounds to show that they are single words 
 (Bacchylides MS.), and the like, are apparently due to the 
 fancies of the individual scribes, and explain themselves. 
 Two of the critical marks used by Aristarchus to indicate 
 spurious or repeated lines in Homer (the hmXi], >, and 
 asterisk) are found in Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxviii {II. xxiii, 
 xxiv), the Oxford papyrus of II. ii, and perhaps in Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. CCLXXI [Od. iii) ; but they are not fully inserted 
 in any of these MSS. 
 
 A brief mention should be made of the rules for the Division 
 division of words in Greek papyri, because the point is at end 
 often of importance in the restoration of mutilated texts. °^ ''"'^• 
 If a word has to be divided at the end of a line, the rule 
 is that the division should be made after a vowel, except - 
 in the case of doubled consonants, where it is made after 
 the first consonant, or where the first of two or more 
 consonants is a liquid or nasal, when it is divided from the 
 others. Thus, in the course of a few lines of Hyperides 
 Pro Euocenippo the following examples occur: 'iki\yov, 
 6^|/x<i), hi.\Kaarripiov, 8tKa.|<rTa(, a\jA.ot, ^xoii|res. In the case 
 
32 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 of words compounded with a preposition, the division 
 is most commonly made after the preposition; but not 
 unfrequently the normal tendency to make the break at 
 a vowel prevails. Thus we have ela\ayyi\koit,ivcav, ■npo(T\- 
 r}Kiv, but also eijo-ayyeXiaj, v\T:eka.fj.^avis. The same tendency 
 is seen at its strongest in such divisions as TaC|r', ov\k, 
 Ka\6\ which are far from uncommon. Breaches of these 
 rules are practically unknown in literary papyri ^- The 
 only point in which variation is admitted is in combina- 
 tions of (T with another consonant, some scribes making the 
 division before the o-, and some after it. Thus in some 
 MSS. we find 8iKacr|ra^, and in others hiKa\<TTai Occasionally 
 the same scribe will fluctuate in his practice in this respect. 
 With regard to non-literary documents it is dangerous to 
 assert an universal negative, on account of their great 
 number ; but a special search through a considerable body 
 of them has failed to find a single example of a division 
 contrary to the principles above stated, and it is at least 
 clear that the rule is so generally observed that any breach 
 of it must be regarded as quite exceptional. 
 
 Abbrevia- Abbreviations are not found in well-written literary 
 '°"^" papyri, with the exception of two Psalters (late third 
 and seventh centuries), in which the common compendia 
 for Kvpios, dios, K.T.X., occur. In literary texts written in 
 cursive hands, however, they are found somewhat largely 
 in use. The chief example is the papyrus of the 'Adriva[mv 
 UoXneCa, where two of the writers whose hands occur in 
 the MS. use twenty-five abbreviations for common words 
 such as articles, prepositions, Kai, ovv, (Ivai, k.t.X. The large 
 medical papyrus in the British Museum (Pap. cxxxvii) 
 uses nearly as many, some, but not all, being identical. 
 One of the Herculaneum papyri of Philodemus (Pap. 157- 
 
 ' The contrary is stated by Wattenbach {Griech. Pa'aogr. 3rd ed., pp. 15, 
 ii8\ who characterizes the division of'woi'ds iu Egyptian papyri as 'ganz 
 regellos ' ; but this is quite a misconception. 
 
PAPYRUS AS WRITING MATERIAL 33 
 
 15a) has a few abbreviations ^ and there are also a few 
 in the scholia to the Alcman fragment, and in a collection 
 of rhetorical exercises in the British Museum (Pap. cclvi 
 verso) ; but these exhaust the list of literary texts contain- 
 ing such symbols. In non-literary papyri, as might be 
 expected, they are more freely used, especially in accounts 
 and receipts. Still more common, however, than the use 
 of symbols to denote the terminations of words {k, t, and 
 the like) is the practice of abbreviating words by the 
 simple omission of terminations. This is found in tlie 
 Aristotle and medical MSS. above-mentioned, but is es- 
 pecially frequent in non-literary documents. The regular 
 system of such abbreviations is to omit the latter part 
 of the word, and to elevate the last letter remaining above 
 the line, or else to draw a line over it as a mark of 
 abbreviation; thus either irpo'- or tt/jok may stand for 
 TrpoKeirai. Abbreviations such as these explain themselves, 
 and do not admit of tabulation ; but a list of symbols used 
 in abbreviations is given in an appendix. Contraction, 
 in the sense of the omission of the middle portion of 
 words, such as occurs in mediaeval Latin MSS and in 
 modern letters, is not found in Greek papyri ^. 
 
 The study of tachygraphy is too special a subject to Taehy- 
 be dealt with here, and the explanation of the few extant ^™^ ^' 
 specimens of it on papyrus is still obscure^. No long 
 document in this style of writing has yet been discovered ; 
 and though several small examples are said to be in the 
 Rainer collection at Vienna, they have hitherto been only 
 imperfectly published, and the explanation of their systems 
 has, in most cases, still to be given. 
 
 ' Seott, Fragmenta Herculanensia, p. 98. 
 
 ^ A supposed instance to the contrary has been pointed out in Grenfell's 
 Greek Papyri, i. 24 (now Brit. Mus. Pap. ncxx), 1. 6, where fiaaarjs is given 
 as the reading of the MS. for 0am\i<Tcrrjs. In reality the word is not con- 
 tracted at all, but simply written in a very cursive fashion. 
 
 ' See (in addition to the older literature) Gitlbauer, Vie Brei Systeme cler 
 griechisohen Tachygraphie (1894), and Wessely, ISin System altgriechischer Tacky- 
 graphie (1895), both in the Denkschriften of the Vienna Academy. 
 
 I> 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 
 NON-LITEEABY PAPTKI ^ 
 
 The three The history of Greek writing upon papyrus has three 
 periods of ^ell-marked periods, the distinction between which is the 
 palaeo- foundation of all palaeographical knowledge of the subject, 
 grap y. ijij^ggg periods correspond to the three political administra- 
 tions by which the country was successively governed after 
 the extinction of the native Egyptian empire. From 323 
 to 30 B. c. it was under the sway of the Ptolemies ; from 
 the conquest by Augustus to the re-organization of the 
 empire by Diocletian, it was administered from Rome; 
 and from the time of Diocletian to that of the Arab 
 conquest in A. D. 640, it was a part of the eastern or 
 Byzantine division of the Roman world. The changes in 
 the prevalent type of handwriting curiously reflect the 
 changes in the administration; and the classification of 
 hands as Ptolemaic, Roman, or Byzantine is not merely 
 conventional, but corresponds to real difierences of character 
 which can be made obvious to the most untrained eye. 
 
 It is, however, only of the non-literary hands that this 
 proposition is true in so extreme a form; and the reason 
 for this does not seem difficult to imagine. The pattern 
 
 ' In parts of this chapter I have made use of my own treatment of the 
 same subject In the Introduction to the first volume of the Catalogue of 
 Greek Papyri in the British Museum (1893), but vrith amplifications and modi- 
 fications according to the new material which has come to light since 
 that was written. The book is, of course, one which will have come into 
 the hands of few but specialists. 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 35 
 
 for the non-literary hands — not merely for those of pro- 
 fessional clerks, but, through them, also for those of private 
 persons — was set by the government officials, and varied 
 according as the higher members of that class came from 
 Alexandria, Rome, or Constantinople. The literary class, 
 on the other hand, had no direct dependence on the 
 political capital. If they were dependent on any outside 
 influence, it was that of Greece, the fountain from which 
 their higher inspirations were drawn, and with which they 
 were connected by a strong and continuous tradition. Only 
 gradually, and at some considerable distance, were the 
 fashions of literary manuscripts affected by the contem- 
 porary varieties in every-day writing ; and it requires 
 a little practice to see where the characteristics of non- 
 literary papyri manifest themselves in the literary hands 
 of the same period. That they do manifest themselves, 
 however, will, it is hoped, be shown in the following 
 chapters; and the full and certain knowledge which we 
 now have of non-literary palaeography goes far to lay 
 a firm foundation for the more interesting and important 
 branch of the subject which deals with the literary 
 manuscripts. 
 
 The beginning of the history of papyrus-palaeography I-Ptole- 
 is fixed, for the present, by the discoveries of Mr. Flinders period : 
 
 Petrie in i88q, when he extricated a mass of documents of *^® Petne 
 
 papyri, 
 the third century B. c. from a number of mummy-cases found 
 
 at Gurob. The mummy-cases, instead of being of wood, 
 were made of a kind of papier-mS,ch4 the material being 
 papyrus, coated over with plaster. The papyri were evi- 
 dently nothing but the produce of the waste-paper baskets 
 of the period, torn, cut, pasted together just as they came, 
 defaced by the plaster and mutilated by rough handling; yet 
 these same rubbish-heaps, patiently sorted and set in order 
 by Prof. Mahaffy, are now the foundation of our knowledge 
 of Greek palaeography. To these must be added the great 
 Eevenue Papyrus of Ptolemy Philadelphus, the greater 
 
 D 3 
 
36 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 part of which was acquired by Mr. Petrie in 1893, and the 
 rest by Mr. Grenfell in the following year ; but this only 
 confirmed by additional examples the knowledge which 
 the Petrie papyri had already established. Before Mr. 
 Petrie's discovery there were, it is true, a few documents 
 of the third century already extant in some of the great 
 European libraries ; but they were undated, and there was 
 nothing to show their real age, which, in consequence, 
 was generally underrated. About the age of the Petrie 
 papyri there could be no doubt. Many of them were wills, 
 petitions, and similar documents, bearing precise and 
 indisputable dates in the reigns of the earliest Ptolemies 
 (with the exception of Ptolemy Soter, the founder of the 
 dynasty). The earliest definite date was in the year 
 270 B.C., the latest was in 186 B.C.; and there was no 
 reasonable doubt that the great mass of undated documents 
 lay between these limits, and that nearly all of them 
 belonged to the third century B. c. Subsequent examina- 
 tion of the previously undeciphered fragments of the collec- 
 tion has, indeed, revealed one or two later dates, but has done 
 nothing whatever to shake the general conclusion. From 
 some seventy definitely dated documents in a great variety 
 of hands, and from many scores of undated documents 
 of the same period, we have ample means for estimating 
 the character of Greek writing in Egypt — and specifically 
 in the Fayyum — in the third century B. c.^ 
 
 The first characteristic which strikes the eye in the 
 writing of this period as a whole is its freedom and 
 breadth. The style is light and flowing, strokes are free 
 and curved, without being necessarily careless and ill- 
 
 1 The descriptions which follow will be more intelligible if read with 
 the series of facsimiles published by the Palaeographical Society, or the 
 atlases accompanying the Catalogue of Greek Papyri in the British Museum (vols. 
 i. and ii.). A very useful table of alphabets is given in Sir E. M. Thomp- 
 son's Handbook of Qreek and Latin Palaeography. The facsimiles given in the 
 present volume, though fairly characteristic of their respective periods, are 
 too few to exhaust all their varieties. 
 
Plate I. 
 
 I| 
 
 m 
 
 
 '5" 
 
 ■I 
 
 --I 
 5 
 
 <^ > r^ 4 
 
 1 
 
 
 :f 
 
 »^1»r 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 37 
 
 formed. Such hands, indeed, there are among them, in 
 which cursiveness borders closely on illegibility; but the 
 characteristic hand of the period is graceful and easy, 
 showing at once a full command of the pen and a plentiful 
 supply of papyrus. Letters such as M, FT, T have an almost 
 excessive breadth in their horizontal strokes, and it needs 
 a good-sized piece of papyrus to contain any appreciable 
 quantity of writing. The Roman style is altogether smaller 
 and more compact; that of the Byzantine period, though 
 its letters are sometimes quite as large, is squarer, gene- 
 rally heavier, and shows more signs of deliberate care 
 and conscious style. The Ptolemaic scribe wrote freely 
 and often well, but without self -consciousness. 
 
 Another characteristic of Ptolemaic writing is the appear- 
 ance, which it generally presents, of a horizontal line along 
 the top of the letters. Most of the letters are shallow, and 
 the horizontal strokes in them are formed near the top, 
 while the perpendicular strokes project very Httle above 
 the line and are carried far down below it. Thus M (a very 
 characteristic letter in Ptolemaic hands) is generally formed 
 of two perpendicular strokes, stretching well below the 
 line, and united at their tops by a horizontal stroke with 
 a very shallow curve. This feature is not found in either 
 of the later periods, and indeed is more characteristic 
 of the third century B. c. than of the later Ptolemaic age. 
 Good writing of the Roman period has few prominently 
 projecting letters at all ; while the Byzantine hand, though 
 marked by very long upright strokes, presents the appear- 
 ance of an even line along the bottom of the writing, with 
 projections bristling along the top. 
 
 The specimen shown in the accompanying facsimile 
 (Plate I) is part of a letter of the year 342 B.C., and is 
 a fairly characteristic example of the hand of this period. 
 The completely cursive character of the writing is obvious 
 at first sight, as well as the line along the tops of the 
 letters described above. There are no signs of difficulty 
 
38 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 or of unfamiliarity with the use of .the pen. It is clear 
 that writing of such freedom and ease has a long history 
 behind it. 
 The third With regard to the forms of individual letters in docu- 
 cen ury ments of the third century, the most characteristic are i\, 
 M, N, TT, T, Y, and CO. <^ is often found, especially in the 
 less carefully written papyri, in the shape of a simple wedge 
 (/!-,^); M, as described above, has a very shallow curve 
 between two nearly perpendicular strokes ( n) J N frequently 
 has its final upright stroke carried up far above the line 
 {fJ, (-•) ; n is either broad and low or rounded into an almost 
 semi-circular curve ; T is almost always without the right- 
 hand portion of its cross-bar, being written with a single 
 stroke of the pen ; Y generally has a large loop, carried 
 further to the left than the right (t) ; while CO habitually 
 has its second loop represented by an almost or quite 
 straight line. These characteristics are, no doubt, most 
 apparent when the writing is least careful and formal ; but 
 few documents of the period are without some of them. 
 There is very little modulation of fine and- thick strokes. 
 As a rule the lines, though not heavy, are thick and black ; 
 and there is much unevenness in the size of the letters. 
 Hence the writing of this century, free and flowing though 
 it often is, is rarely very ornamental. The enthusiasm 
 of the first discoverers led them at times to speak too 
 highly in its praise ; but an unprejudiced comparison of it 
 with the hands of the succeeding centuries will show that, 
 at least in the specimens hitherto known, it is inferior 
 in regularity and handsomeness. 
 
 Second ^^^ *^^ ^^^* ^^^^ °^ *^® second century b. c. our material 
 
 century is mainly drawn from the papyri found in the Serapeum 
 B- c. at Memphis, many of which were written by a single scribe, 
 
 a Greek recluse in the Serapeum named Ptolemy. There 
 are, however, several examples of other hands, which justify 
 us in using this group of documents as fair evidence for 
 their period. As a whole, these hands are larger, more 
 
Platk II. 
 
 ■'|»»W»i?'li?'yT!' if pi f Wff''«vwil<yjp,««W»*f^ y i t ^ ^ 
 
 1|. : 1 
 
 4 i^i 1 
 
 
 
 i >> 1 4 * f St 
 
 1 M i ¥ . 
 
 ^- ^ i ? ^ -^ 
 
 
 A 
 
 I « 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 ^ ^i ^ 
 
 all I 
 
 5 1 1 1 J 
 I J I ^ I 
 
 w 
 
 I 
 
 ■■ 7. 
 
 I' 
 it; 
 
 i: 
 
 .'•»■ 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 39 
 
 regular, and less cursive than those of the preceding cen- 
 tury. The letters have more of an uncial form, and are 
 only linked together in groups of two and three. The 
 better-written specimens are clear and regular, and some- 
 times even handsome. The appearance of a line along the 
 top of the writing ceases almost entirely. Of the individual 
 letters, the wedge-shaped A is rarely found after the third 
 century ; it is of the minuscule type, but the loop is some- 
 times represented by a mere straight line (A") ; M is still 
 sometimes marked by its shallow depression, but oftener 
 the middle loop is carried lower down and bent to an angle 
 in the centre, so as to resemble a rough uncial M; B is 
 very large, often extending both above and below the line ; 
 the first stroke of H is higher than the second, which 
 rarely rises above the cross-bar, and is linked to the 
 following letter by a horizontal stroke from the top; 
 K is generally large, especially the upright stroke; N is 
 sometimes of the third century pattern, with the last stroke 
 rising above the hue, but is oftener of the normal uncial 
 shape ; T has acquired the right-hand portion of its cross- 
 bar, though it is still often written without lifting the pen, 
 by making the cross-bar first and then drawing the pen 
 backwards and downwards; at other times the first half 
 of the cross-bar and the down-stroke are formed together, 
 as in the third century, and the second half of the cross-bar 
 is added separately, being often attached to the succeeding 
 letter ; Y is not unlike T, being made by forming a wide, 
 shallow curve, and then drawing the pen backwards and 
 downwards; 0) is generally of the ordinary minuscule 
 type, though the second loop is still sometimes clipped. 
 
 The facsimile shown in Plate II (from Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 XLiv) is, perhaps, the best specimen of calligraphy among the 
 Serapeum papyri, though another (Pap. xxiv) is in a larger 
 and bolder hand. It is a petition from the above-mentioned 
 Ptolemy, son of Glaucias, for protection and redress on 
 account of an assault made upon him by some of the 
 
40 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Egyptian attendants in the temple. It is dated in the year 
 i6i B.C., and is written in a clear, regular, and notably 
 well-formed hand — certainly not Ptolemy's own, but 
 probably that of a professional scribe. 
 Late se- The second half of this century was almost a blank, so 
 tuiys, <j. far as palaeography was concerned, until the purchase 
 by Messrs. Grenfell and Hogarth, in 1894-5 and 1895-6, 
 of a large number of dated documents in very good 
 condition, which cover this period very fully and extend 
 into the following century. In these papyri, which come 
 from the neighbourhood of Thebes, we see the revival 
 of a fully cursive style of writing; or perhaps it would 
 be more true to say that they justify the belief that a more 
 cursive style than that of the Serapeum documents was in 
 existence during the earlier half of the century, as it had 
 been in the third century. The cursive hand of 150-100 B. c. 
 (see Plate III) is, however, quite distinct from that of 270- 
 300 B. c. It is smaller, better formed, and more ornamental ; 
 with quite as much liberty as its predecessor, but less 
 licence. The scribes have learnt to be regular without 
 being stiff, and the sizes of the letters are better propor- 
 tioned to one another. It is the best period of the 
 Ptolemaic cursive, and comes just before its decline and 
 disappearance. At the same time, it is the most diflScult 
 style of writing to describe in words. The forms of the 
 individual letters are less noticeable and peculiar than 
 in the earlier hands, and approximate to those of the 
 Roman period ; and yet the general aspect of the writing 
 is unmistakably Ptolemaic. It lacks the roundness of the 
 Eoman style, and the letters are of a uniform thickness, 
 without modulation of broad and thin strokes, with a ten- 
 dency to thickness and blackness throughout. Of the 
 individual letters, A is generally small, and its loop becomes 
 either a round spot or a straight line; H generally has 
 a ligature attached to its last stroke, whether there is 
 another letter for it to be linked with or not; the same 
 
Plate III. 
 
 ^.^^f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 LOAN. — B.C. 105. 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 41 
 
 is the case with N ; Y fluctuates between its earlier shape 
 and one more resembling a Y, of which the left-hand arm 
 is generally longer than the right. But, on the whole, 
 little reliance can be placed in the forms of single letters at 
 this period ; while, on the other hand, the general appear- 
 ance of this small, even cursive can hardly be mistaken. 
 
 The first century was, until quite lately, the most obscure The first 
 period in the whole history of papyrus-palaeography; and b. c. '^ 
 it cannot even yet be said to be adequately known. On 
 the one hand there were a few documents dated between 
 100 and 80 B. C, which carried on the tradition of the 
 preceding century without much recognizable variation ; and 
 on the other there were a few which belonged to the last 
 decade of the century, in which the Roman cast of hand was 
 already well developed. The interval of transition is now 
 precariously bridged by some papyri acquired by Messrs. 
 Hogarth and Grenfell during their campaign on behalf 
 of the Egypt Exploration Fund in 1895-6. The chief 
 conclusion to be derived from these is that the transition 
 was very rapid. In the early part of the century the 
 Ptolemaic cursive is seen to be breaking up. It becomes 
 less firm and regular, and loses its sense of style. Under 
 Ptolemy Lathyrus and Auletes it is an ugly and a broken 
 hand. In the middle of the century (if the dates assigned 
 to these documents, which are sometimes uncertain, are to 
 be trusted), several forms of letters which are characteristic 
 of the reign of Augustus are found intermixed with 
 Ptolemaic forms; and by the close of the century the 
 Ptolemaic forms have entirely disappeared, and the writing 
 is distinctly Roman. The only criterion that can be given 
 for the determination of MSS. of this period is to remember 
 that it is an age of transition, and to look for an inter- 
 mixture of forms. The styles of the end of the second 
 century B.C. and of the beginning of the first Christian 
 century must be known first, and the intermediate stage 
 will then be recognizable. 
 
42 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 II. Roman If one Special characteristic is to be assigned as, more 
 Period. ^j^^^ ^^^ other, marking off the Roman period from its 
 predecessor and its successor, it is roundness. Straight, 
 stiff lines are avoided ; curved, flowing strokes take their 
 place wherever possible. Ligatures, which in the Ptolemaic 
 cursive hand were generally straight lines, are generally- 
 curved in the Roman hand. There is more modulation 
 of strokes, and the somewhat thick and black aspect 
 of Ptolemaic writing disappears. It also becomes usual 
 to write letters as much as possible without raising the 
 pen. This is especially noticeable in the case of €, the 
 cross-bar of which is now very commonly attached to its 
 upper curve (C", C); and this formation may be taken 
 as an almost conclusive proof of a Roman date. In early 
 Roman documents, on either side of the beginning of the 
 Christian era, Y is very noticeable for the deep curve 
 of its upper part and rather prominent development of its 
 tail (^). Other letters besides € exemplify the tendency 
 to form letters in single strokes. The oblique strokes of K 
 become a curve attached to the bottom of the upright 
 stroke by an obliquely-rising ligature, so that the whole 
 letter assumes a shape resembling a written u. An almost 
 identical shape is often assumed by B, which begins in this 
 period to be frequently formed with open top, though the 
 capital form continues contemporaneously. The cross-bar 
 of N becomes a curve uniting the tops of the two upright 
 strokes (/X). A change is also observable in T,, which 
 becomes fork-shaped in many instances, and sometimes 
 almost has the form of a V (T, y). Even c[) is written 
 without raising the pen, being formed of a semi-circular 
 curve, the end of which is attached to the top of the 
 perpendicular stroke, and the latter not unfrequently falls 
 outside the curve altogether; at other times the circle 
 is represented by a stroke resembling an s lying on its 
 side, through which the perpendicular stroke descends. 
 These characteristics run, more or less, through all the 
 
Plate IV. 
 
 
 
 " ft- ^-e 4' V # jj^ » * ^ "W ,J 
 ^' -^ _ -i. .V. T" 'i ~ i^ :& '. 
 
 
 
 ^■i- ■£■«■--' 3-1- |2t': 
 
 ^ V^- ^ '^ M A v^ 4''l. i^^ 
 
 > >c J y 1^. ,v, c <;>.--X *^ i 1 
 
Plate V. 
 
 
 X- 
 
 1-. 
 
 
 
 
 5 ? i 
 
 r " 
 
 t^ X-^ 
 
 
 if, O O 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 & 
 
 ^.^ 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 E 
 
 w ,/ Its 
 
 i-ri 
 
 
 ■'■*. 
 t ' 
 
 ■n 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 '•^^: 
 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 43 
 
 Roman period, serving to diflferentiate it from the Ptolemaic First 
 and Byzantine ages, but not sufficing for the accurate *^'*" "'''• 
 dating of MSS. within the first three centuries. This is 
 a matter partly of general appearance, partly of variations 
 in a few individual letters. Documents of the reign of 
 Augustus and his successors as far as the middle of the 
 first century are generally written in a bolder and more 
 angular hand than those of a later date^. The forms 
 of the letters are more pronounced, as in the case of Y, 
 mentioned above, € and K. In the middle of the century 
 these angles have been smoothed away, and the round, 
 graceful character of the best Roman cursive is fully 
 developed. Indeed the hand may be said to be at its best 
 between the years 50 and 100. The specimen here given 
 (Plate V), from a poll-tax register of A. d. 72-3 (Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. CCLX), is a good example of the larger hand of the 
 period, and one which will be found useful in assigning 
 a date to some literary papyri in a later chapter. At the 
 same time a smaller hand, and one much more difficult 
 to read, came into fashion in the reign of Domitian ; and 
 small hands, though not unknown earlier in the Roman 
 period, become predominant from this point until the end 
 of the second century or later ; increased cursiveness going, 
 as usual, with reduced size of the letters. An example, 
 from the extreme end of the first century, is given in 
 Plate VI (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxliii). 
 
 Two letters are especially useful as indications of manu- H and C. 
 scripts written in the latter part of the first century and 
 the first half of the second. These are H and C. The 
 former letter, during this period, has two quite distinct 
 forms. One is the familiar H-shape, in which the cross-bar 
 usually rises slightly and the second upright descends from 
 it in a shallow curve ; this is found more or less throughout 
 the period, and in itself contains no criterion of age. But 
 
 1 PlatelV, an official document from the beginning of thereign of Tiberius 
 (Brit. Mus. Pap. oclxxvi), is a fairly characteristic example of this style. 
 
44 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 by the side of this there is another form, consisting of a 
 horizontal curve with an almost perpendicular tail ("], ^), 
 which is characteristic of a comparatively limited space 
 of time. In appearance it resembles the Y of the same 
 period, and is often only distinguishable from it by the 
 fact that its tail is either perpendicular or curls to the left, 
 while the tail of the Y curls to the right. This form of 
 H is, in point of origin, a modification of the ordinary 
 H-shape, in which the first perpendicular stroke is so 
 much slurred as almost to disappear, and accidental ap- 
 proximations to it are occasionally found in much earlier 
 documents ; but to these no importance can be attached, 
 and the real range of its currency may be stated as being 
 from about A.D. 50 to about 160^. There are sporadic 
 instances later than this, as is inevitably the case with 
 every palaeographical characteristic ; but the material for 
 the first three centuries is now so plentiful that we are 
 justified in asserting that the practical disappearance of 
 this form at about the date named is not accidental, 
 or a fancy based on the absence of evidence, but really 
 represents a fact in palaeography. 
 
 In the case of C the data are less precise, but still useful. 
 The C of the Ptolemaic period is upright and has invari- 
 ably a horizontal top (c ). In the early Roman period the 
 upright form is still maintained, and often the horizontal 
 top as well, though the Eoman fondness for curves shows 
 itself in the increasing use of a rounded top. Towards 
 the end of the century the curve has a tendency to be 
 carried further over, and the letter assumes a tumble-down 
 appearance (r , O, i^) ; while in the next century it sometimes 
 even passes the horizontal stage, and becomes a backward- 
 
 ' It is found very plentifully in the first and fourth hands of the 
 Aristotle papyrus (indeed it was here that its existence was first noted), 
 written about A. d. 100, and also in the accounts on the recto of the same 
 papyrus, which were written in a. t>. 78-9. Plate VI, a receipt of a. d, 97, 
 not only has this letter but generally resembles the style of the Aristotle 
 MS., and confirms the date assigned to it. 
 
Plate VI. 
 
 f ' 2^^"*^^ /^^ ^^ ^^'^'O '^' ■=- % .vs;^t.^» A-i 
 
 RECEIPT. — A.D. 97. 
 
Plate VII. 
 
 
 
 y^ S vH i *^'^***^ ^ ''^**'^'^'*^'^^ 
 
 
 '•■; .3"- ,1" ■'v:.<^-~-' ,r' - •• 
 
 RECEIPT.— A. D. 166. 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 45 
 
 facing curve (^, ^■, e.g. Oy = ay). The upright C with 
 flattened top continues simultaneously with this form 
 throughout the whole period, and consequently is not 
 to be taken as a sign of early date; but the tumble- 
 down C, according to the fairly plentiful evidence which 
 we now have on the subject, can hardly be earlier than 
 the end of the first century. Early in the third century 
 the upright form seems to have been universally resumed, 
 though in a larger and coarser type. 
 
 For the second century palaeographical material is more Second 
 plentiful than for any other period in the whole history •=®°*"''>'- 
 of writing upon papyrus, not a single year being un- 
 represented by at least one accurately dated document. 
 It is, of course, useless to pretend to lay down precise 
 laws for the discernment of documents of successive decades, 
 but the general lines of development may be indicated. 
 In papyri of the reigns of Trajan and Hadrian, the 
 letters are usually of fair breadth, and are reasonably 
 well formed ; while in the reign of Antoninus Pius, and 
 still more of Marcus Aurelius, the increased cursiveness 
 of the prevalent hand leads to the compression of letters 
 and often to their slovenly formation. A very small 
 and very cursive hand is especially characteristic of the 
 reign of Marcus ^ ; and in many of the receipts and leases 
 of this period it requires little less than divination to make 
 out the scribe's intention — especially if, as often happens, 
 illiteracy be added to cursiveness. A reaction from this 
 very minute style is manifest in the reign of Commodus 
 and under the emperors of the first part of the third 
 century; but though the writing gets larger, there is no 
 regeneration in the formation of the letters. On the con- 
 trary, from this point may be dated the break-up of the 
 Roman hand. The writing becomes rough and coarse, and 
 often extremely ugly. Letters are less formed and worse Third 
 formed, and the writing straggles unevenly over the page. ''^^ ^' 
 ' See Plate VII, a receipt of a. j>. 166 (Brit. Mus. Pap. ccoxxxii). 
 
46 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 To this rule, as to all others, there are exceptions; one 
 (Brit. Mus. Pap. cccxxii) so marked as to make us dis- 
 trust the cogency of the argument which, on the ground 
 of the occurrence in it of the name of Aurelius, assigns it 
 to this period ^. 
 
 About the second quarter of the third century a marked 
 improvement takes place, for which no adequate reason can 
 be assigned, unless it be a mere accident in the survival 
 of evidence. As a rule, the variations in handwriting in 
 Egypt curiously correspond to the changes of government. 
 The rise of a new government is accompanied by the ap- 
 pearance of a new style of writing, and the decay of the 
 writing goes hand in hand with that of the administration. 
 The rise of the Ptolemies, the collapse under Auletes and 
 his fleeting successors, the advent of the Eomans and 
 the firm rule of the early emperors, the decline when 
 Commodus and Caracalla succeeded Antoninus and 
 Marcus, the reorganization of the empire under Diocle- 
 tian, all have their palaeographical parallels in the docu- 
 ments of the period; but there seems to be no reason 
 why the chaotic years about the middle of the third 
 century should show any improvement on their prede- 
 cessors. The fact, however, remains visible in such 
 evidence as we possess, and there are several extant 
 documents between a.d. 250 and 280 which are written 
 in tidy and even ornamental hands {e.g. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 cccLi, Paris Pap. 69 e, and a Berlin papyrus shown in 
 plate xiv of Wilcken's Tafeln). 
 
 At this point in the history (about the middle of the 
 third century), the evidence which has been so plentiful 
 since the beginning of the Christian era suddenly becomes 
 extremely meagre. Indeed for the important period of 
 transition in the reign of Diocletian evidence was wholly 
 
 ' The use of the name Aurelius by private individuals was granted in 
 A. D. 212, and thenceforward it becomes so common as almost to be uni- 
 versal ; but there are certain instances of its use as far back as A, d. 175. 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 47 
 
 wanting until the acquisition by Mr. Grenfell, in 1895-6, 
 of a small group of documents (now in the British Museum) 
 from the years on either side of the turn of the century. 
 For the present, therefore, one can only speak with some 
 uncertainty as to the details of the change. That a change, 
 however, did take place, is manifest on a comparison of 
 papyri of the middle of the fourth century with those of 
 a hundred years earlier, the difference between them being 
 quite as marked as that between papyri of the reigns of 
 Auletes and Augustus. The transition period is brief, but 
 has a weU-marked character of its own. Writing becomes 
 smaller again, though not so small as in the second century. 
 It is compressed laterally, and the letters are stiffer and more 
 angular in formation, with a tendency to lean forward. 
 It looks as if the formalism of the Byzantine age began 
 to impress itself upon its scribes even from the very 
 beginning of the revolution brought about by Diocletian. 
 
 For the fourth century nearly all the evidence at present Fourth 
 extant consists of a single group of papers, containing ^^^ "'^'' 
 the correspondence of a certain Abinnaeus, who was the 
 commander of a body of auxiliary cavalry quartered at 
 Dionysias, in the Fayyum, for some years on either side 
 of A.D. 350. The larger part of this collection is now 
 in the British Museum ^ ; the rest are at Geneva. To 
 these have to be added two examples of the more orna- 
 mental writing of the period, published in Wilcken's 
 Tafeln (Nos. xv. and xvi.), and a few magical and other 
 undated papyri which, in the light of the Abinnaeus 
 papyri, we can now confidently assign to this century. 
 There are also some good specimens in the Eainer collec- 
 tion at Vienna, but these are not yet published; and 
 the same is the case (so far as facsimiles are concerned) 
 with the fourth-century documents among the Oxyrhynchus 
 
 • Many of these are reproduced in the atlas of facsimiles accompanying 
 vol. ii. of Greek Papyri in the British Museum ; and one, which is a good 
 example of the better hands in the collection, is given in Plate VIII. 
 
48 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 papyri and at Berlin. The most striking general charac- 
 teristic of fourth-century writing is an increase of size and 
 (in the better written and representative examples) of calli- 
 graphic style and ornament. The letters are boldly formed, 
 with sharp angles and prominent strokes. The better hands 
 are generally composed of fine- and delicate lines, which 
 emphasize the sharpness of the angles and the boldness 
 of the curves ; but the more illiterate hands, of which 
 there are many among the Abinnaeus papyri, are often 
 very thick and coarse. Of single letters the most notice- 
 able are K and O, on account of their increased size and 
 prominence. The sharp angles and projecting upper 
 strokes of K almost always catch the eye in documents 
 of this period ; while O, which in Ptolemaic and Eoman 
 writings is often reduced almost to a dot, is now a large 
 and conspicuous letter. The right-hand stroke of A is 
 often widely separated from the rest of the letter; and 
 sometimes a d-shaped letter takes the place of the familiar 
 form. The upper half of e is a straight oblique stroke, 
 point&ig to the right {i) ; while rj has already acquired 
 the h-shape which belongs to it throughout the Byzantine 
 period. C once more stands upright, generally with a 
 flattened top, as in the Ptolemaic and early Eoman age. 
 Finally Y is v-shaped, and ceases to be a conspicuous 
 letter. The general impression left by a page of good 
 writing of this period is one of regularity and order, 
 though not so mechanical as it subsequently became. 
 III. By- The largest unexplored tract now left in the history 
 Period. of cursive writing on papyrus is that from about A.D. 
 Fifth 060 to about A.D. 1500. A few documents from the 
 
 century. ^ . '-' . 
 
 Great Oasis, recently acquired by the British Museum from 
 Mr. Grenfell, represent the years on either side of 400, and 
 tend to show that the style current in the middle of the 
 century had not greatly changed by then. The Kainer col- 
 lection possesses some fragments of the fifth century, but 
 these have not been published, and are not available for 
 
Plate VIII. 
 
 ^-7ri^'<>^».- *^?5ifr ,:^:: .,^tii 
 
 II .,,,.,,,., , ..--;j^^,^^,. 
 
 
 
 f;2 
 
 
 LETTER, — arc A.D. 350. 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 49 
 
 comparison. It is not until close to the end of the century, 
 in A. D. 487 and 498, that dated materials are again acces- 
 sible, and these cannot be separated from the sixth century 
 in general. There, on the contrary, material is once more 
 plentiful. The first Fayyum find, which has supplied 
 documents in thousands to Vienna and Berlin, and in 
 lesser quantities to Paris, Oxford, and London, consisted 
 almost entirely of papyri belonging to this later Byzantine 
 period, extending from the beginning of the sixth century 
 to the end of , Greek writing in Egypt. Unfortunately, 
 the number of precisely dated documents of this period 
 bears a very small proportion to that of the undated 
 or insufiiciently dated ^ This is largely due to the 
 practice of dating by the fifteen-year period known as the 
 indiction (see below, p. 54), which by itself is quite useless 
 for the purpose of determining the age of a document 
 after the lapse of a few years. The consequence is that, 
 while it is generally very easy to assign a hand to the later 
 Byzantine period, it is very difficult to determine whether 
 it is of the sixth or seventh century. The difficulty is 
 increased by the conservatism of Byzantine scribes, who 
 adhere for a considerable time to the same type of hand. 
 
 Speaking generally, the fully-formed Byzantine hand Sixth and 
 is a large, well marked, and rather handsome hand ; not centuries. 
 so delicate as the best examples of the fourth century, 
 but regular, with ornamental strokes and curves, and 
 with an unmistakable air of formality. In the best 
 specimens the writing is upright and square, with plenty 
 of width, so that any given piece of Byzantine papyrus 
 contains much less writing than a similar piece of the 
 Roman, or even of the Ptolemaic period. Many of the 
 letters, also, are formed in quite peculiar manners. The 
 
 ' This defect will be rectified when dated facsimiles of the Oxyrhynchus 
 papyri of the Egypt Exploration Fund are published. The specimen 
 shown in Plate IX is not dated, but seems from its style to belong to the 
 sixth century. 
 
 E 
 
50 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 loop of a is large and generally open at the top, resembling 
 a modem a more than any a of the earlier periods. /3 is 
 generally a long, irregular oval, open at the top, and 
 with a short tail projecting downwards from the bottom 
 right-hand corner. The minuscule form of 8, resembling 
 a Latin d, is increasingly common, and has a very long 
 upright stroke; but the uncial form is also found. The 
 upper half of e is still more pronounced than in the fourth 
 century, projecting obliquely for a considerable distance 
 above the line [4). rj is generally h-shaped, with a very 
 long upright stroke, like S. Similarly, the first stroke 
 of K projects far above the line, the rest of the letter 
 being u-shaped. The left-hand stroke of A comes far 
 below the line, and is often widely separated from the 
 right-hand stroke, fi is in its minuscule form, much as 
 it is here printed, with its first stroke perpendicular 
 and stretching far below the line, u varies between the 
 uncial type, in which case the junction of the oblique 
 stroke with the second upright often takes the form of 
 a curve ( U , kl), and a cursive form resembling a Latin n. 
 o- is well rounded, generally divided in the middle, with 
 the upper half sometimes rather exaggerated, t, if not 
 of the ordinary shape, has a long tail and is deeply 
 forked at the top. v is small and v-shaped, and not 
 unfrequently becomes little more than a curved ligature 
 in combination with other letters. The upright stroke 
 of is generally united to the circle by a well-rounded 
 curve, and the whole letter is usually large and prominent, 
 — as, it may be remarked, it likewise is in vellum uncials 
 of the same period. 
 
 Besides this upright hand, a sloping style is also found 
 in use during these centuries. A papyrus in the British 
 Museum (cxiii. 5 b) shows it in existence in A. D. 542, but 
 it is especially characteristic of the later years of this 
 century and of the seventh century. The shapes of the 
 individual letters are much the same as those just described, 
 
Plate IX. 
 
 \ ' 
 
 
 .-V .' ■ ^^vv 
 
 • N -<' "^ _i —-^■^ ;*- 9 
 
 r 
 
 : ~^-^^ ■§ ^^'M'-h^ 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 
 
 51 
 
 but they assume a marked slope to the right, become 
 smaller and less square, and are laterally compressed. 
 a is more closely connected with the letter which follows 
 it, and is often a mere loop, like the v described above. 
 The upper half of e is more rounded, and, with the central 
 cross-stroke, is often separated from the lower half. 
 The left-hand stroke of X is still more prolonged, con- 
 tributing much (like the up-strokes of 8 and ?;) to the 
 sloping appearance of the writing. The tail of the first 
 stroke of fi is shortened, v is not unfrequently written 
 above the line, in the shape either of a very wide and 
 shallow curve, or sometimes of a straight line. 
 
 This sloping hand is especially characteristic of the 
 later part of the Byzantine period, but it did not ex- 
 tinguish the upright style of writing, which is found 
 even in the seventh century. For instance, the British 
 Museum has a good example of it dated in the year 619 
 (Pap. ccx). Hence it is unusually difficult to assign a 
 precise date to any undated document of this upright type, 
 and one must commonly be content to define it merely 
 as ' sixth or seventh century ' ; though in the later examples 
 the characters are generally less firm and precise than in 
 the earlier. 
 
 The two types of hand which have just been described 
 are, both of them, large, and cover a good deal of ground ; 
 but there is also a small type of hand, which is used 
 chiefly for accounts and receipts. These are usually 
 assigned to the seventh, and sometimes to the eighth, 
 century; but their age is really very uncertain, since 
 few are dated in any other way than by indictions. 
 The forms of the letters are much the same as those of 
 the larger hands, and the projecting strokes of such 
 letters as S, rj, X, fi, are equally marked ; but their smaller 
 size calls attention to the fact that the Byzantine hand, 
 at any rate in its later stages, is definitely a minuscule 
 hand. Whether written large or small, the forms of 
 
 E a 
 
52 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 nearly all the test-letters are now minuscule; and the 
 special interest of these small hands is that they indicate 
 the way to the transition from the minuscules of the 
 papyri to those of the vellum MSS. of the ninth and 
 tenth centuries. More will have to be said on this point 
 in a later chapter ; for the present it must suffice to state 
 the proposition that, while the literary hand of the Roman 
 period is the parent of the vellum uncial, the Byzantine 
 non-literary hand is the parent of the vellum minuscule, 
 which comes to the front in the ninth century as a book- 
 hand for the first time, and establishes its supremacy 
 in the tenth. 
 The end of The exact end of Greek writing upon papyrus cannot 
 .writing on be fixed; but it is certain that the Arab conquest of 
 papyrus. Egypt in A.D. 640 gave it its death-blow. Documents 
 that can be placed with certainty later than this date 
 are rare; probably there are more at Vienna than 
 anywhere else, but they are not yet accessible. The 
 latest papyrus of any length with a precise date is of the 
 year 683 ; but one long document in the British Museum 
 (Pap. Lxxvri) is probably of still later date than this '. This 
 is the will of Abraham, bishop of Hermonthis and head 
 of the monastery of St. Phoebammon at Djem^, near 
 Thebes. It forms one of a group of documents, the rest 
 of which are written in Coptic; one of these is dated 
 in the year 786, and several others are shown by internal 
 evidence to belong to about the same date. The will 
 of Abraham appears to come near the beginning of the 
 series, but there is nothing to show that it falls outside 
 the eighth century. It is a large and fairly upright 
 hand, showing that the traditions of the sixth century 
 lasted on even till this late date; only the somewhat 
 broken and degenerate look of the writing, the roundness 
 and looseness of the shapes of the letters, distinguish 
 
 ' Complete facsimile in atlaa accompanying vol. i. of Oreek Papyri in the 
 British Museum. 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 53 
 
 it from the square and precise appearance of the hand 
 from which it is descended. It marks, however, the close 
 of Greek writing in Egypt; and it is noticeable that the 
 bishop, whose testament it is, is expressly said in it to 
 be ignorant of the Greek language. The Greek language 
 was, in fact, gradually extinguished by the Arab conquest ; 
 and with it disappears our knowledge of Greek writing 
 on papyrus, since in no other land than Egypt has the 
 brittle material survived to our own time. The full 
 history of the transition from papyrus to vellum can 
 never be written, for want of the materials. 
 
 One detail of importance in connexion with non-literary The dating 
 
 01 papyri. 
 
 papyri must be mentioned before closing this sketch of 
 their history. This is the manner in which they are 
 dated. The formulas of dating differ, like the hands 
 themselves, in the Ptolemaic, Roman, and Byzantine 
 periods. In a Ptolemaic document the date is given by 
 the regnal year of the reigning sovereign, and the full 
 formula for this contains not only the name of the king 
 himself, but also a list of the priesthoods of all the defunct 
 Ptolemies ; for example (Brit. Mus. Pap. Dcxxiii). 
 
 'Qaa-ikevovTuiv KKioirdrpas Koi I3acn\e(i>s TlroXeixalov 6e&v 
 4>iXoju,jjropcoi' Scor?7ptoi' erous rj, i<f>' lepe'tos tov ovtos iv 'AXe^- 
 avbpelq 'AXe^avbpov Kat de&v ScoTiypcov koI Qe.&v 'Abe\<j)&v 
 Koi Be&v EvepyeT&v koi OeSv ^LkoTiaTopcav kol dtSiv 'Ein4>av&v 
 Koi deov EvTrdropos koI Oeov $i\o/x7jTopos koI deov ^ikonaTOpos 
 viov Koi Oeov Evepyirov koX df&v ^iXonrjTopoiv ^ton^paiv, 
 UpovTTciXov 'la-ibos iJ.eydXris ixrjTpos Oe&v, aOXocjiopov BepevCK-qs 
 EvepyeTibos, Kavr]<i>6pov 'Apinvo-qs ^iXabiXcpov, UpeCas 'Apaivorjs 
 ^iXoTtdropos, T&v ovcr&v h 'AXe^avbpeiq, iv 8e llToXeiiaibi rrjs 
 ©7j;8ai8oy e^' Upewv kol iepeiuv kuI Kavr)(}>6pov t&v ovtwv koi 
 ova-&v, fj.rivds Mex^'P ^ ^^ KpoKobiXcav lioXei tov HaOvplrov. 
 All this merely describes the year which we indicate as 
 B.C. 109. But since such a formula might be accused 
 of being cumbrous, and of including a good deal of un- 
 
54 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 important matter, it is very often reduced to the simple 
 statement Irous rj, Mex«'P m. : which errs as much from 
 brevity as the other does from length, since it omits 
 the name of the king, and it is not always that the 
 reign can be identified with certainty. 
 
 Roman dates are more business-like, but they too have 
 a longer and a shorter formula. Dates are given by the 
 regnal year of the emperor; but in both Ptolemaic and 
 Roman dates it must be remembered that the year always 
 begins with the ist Thoth (=29th August). Thus the 
 first year of a sovereign lasted only from his accession 
 to the ist Thoth next ensuing. The longer Roman 
 formulas are of the type erovs rj avroKpaTopos KaCaapos TCtov 
 Alkiov 'Abpiavov 'AvTavCvov Evaej3ovs 2e;8acrroi3, Me^elp e, 
 the shorter Irouy rj 'AvtmvCvov Kalaapos rod KvpCov. In 
 neither case can there be any doubt as to the precise 
 date intended, and it is only under some of the later 
 emperors that the accumulation of titles (TepfiavLKov 
 TlapdiKov AaKLKOV BperavviKov MeyCa-rov, and the like) 
 becomes cumbersome. 
 
 This useful and practical system of dating was, however, 
 abandoned at the time of the revolution under Diocletian. 
 In the first instance dating by the consuls of the year 
 was substituted; but in the year 313 the system of the 
 indiction was instituted. This was a fifteen-year period, 
 beginning on difierent days in different parts of the 
 empire. At Constantinople it began on the ist September, 
 in Egypt on a fluctuating date about the middle of June, 
 at the time of the rising of the Nile^- Its origin is 
 uncertain, but it is probably a modification of the fourteen- 
 year census-period in use under the Romans. The formula 
 of dating by the indiction is ^apfxovOi C ^ IvbiKnSyvos, 
 meaning the fifteenth year of the current indiction-period ; 
 but as the indiction-periods are not themselves numbered, 
 
 ' See Greek Papyri in the British Museum, i. 196-8. 
 
NON-LITERARY PAPYRI 55 
 
 this dating is absolutely useless from our point of view. 
 Sometimes the names of the consuls db the regnal year 
 of the emperor are added, but this is not by any means 
 the regular practice; and consequently the dating of 
 Byzantine documents remains an obscure subject, in spite 
 of the immense mass of material for the period which is 
 in existence. The publication of select dated facsimiles 
 from the Vienna and Berlin collections is much to be 
 desired, in order to remove this obscurity; but perhaps 
 a speedier revelation may be looked for from the Egypt 
 Exploration Fund. 
 
CHAPTEE IV 
 
 LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 
 
 In passing to the consideration of literary papyri, one 
 enters what is at once the most important and the least 
 familiar part of the subject. Non-literary papyri, as will 
 have been seen from the preceding chapter, are plentiful 
 and fairly well supplied with precise dates ; literary papyri 
 are comparatively rare and can seldom be dated, even 
 approximately, on other than purely palaeographical evi- 
 dence. Nor can all manuscripts which contain literary 
 works come properly into consideration here, since some 
 of them are not written in formal book-hand at all, but 
 in the ordinary private or non-literary hand of the day. 
 Such is, notably, the papyrus containing Aristotle's Consti- 
 tution of Athens ; also a large medical manuscript in the 
 British Museum, containing considerable extracts from the 
 'larpLKr] Swmywyj? of Menon, the pupil of Aristotle, some- 
 times ascribed to Aristotle himself; and an astronomical 
 treatise derived from Eudoxus in the Louvre, of the second 
 century B. c. In this way the bulk of the materials at our 
 disposal is reduced ; but on the other hand there are a few 
 documents of a private or business character which are 
 written by professional scribes in literary hands ; and these, 
 bearing, as they do, precise dates, are very valuable items 
 of evidence for the .construction of the history of papyrus- 
 palaeography on its literary side. 
 
 Indeed the document to which is generally assigned 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 57 
 
 the first place in any treatment of the subject is itself, 
 to some extent, one of this description, being a non-literary 
 composition written in an uncial hand. This is the so-called The 
 ' Curse of Artemisia,' consisting of the imprecations of Artemisia, 
 a woman against the father of her child, who has de- 
 serted her, written in an extremely archaic uncial hand. 
 The papyrus was found on the site of the Serapeum 
 at Memphis (though not with the papers of the recluse 
 Ptolemy, mentioned in the last chapter), and is now in the 
 Imperial Library at Vienna.^. It has been assigned by 
 Blass and Wessely to the fourth century b. c, by Thompson 
 to the early part of the third ; and there is no doubt that 
 the forms of the letters, recalling as they do those of 
 inscriptions upon stone, have a very early appearance. 
 The letters are stiff" and angular, with few curves; A 
 and E are of the square epigraphic shape, the latter 
 generally having the top horizontal stroke very long; 
 © is a circle enclosing a dot ( O ) ; O is small ; C is of a form 
 intermediate between the Z of the inscriptions and the C of 
 the papyri (C, (); GO retains much of the epigraphic form (u-i, 
 v^l) ; a colon is used for purposes of punctuation, as in in- 
 scriptions and a few early papyri. What militates against 
 the value of this document for palaeographical purposes 
 is its extremely rough and untrained appearance. It is 
 not the work of a professional scribe, but the writing 
 of an uneducated woman who uses uncial letters because 
 she can form no others. If Greek writing were at this 
 .period just issuing from the purely epigraphic stage, stress 
 might fairly be laid upon the use of epigraphic forms 
 as a proof of age ; but since we now know that men wrote 
 freely and easily upon papyrus long before this time, this 
 argument falls to the ground. Artemisia used letters like 
 those employed in inscriptions for the same reason that 
 an illiterate person always uses capitals, because such 
 
 ' Facsimile in i\e Palaeographical Society's publications, vol. ii. pi. 
 141. 
 
58 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 letters were commonly before her eyes in public places, 
 while she had probably seldom seen a book. It is on 
 evidence of a different character that the early date of this 
 document can alone be maintained. The traces of Ionic 
 dialect ('Apre/xio-t??, iKeTJjpiTj), the assimilation of the final 
 consonants of prepositions to the first letter of the following 
 word (kfj. iroa-fponn, iy yfji), and the occurrence of forms 
 of letters which are found not only in inscriptions but in 
 papyri known to belong to the third century, such as those 
 of e, 0, (0, described above, may be admitted as legitimate 
 evidence that this is a genuinely early document ; but it is 
 not one on which we could base any sound argument 
 as to the character of contemporary MSS,, if we had no 
 knowledge on this point from other sources of information. 
 The third Our knowledge of the literary palaeography of the third 
 cen ury century B. c. is based, in fact, entirely on the papyri 
 The Petrie discovered by Mr. Flinders Petrie in the mummy-cases 
 of Gurob, to which reference has already been made more 
 than once. Among them, in addition to the non-literary 
 documents described in the last chapter, were several 
 fragments of literary works; and it is a fair conclusion 
 that these are of about the same age as the non-literary 
 papers among which they were found. The argument 
 is, of course, not quite decisive. The papyri out of which 
 the Gurob cartonnages were made were, no doubt, waste 
 paper at the time when they were so used ; and it may be 
 questioned whether literary and non-literary documents 
 found in the same waste-paper basket are likely to be 
 of the same age. On the one hand it has been argued 
 that a well-written MS. of Plato or Euripides would 
 not be thrown away nearly so soon as mere business 
 papers of ephemeral interest, and hence that the fragments 
 here in question may easily be as early as the fourth 
 century. Against this it has been contended that such 
 documents as wills, leases, and receipts, which form the 
 titles to property, would probably be preserved for several 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 59 
 
 generations, while a copy of a literary work might be 
 thrown away at any time if it were found defective 
 or injured in any way. These arguments may perhaps 
 be allowed to neutralize one another. Titles to property 
 do not seem to have been preserved with the same tenacity 
 as in modern days, and were indeed unnecessary when 
 a register of ownership was kept by the government; 
 while, if some of the literary MSS. were of a period much 
 earlier than that at which they w«re converted into 
 mummy-cases, we should expect to find a perceptible 
 gradation of hands in the various fragments, some being 
 old while others were more recent. This is not the case 
 to any important extent; and we are therefore justified 
 in assigning the literary fragments among the Petrie 
 papyri to the same period as their non-literary companions, 
 namely to the third century. 
 
 To the Petrie fragments may now be added a few scraps 
 acquired by Mr. Grenfell in 1895-6, which, though bearing 
 no independent proof of their date, evidently belong to the 
 same period^- What we have, therefore, in all, as our 
 material for judging of the literary palaeography of the 
 third century, consists of the following: four columns of 
 the Antiope of Euripides^; a,bout twelve columns, besides 
 minor fragments, of the Phaedo of Plato ^; five columns 
 of the Laches of Plato*; and about a score of minute 
 fragments of various works °, all of them unknown with 
 the exception of a few pieces of Homer. Some of these, 
 however, can hardly be reckoned as literary hands. With 
 these, and with the evidence derivable from the non-literary 
 
 ' Facs. in Grenfell, Greek Papyri, vol. ii. pi. i ; now in British Museum. 
 
 ^ Facs. in Mahaffy, Flinders Petrie Papyri, part I. pll. i, ii ; now in British 
 Museum. 
 
 ' Facs. ib., pll. v-viii ; partial facs. in Plate X and in Pal. Soc. vol. ii. 161 ; 
 now in British Museum. 
 
 * Facs., Mahaffy, part II. pll. xvii, xviii ; now in Bodleian Library. 
 
 ° Facs., ib., part I. pll. iii, iv, ix, x, xxv; part II. pi. xvi; and Grenfell, 
 1. c. : now divided between the British Museum and the Bodleian. 
 
6o PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 papyri of the same period, the history of writing during 
 the century has. to be reconstructed. 
 
 An examination of these texts shows, in the first place, 
 that they fall into two groups, one consisting of very 
 small hands, while the others are larger and present 
 generally a rougher appearance, apart from differences 
 in the formation of individual letters. The more impor- 
 tant, and also the best- written, texts are all in the smaller 
 hand, which may fairly be taken as representing the 
 writing in current use for books intended for public 
 circulation.. They include the Phaedo and, Antiope MSS., 
 a few of the Petrie fragments, and all those of Mr. Grenfell. 
 The order of antiquity among them can only be deter- 
 mined by the more or less archaic appearance of the 
 writing. In the beginnings of writing on papyrus it 
 cannot be doubted that, in formally and carefully written 
 MSS., the shapes of the letters were nearly identical 
 with those in contemporaneous use in inscriptions; and 
 the greater or less occurrence of epigraphic forms, in 
 a MS., written, not by an uneducated person (as in the 
 case of the Artemisia, papyrus), but by a trained scribe, 
 may be taken as evidence- for a relatively earlier or 
 Early later date.. Applying this test, the earliest examples 
 ragments. a,mong the papyri now extant would seem to be (as 
 Mr. Mahaffy and Mr. Grenfell have already noticed) a frag- 
 ment of a prose narrative of the adventures of Heracles, 
 among the Petrie papyri ^, and two minute scraps among 
 Mr. Grenfell's. The most notably early among the forms 
 of letters in these fragments are the square E with broad 
 top ; with a central dot instead of a cross-stroke ; CO in its 
 transition forms, between H and w; and especially Z, 
 formed of three parallel horizontal bars with a perpen- 
 
 ' An alphabet from this fragment is given by Mahaffy in his Flinders 
 Petrie Papyri, part I, p. 65 ; and an alphabet from the largest of Mr. Grenfell's 
 fragments forms col. i of the table given in Appendix I to this essay, 
 to which the reader may be referred for illustrations of the descriptions 
 of the individual letters which follow. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 6i 
 
 dicular stroke cutting them at right angles, and C in the 
 angular epigraphic shape. These last two characters belong 
 only to the Greni'ell fragments ; the Heracles fragment has 
 no example of a Z, and its C is semi-circular. Of the other 
 letters it is sufficient to observe that A is of the uncial 
 shape, like a modern capital A ; H is rather rounded 
 on both sides; "the two strokes composing A meet at the 
 top ; M is somewhat deeply curved in the Grenf ell fragment 
 and angular in the Heracles ; O is very small ; fl is rather 
 broad, with the right leg inclined to be shorter than 
 the other ; and Y is shaped as here printed. Not all these 
 letters are of value for determining the status of these 
 texts among other third-century, or even among Ptolemaic, 
 papyri; but it is necessary to note them for comparison 
 with the forms which came into existence in later periods. 
 
 Somewhat later than these fragments — perhaps about The 
 the middle of the third century — must be placed the two and An- 
 great treasures of Mr. Petrie's find, the Phaedo and the WopeMSS. 
 Antiope. In these cases we have some substantial part 
 of each MS. preserved, and are in a better position to 
 judge of their general appearance. The hand is not the 
 same in both, that of the Phaedo being noticeably better 
 and more careful; but in size and formation of letters 
 they are alike. The writing is extremely small, with 
 the object, no doubt, of making neat and handy volumes ; 
 the complete Antiope, supposing it to have been a play 
 of between 1400 and 1500 lines, would have occupied a roll 
 of about I a feet in length. Of the individual letters^, 
 A is of the uncial shape, in the Antiope sometimes (but not 
 always) approaching nearer to the epigraphic shape by 
 having the cross-bar bent downwards into an angle. The 
 Plato also sometimes has the square E with elongated top ; 
 but elsewhere in the Plato, and always in the Euripides, 
 the rounded form of the letter is found. Z (which does 
 
 ' See alphabets in columns 2 and 3 of the table in Appendix I. 
 
62 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 not occur in the earlier fragments described in the last 
 paragraph) has the form, peculiar to the third century, 
 of two parallel bars joined by a perpendicular stroke ; 
 has a cross-stroke, though it does not always accurately 
 fit the circle ; A and M are of the forms already described ; 
 Z is composed of three parallel and unconnected strokes, 
 and this, it will be found, is characteristic of the Ptolemaic 
 age alone, and forms a useful criterion for distinguishing 
 Ptolemaic MSS. Of the remaining letters, fl is very 
 broad in the Phaedo (it will be remembered that this 
 is a feature of third-century non-literary papyri), less 
 so in the Antiope ; C is small and rounded, the top some- 
 times slightly flattened ; CO is of the minuscule shape, the 
 second loop being often incompletely formed. 
 
 The beauty of these hands, and especially of the Plato, 
 has been eulogized in terms which are, perhaps, somewhat 
 exaggerated; not unnaturally, since, in the state of our 
 knowledge at the time of their discovery, it was a surprise 
 to find writing of so early a date which showed such 
 freedom of style, combined with so much orderliness 
 and precision. Both Mr. MahaSy and Sir E. Thompson 
 speak of the Plato, in particular, as a MS. of extreme 
 beauty. Now that the first joy of discovery has worn off, 
 it seems evident that they are not the equals of the best 
 specimens of the Roman period, or even, it may be, of the 
 later Ptolemaic age. There is a general appearance of 
 neatness about these small, yet firm, hands; but there 
 are considerable inequalities in size among the letters, 
 which would be more noticeable if they were written 
 on a larger scale, and they lack the handsomeness of the 
 larger hands which came into favour later. The Antiope 
 MS., indeed, hardly achieves the praise of neatness, being 
 decidedly rough and irregular in places, besides being more 
 compressed than the Plato. It cannot be supposed that 
 this is a fair example of the volumes preserved in the 
 great Alexandrian library, though it may represent the 
 
Plvte X. 
 
 
 -.*« 
 
 
 
 
 ^-Th] "? 
 
 *\»V'Tr^K r f,t 
 
 r "* /x ■ ^ ' ' 
 
 'i-f 
 
 5rc- •,•»<.- 
 
 
 ,H v--j.|^ ^^ ^..^j-^-r-ij ^^ ^(^^v.. . -■ 
 
 
 •- f'%.-^ —p ■')fr-«^f,-« f.v ">■£.*''"'' ^ ^ ' -»--/naiv". 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 "-i 
 
 
 ,_ >r' KA'f-"^ 
 
 
 '^""Ta 
 
 
 «*^r=- 
 
 ^f>- ~ 
 
 
 
 - -?.;-(' 
 
 -3" 
 
 >'. 
 
 .^ 
 
 PLATO, PHAEDO.- 3RD CENT. B.C. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 63 
 
 style which would pass muster in the book-shops. Nor 
 do the texts come up to the Alexandrian standard of 
 accuracy. How far they fall short is a question to which 
 the answer depends on the solution of the critical problem 
 as to the authenticity of certain readings which depart 
 from the vulgate; but apart from these there are more 
 obvious blunders than can have been admitted in the great 
 libraries which handed down, in most cases, such pure 
 texts to the vellum MSS. of the tenth and later cen- 
 turies, on which our present knowledge of the classical 
 authors is based. Yet, with all these deductions, the 
 Phaedo and Antiope papyri have a great attractiveness 
 of appearance, and rank high among papyrus MSS. 
 of any age ; nor would any one deny their extreme value 
 for the history of Greek writing. With their aid we can 
 not only realize how Greek books were written in the days 
 of the early Ptolemies, but can, by a legitimate use of 
 inference and imagination, picture to ourselves the contents 
 of the book-shops of Athens in the times of Menander and 
 Demosthenes, perhaps even of Aristophanes and Sophocles. 
 Between the literary hands which have hitherto been 
 described, and the non-literary hands of the same period, 
 there is no very marked resemblance. Some of the letters, 
 such as n and Z, and to a less extent M, T, and Y, would 
 be recognized as Ptolemaic in style, but it would be 
 very difficult to assign these MSS., on palaeographical 
 grounds alone, to the same period as the non-literary 
 documents which bear dates in the reigns of the early 
 Ptolemies. There is, however, another type of hand to 
 which this statement applies much less fuUy. Several 
 of the literary MSS. among the Petrie papyri are 
 in larger hands, approximating to those of the con- 
 temporary non-literary documents. Chief among these The 
 are the fragments of the Laches of Plato, now at Oxford, M^s^'^and 
 the curious scrap of Homer containing several additional others, 
 verses, the fragments of the Mouseion of Alcidamas and 
 
64 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 another rhetorical treatise ^. The other classical fragments 
 published by Prof. Mahafiy likewise belong to this category, 
 but they are so small, and in some cases approach so 
 closely to the non-literary hand, that they can hardly 
 be taken into account. In this class of hands, while 
 the uncial forms of some letters, such as A, H, K, N, are 
 preserved, and the straggling appearance of the non-literary 
 hands is avoided, the writing on the whole is recognizably 
 akin to the non-literary type. The letters are larger 
 and squarer than in the Phaedo and Antiope; 6, Cx), and 
 in some cases M, are definitely of the minuscule form ; 
 and the writing is without the style and attractiveness 
 — due, no doubt, to greater care — which characterize the 
 smaller hands described above. The MSS. of this larger 
 type cannot be regarded as having been intended for 
 sale or general circulation. They are rather the work 
 of ordinary scribes, employing a somewhat modified 
 form of the current handwriting of the day, which they 
 have adapted for literary purposes by reducing its excessive 
 breadth and cursiveness, making it squarer and firmer, 
 without, however, achieving much of beauty or regularity. 
 
 The For the second century b. C. materials are, at present, 
 
 century very scarce. There has been no great discovery of 
 documents of this period, comparable to the Petrie ' find ' ; 
 and the principal groups of non-literary material which 
 have come to light — the Serapeum papyri for the first 
 half of the century and Messrs. Hogarth and Grenfell's 
 papyri for the second half — contribute between them only 
 one MS. which can in any way be classed as literary. In 
 addition to this single MS. there is also one isolated 
 discovery belonging to this period, which is of considerable 
 interest. Both MSS. are now in the Louvre, the last- 
 mentioned, a recent acquisition, being the famous oration 
 of Hyperides against Athenogenes — one of the orator's 
 
 ' Petrie Papyri, part I, nos. lo, 25. 
 
 B. 0. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 65 
 
 masterpieces — while the other, acquired at a much earlier 
 date, is a dialectical treatise containing quotations from 
 a number of classical authors, such as Sappho, Alcman, 
 Ibycus, Homer, and Euripides. Both MSS. are shown 
 to be not later than the second century B.C. by the 
 existence of writing on their backs belonging to the 
 Ptolemaic period ; while neither of them shows any such 
 marked resemblance to the Petrie papyri as would justify 
 the assignment of them to the third century. The 
 dialectical treatise must, however, belong to the first 
 half of the second century at latest, since the writing 
 on its verso is dated in the year 160 B.C. For the 
 Hyperides the only evidence we have to go upon is the 
 statement of Prof. E. Revillout, its first editor, that it 
 bears on its verso accounts in demotic, belonging to the 
 Ptolemaic period. No more precise indication of their 
 date has been given; but this is sufficient to show that 
 the text of the oration can hardly be later than the 
 second century, while certain resemblances between its 
 writing and that of MSS. belonging to the following 
 century seem to make it probable that it belongs to the 
 second half of the century rather than the first. From 
 only two MSS., and these exhibiting very different types 
 of writing, it is obviously dangerous to draw any very . 
 sweeping conclusions as to the literary palaeography of the 
 period; but they serve to bridge over the gulf between 
 two periods for which our information is more complete. 
 
 The dialectical fragment ^ is written in narrow columns The Paris 
 of about two inches in breadth, leaning (as in several Fragment, 
 other early papyri) strongly to the right. Divisions in 
 the sense are marked by slight spaces in the writing, 
 and by paragraphi below the beginnings of the lines in 
 which the pauses occur. The hand is small, though not 
 
 ' Complete facsimile (not photographic) in the Album to Notices et 
 Extraits, plate xi ; photographic facsimile of three columns in Pal. Soc. ii. 
 180, and of one column in Plate XI. Alphabet in Appendix I, col. 4. 
 
 F 
 
66 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 so minute as those of the Phaedo and Antlope; it is 
 evidently to be regarded as the lineal successor of these 
 hands. The most noticeable modification in general form 
 is a tendency to roundness and curved forms of letters. 
 In this respect a transitional form may be found in a 
 small fragment discovered and published by Mr. Grenfell ^ 
 The letters are also more even and uniform in size; and 
 in many of their forms they approximate to some of 
 the MSS. found at Herculaneum, which must be at 
 least a century later. Of the individual letters, A is the 
 most noticeable, as giving the first example of a form 
 found in some other early papyri. It is a modification 
 of the uncial form, the original left-hand stroke and the 
 cross-bar being formed together into the shape of a sort 
 of vpedge {i.), across the open end of vphich the right-hand 
 stroke is drawn, generally in a curve (a). It is an inter- 
 mediate form between the uncial (A) and the fully 
 developed minuscule (d^), which can be written without 
 raising the pen. Another letter which shows a transitional 
 form is Z, in which the middle stroke is neither perpendicular 
 as in the Petrie MSS., nor drawn obliquely from end to 
 end of the horizontal strokes as in later papyri, but is 
 intermediate between these two forms. H and K are 
 strongly curved. A is noticeable for its right-hand stroke 
 in some cases (but not in all) being carried beyond the 
 point of junction; again a sign of transition, since this 
 is generally characteristic of late Ptolemaic and Roman 
 MSS. Z is still decidedly Ptolemaic, being formed of three 
 distinct strokes, the middle one of which is very small; 
 so also is n, which generally retains its breadth. C is 
 well rounded ; and the curve of Y is more strongly marked 
 than before. The other letters have no peculiarities that 
 need be noticed. The general aspect of the writing is 
 neat and graceful ; less strong than the best third-century 
 hands, but somewhat more ornamental. 
 ' Qreek Papyri, ii. pi. i, no. a ; now Pap. ncLxxxixa in the British Museum. 
 
Plate XI. 
 
 J . . . ■ " I 
 
 ■M .n:>./ 
 
 I 
 
 jTf ocJ-f^sf^c<roY>*J^ xk^« 
 c-^>4 o Y-j-'^^^Aj-f <r <> K w.-< 
 
 »-T c o V-'2i«£ Vt^ cA-<T-i £.^jUj c « ; 
 
 — ^>-<Cr~-ro/ <»n T f o r >- jvr>r «r 
 T>r>i./ 0'Y^fsf-Aj<ji'ctvT>roY' 
 '-jr*^<zA.Tre4'l <W>*.-T04Y^cy 
 
 
 f iij^ /• ■■■■. ■■ ■. "*. ,- 
 
 c^jy d <'co-<iy <wVo<ij ♦TAwo >< vetA. 
 
 i-oJfy ' •*T*^-•^"^r■4'>^-<:Jr«'»-<rt'xionr 
 
 I ay ^^>£AA.-c'3^;JJa.■<.Df^;XAeJt»-Tof 
 
 
 DIALECTICAL TREATISE. — 2ND CENT. B.C. 
 
Plate XII. 
 
 ■■'':;~^^^--- 4^ 
 
 r,^- - .- 
 
 ■^ '-J «t*<>^ /^Q'T'^fnP A^^^/hAT©/ ONt«JH'/^' ^ :^^^ 
 
 HYPERIDES I.\ ATHEiNOGENEM. — 2.\D CENT. B.C. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 67 
 
 The Louvre Hyperides^ presents a very diflferent The 
 appearance from its colleague. If the main characteristics Hyper- 
 of the latter are grace and roundness, those of the ides. 
 Hyperides are strength and squareness. The columns 
 are broad and upright, instead of being narrow and 
 sloping. The letters are firm and noticeably square in 
 appearance, besides being larger than those of the dialectical 
 treatise. The uncial forms of such letters as A, H, M, are 
 retained, and all the characters are fully and carefully 
 formed. This MS. is, in fact, the first example of 
 a phenomenon which runs all through the history of 
 literary papyri, namely the retention of a fully developed 
 uncial form of writing side by side with hands in which 
 a certain concession to the cursive style is discernible. 
 The dialectical treatise is an example of this intermixture 
 of the cursive element, while the Hyperides rejects it. 
 It is obviously more difficult to assign dates to the strict 
 uncial hands, which approach the epigraphic style rather 
 than that of non-literary documents; but there are some 
 letters on which dependence may generally be placed. 
 In the present instance, Ptolemaic characteristics are 
 Tmmistakably to be found in A, the right-hand stroke 
 of which projects very slightly, or not at all, above the 
 point of junction; in M, which has a shallow, angular 
 depression ; in the three unconnected strokes of Z ; and 
 (less distinctively) in the Y-shaped form of Y. Of the 
 other letters it need only be' noted that A and A have 
 the peculiarity of a short projecting stroke above the 
 apex; that Z sometimes has its down-stroke drawn to 
 the middle of the lower bar, instead of to its left-hand 
 end; and that € has the cross-bar rather high, while the 
 upper curve is carried well over, so as nearly or quite 
 
 ' Complete facsimile with printed text, edited hy E. Eevillout (1893) ; 
 one column in Byperides, the Orations against Athenogenes and PhUippides, 
 edited hy F. G. Kenyon; another in Plate XII. Alphabet in 
 Appendix I, col. 5. 
 
 F 2 
 
68 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 to meet it again. The general appearance of the hand 
 is attractive and imposing, and, although less economical 
 of space than the minute hands of the Phaedo and Antiope, 
 it has good claims to be considered a more handsome style 
 of writing. It is, moreover, very distinct, and therefore a 
 valuable medium for the safe transmission of literary texts. 
 The Passing from this, the finest example of second-century 
 
 niad. calligraphy, there are two other literary papyri of the 
 same period which deserve a brief mention. The first 
 of these is a fragment containing a small portion of the 
 eleventh book of the Iliad, in which, as in the Petrie 
 fragment mentioned above, there are some additional 
 verses which are not found in the vulgate. The papyrus 
 is at Geneva, and the text has been published by Prof. 
 Nicole, who, however, does not assign any date to it. 
 From a fascimile, however, published by Prof. Diels', 
 it is clear that it belongs to the second century B.C., 
 being written, in fact, not in a literary hand at all, but 
 in a reduced form of the common non-literary hand 
 which meets us in the Serapeum papyri^- The question 
 as to the character of the enlarged text contained in it 
 does not come within the scope of the present essay; 
 though it may be observed that this is the latest example 
 of such a text which has yet come to light. Some 
 additional specimens of it have lately been acquired by 
 Mr. Grenfell, but they, like the Petrie fragment, belong 
 to the third century B.C. 
 Tiie Erotic The other literary papyrus alluded to above is the 
 ragment. fragmg^^ of a_ mime, written either in rhythmical prose 
 or in lyrical verse without strophic correspondences (for 
 scholars differ), recently published by Mr. Grenfell ^ This 
 
 ' Sitzungsberichte der k. pt-evssischen Akademie, 1894, no. xix. 
 
 ' It is the more necessary to record the date of this MS., because Prof. 
 Mahaffy, in a moment of aberration , has assigned it to the second century 
 after Christ. 
 
 ' Greek Papyri, vol. i. {An Alexandrian Erotic Fragment), no. i. Now Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. Dcv verso. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 69 
 
 unquestionably belongs to the second century B.C., but 
 is written in a non-literary hand, and therefore does not 
 require separate treatment here. It is inscribed on the 
 verso of a document dated 173 B.C., in a small cursive 
 hand. 
 
 There are other papyri which have sometimes been con- 
 jecturally assigned to the second century B.C., notably 
 two of the British Museum MSS. of Hyperides ; but in 
 the pages which follow these MSS. have been referred to 
 other periods, and wiU not be discussed until we arrive 
 at the dates to which, according to the evidence now 
 available, they appear to belong. 
 
 From the scantiness of evidence which is thus seen 
 to be available, it is impossible to formularize any very 
 dogmatic conclusions as to the literary palaeography of 
 the second century b. c. ; especially as the two MSS. which 
 form the principal sources 8f our knowledge exhibit very 
 different types of writing. It is fortunate, however, 
 that the approximate dates of these two MSS. are estab- 
 lished with more certainty than usual, by the writings 
 which each has upon its verso. We are thus in possession 
 of fixed points from which other examples may be dealt 
 with ; and in approaching the doubtful period which follows 
 next such fixed points are very valuable. 
 
 The first century B.C. is, indeed, a period which requires The first 
 careful handling and little dogmatism, both because several 3^°. ""^^ 
 interesting MSS. have been assigned to it with various 
 degrees of doubtfulness, and because it contains the 
 transition from the Ptolemaic to the Roman periods. 
 A special element of complexity is introduced by the 
 Herculaneum papyri, which, from their character and 
 the circumstances of their preservation, must necessarily 
 belong either to this century or the next, and which, for 
 the first and last time, carry the range of available 
 evidence beyond the borders of Egypt. There are a few 
 fixed points which mark out the stages of the inquiry. 
 
70 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 and round these the attempt must be made to group 
 the other documents which, on palaeographical grounds 
 alone, appear to belong to the period. 
 TlieHer- The Herculaneum papyri, with which it will be con- 
 plpyri"" venient to deal first, raise a question which has not 
 yet been discussed, namely how far the history of palaeo- 
 graphy in Egypt applies to the Greek-writing world 
 outside. The question cannot be fully answered, for 
 want of sufficient materials ; but it can be answered 
 sufficiently for all practical purposes. The analogy of 
 mediaeval Latin MSS. shows that the distinctions be- 
 tween contemporary MSS. written in different countries 
 are less than those between MSS. written in the same 
 country but at the distance of a century or so of time. 
 It requires more experience to determine the country of 
 a MS. than its date. There is no reason to doubt 
 that the same would be the case with Greek writing on 
 papyrus; on the contrary, there is the more reason to 
 expect uniformity, since all Greek MSS., in whatever 
 country, would be written either by Greeks or by those 
 who had learnt their writing from Greeks. We have, 
 in fact, practically the same conditions as prevailed in 
 the Greek minuscule writing of the late Middle Ages. It 
 may be possible for special experience sometimes to dis- 
 tinguish Greek MSS. written in Italy from those written 
 in Greece and Constantinople, but it is not necessary to 
 possess this special knowledge in order to assign the date 
 of a MS. with sufficient accuracy. 
 
 When, therefore, we find that the papyri discovered 
 at Herculaneum, though not exactly like any of the 
 Egyptian papyri, yet do not differ from them more than 
 they differ among themselves, and possess strong re- 
 semblances both in general appearance and in particular 
 detail, there need be no hesitation in applying to them 
 the same criteria of age as to their Egyptian relatives. 
 No doubt there may have been local distinctions, which 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 71 
 
 fuller evidence might enable us to discern ; and certain 
 features may have continued longer or less long in 
 Alexandria or in Rome; but this range of uncertainty 
 is no greater than that which applies to the whole 
 subject of supplying conjectural dates to undated MSS., 
 and in practice may be ignored. It may, however, 
 be worth while to bear in mind that Greek writing was 
 an exotic among the Romans, while it was naturalized 
 in Egypt ; hence it is likely that changes in the prevalent 
 styles of writing began rather in Alexandria than in 
 Rome, so that possibly MSS. written in Italy may be 
 slightly later in date than MSS. showing the same 
 characteristics written in Egypt. Since, however, the copy- 
 ists of Greek manuscripts written in Italy were almost 
 certainly Greeks themselves, not much weight need be 
 attached to this argument. 
 
 It seems, therefore, perfectly legitimate to use the Their 
 Herculaneum papyri as evidence for the palaeography ^ ®' 
 of MSS. written in Egypt ; and the point is of consider- 
 able importance, since the date of the Herculaneum 
 volumes can be fixed with fair accuracy. The tervninus 
 ante quern is absolute, being the eruption of Vesuvius 
 in A.D. 79, which overwhelmed the town and calcined 
 the papyri. The terminus a quo is supplied by the 
 fact that many of the papyri contain works of the 
 Epicurean philosopher, Philodemus, who was a contem- 
 porary of Cicero ; while nearly all the rest are either 
 copies of the works of Epicurus or treatises of a philo- 
 sophical character. Now Philodemus was not a very 
 eminent philosopher, and it is not likely that a large 
 collection of his works would be made at any time much 
 after his death ; and the fact that several of his treatises 
 are here represented in duplicate suggests the probability 
 that the collection was made by Philodemus himself ^. This 
 
 ' See Scott, Fragmenta Herculanensia, pp. i r, la. 
 
72 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 would assign the MSS. to the first century B.C., and 
 to dates before, rather than after, B.C. 50. This con- 
 clusion is not invalidated by the fact that a Latin 
 poem on the battle of Actium and the Egyptian campaign 
 of Augustus was found along with the Greek papyri, since it 
 may easily have been added by a later owner of the library. 
 On the other hand, this poem is itself not at all likely to 
 have been written later than the reign of Augustus, and 
 therefore suppHes a proof that the library was not of 
 recent formation at the time of the catastrophe of A.D. 79. 
 A philosophical library of the preceding century may 
 very well have been kept together in the house of its 
 original owner, just as libraries of eighteenth-century 
 theology may be found in country houses nowadays, 
 even though some of the authors are somewhat out of 
 date. There is, therefore, no ground for rejecting the 
 natural inference from the character of the library itself, 
 to the effect that the volumes composing it were written 
 shortly before the middle of the first century b. c. 
 
 The Herculaneum papyri consequently belong to the 
 end of the Ptolemaic period of Greek palaeography; for 
 it will be convenient to retain the name, although it is 
 something of a misnomer when applied to MSS. written 
 outside Egypt. Indeed, as has been briefly indicated in 
 an earlier chapter, the names 'Ptolemaic,' 'Roman,' 
 ' Byzantine,' must be applied much less rigidly to literary 
 than to non-literary papyri. Changes of dynasty, im- 
 plying changes of influence and the introduction of clerks 
 and officials of different origins, may very naturally affect 
 the handwriting of official, and through them of private, 
 documents to a very noticeable extent; but the writers 
 of books belong to a society which extends beyond the 
 borders of a single kingdom, and would not consciously 
 submit to the influence of an official chancellery. Hence, 
 on the one hand, the changes in literary papyri at the 
 advent of the Romans in Egypt are less obviously recog- 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 73 
 
 nizable ; on the other hand, they may be taken as applying 
 generally to Athens and Rome as well as to Alexandria. 
 In speaking of any Egyptian papyrus, written in a formal 
 book-hand, as ' Ptolemaic,' we mean only that it is written 
 in a hand prevalent in Greek literary circles during the 
 period when the Ptolemies ruled in Egypt, with, perhaps, 
 some slight local modifications due to the fact that the 
 scribe was writing in Egypt; and similarly, in speaking 
 of papyri written at Herculaneum as Ptolemaic, we mean 
 that they are written in the Greek book-hand prevalent 
 during this same period, even though the slight local 
 influences were in this case Italian and not Egyptian. 
 
 The conclusion that the Herculaneum papyri are to be Test 
 referred to the end of the Ptolemaic period suits perfectly ^*^^^^t 
 with what we know from other sources of the course of 
 palaeographical development, and they thus drop easily 
 into a natural place in the sequence. In all crucial details 
 they answer to the criteria which serve to distinguish 
 Ptolemaic from Eoman papyri; and the history of Greek 
 palaeography remains natural and intelligible on this theory, 
 which it is not if they are referred to a date a century 
 or more later. The two letters which are of most decisive 
 importance at this stage are A and Z. The uncial form of 
 the former letter (A) does, indeed, as has been stated above, 
 run through all periods, and is found alike in Ptolemaic 
 and Roman MSS. ; but the minuscule form is different 
 in the two periods. In literary papyri of the Ptolemaic 
 age the right-hand oblique stroke is always formed sepa- 
 rately from the rest of the letter, which is written without 
 lifting the pen, having either an acute angle or a loop in 
 the left-hand corner (^, ^, cA, A). In Roman papyri, 
 on the other hand, the A is almost always written in one 
 piece, just as in cursive MSS. ( J-, ^). There are exceptions, 
 as in the case of the Bankes Homer (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxiv) ; 
 but they are few, and the rule will generally be found 
 serviceable, except in the cases where the uncial form of 
 
74 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI ' 
 
 the letter is retained. The second test letter is still more 
 valuable, being liable to no such exception as that juat 
 mentioned. It is, of course, rash to rely absolutely on the 
 form of a single letter as an infallible test of date, especially 
 where evidence is so scanty as it is in the case of literary 
 papyri; but so far as the evidence goes at present, Z in 
 Ptolemaic MSS. is invariably formed of three disconnected 
 strokes \ while in Roman MSS. it is equally invariably 
 formed in one continuous whole. This rule at present holds 
 good absolutely, though in paleographical matters isolated 
 exceptions to any rule may always come to light. 
 
 According to both these tests, the Herculaneum papyri 
 fall within the Ptolemaic period. They include, as might 
 be expected, several different hands, but most of them 
 exhibit the same general type ^ ; and in respect of these 
 special letters there is little variation. A is normally of 
 the minuscule type, formed in two strokes ; in a few cases, 
 such as the MS. of Philodemus De Ira, it is of the uncial 
 shape ; but never, apparently, of the Roman type, written 
 without lifting the pen at all. The evidence of Z is equally 
 clear and unanimous, the letter being regularly formed 
 of three distinct strokes. The only variation is that in 
 some cases the central stroke is a horizontal line (shorter 
 than the two others), while elsewhere it has the shape 
 of a comma (Z, X). In one MS.^, if the facsimile (which 
 is not good) is to be trusted, the central stroke does 
 indeed touch and connect the two others (i); but the 
 exception is more apparent than real, since the letter 
 
 ' One of Mr. Grenfell's fragments, described above (p. 45) has the three 
 strokes connected by a perpendicular line at right angles to them (i) ; but 
 this is a still more archaic form, and does not in any way invalidate the 
 principle here enunciated. 
 
 2 See facsimiles in Scott's Fragmenia Herculanemia ; Thirty- six Engravings of 
 Textsand Alphabets from tte ffej-cMtomeMTO-FrajfOTenfe (ed. Nicholson, Oxford 1891) ; 
 Pal. Son. i. 151, 152 ; and a series of photographs issued by the Oxford 
 Philological Society, in several volumes. Alphabet in App. I, col. 7, below. 
 
 ^ Scott's Pap. 26. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 75 
 
 is still formed by three distinct strokes of the pen, the 
 only difference being that the central comma-shaped stroke 
 is large enough to touch both the upper and the lower 
 horizontal line. 
 
 In general appearance the Herculaneum hands are 
 small and graceful, having affinities with the Louvre 
 dialectical fragment described above, rather than with the 
 larger and squarer type of the Louvre Hyperides. A, as 
 will be seen from the above description, is not unlike the 
 same letter in the dialectical papyrus ; € is generally well 
 rounded, and the central stroke has a tendency to be 
 separated from the rest of the letter; the two strokes 
 of A are generally united at the top, but sometimes the 
 right-hand stroke is prolonged; M is Ptolemaic, having 
 an angular centre instead of the deep rounded curves of 
 the Koman period ; fl is fairly broad ; Y is of the Y-shape, 
 but without any strong individuality. All these details 
 tend to confirm . the assignment of these papyri to the 
 end of the Ptolemaic period, and assist in giving fullness 
 and precision to our knowledge of its palaeographical 
 characteristics. 
 
 The Herculaneum papyri having thus been assigned T}ie 
 to their place, two other MSS. must be mentioned which jj^^g ^^' 
 likewise seem to belong to the earlier half of the first Papyrus, 
 century B. c. The first of these is the recently discovered 
 MS. containing the poems of BacchyHdes^. This has 
 strong Ptolemaic features; but something in its general 
 appearance, as well as some details which it has in 
 common with later MSS., indicates that it probably 
 belongs to the end of the period, about the middle of the 
 first century b. c. It is in a handsome hand, of good size, 
 clear and firm, and carefully written. It evidently belongs 
 to the class of MSS. written for sale or for preservation 
 
 ' Complete facsimile published by the Trustees of the British Museum. 
 One column is reproduced in Plate XIII, and an alphabet given in App. I, 
 col. 6. 
 
76 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 in a public library, and ranks high among the extant 
 specimens of Greek calligraphy upon papyrus. Its columns 
 are wide (about 5 inches), their size being determined by 
 the length of the longest of the irregular verses in which 
 the odes are written. Of the individual letters, A is con- 
 spicuously angular, without a vestige of a curve, and 
 formed in two strokes of the pen, (A, 1k); € is narrow, 
 with a long projecting central stroke ; Z has the peculiarity 
 of often having the lower horizontal stroke separate from 
 the rest of the letter; A shows a slight projection of the 
 right-hand stroke, which may be taken as an indication 
 of the approach of the Eoman period ; M, on the other hand, 
 is decidedly Ptolemaic, being a broad letter with a shallow 
 curve; Z, too, is quite Ptolemaic, and the central bar is 
 generally reduced to a mere point, while the other strokes 
 are unusually long ; is small ; fl is broad ; C is narrow, 
 and the upper part of it is often separated from the rest, 
 a phenomenon which recurs in the Harris Homer, to be 
 described in the next chapter ; T has its cross-stroke longer 
 on the left than on the right ; Y has a very shallow curve ; 
 CO is broad and shallow, with little or no traces of the 
 central stroke. Some of the titles of poems have been 
 added in a different hand, which is plainly of Roman 
 type, and probably not earlier than the second century; 
 but these are so clearly a later addition, being omitted in 
 some instances, and showing quite distinct forms of letters, 
 that they give no clue to the date of the original writing 1. 
 
 ' The date here assigned to the Bacohylides papyrus is questioned 
 by Messrs. Grenfell and Hunt {Oxyrhymhua Papyri, i. 53), who would place 
 it in the first or second century after Christ, partly on the strength 
 of a papyrus of Demosthenes published by them, which (having accounts 
 on the verso in a second-century hand) they assign to the early part of the 
 second century. The resemblance between that papyi-us and the Bacohy- 
 lides, however, is not very great, and to my eye the Demosthenes appears 
 decidedly later. None of the most characteristic letters of the Bacchylides 
 {ji, f, V, w) has the same shape in the Demosthenes. Personally I should 
 put the Demosthenes fragment somewhat earlier than they do, regarding 
 the cursive writing on the verso as of the middle of the second century, 
 
Plate XIII. 
 
 , -^z ^j^"^ A *^_^ -i> >^ -js / AA+:>s^i Yf >.f ^^+0 *«Jt^ 
 -j' ^ p I- { T f'H' ^"^ "' "^^ r iT {• "^ 
 
 n p c- n f-K ^^> i-f T'^^^*^ '^^*^ 
 
 X.^UH^ t-'2i:i»X'»Hrt-f/^c' 
 
 ~rf H M ;^ r ^•^ f ^ "^ ' ' T"" -^^ I o fs>< o oT t''^ : 
 
 o"-y>^ r«» h^ <> f-l M A-c f fc >- {-n * >^'''"' 
 
 BACCHYLIDES— 1ST CENT. B.C. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 77 
 
 The remaining MS. to be noticed is that which contains Hyperides 
 the oration of Hyperides against Philippides and the third phuii^i- 
 Epistle of Demosthenes (Brit. Mus. Papp. cxxxiii, cxxxiy) ^ <^«»»'. 
 These two compositions, written on a single roll of papyrus, 
 are in quite diflferent hands, both of them rather peculiar 
 and noticeable. The Hyperides is written in small, very 
 graceful letters, well-rounded, with ligatures as distinctly 
 marked and carefully written as the letters themselves, 
 and in exceptionally narrow columns. The Demosthenes 
 is in yet smaller letters — indeed there is no other literary 
 
 and the Demosthenes as of the first century ; which would allow of the 
 Bacchylldes remaining where I have placed it above, at the transition 
 from the Ptolemaic to the Roman style in the first century E. 0. Messrs. 
 Grenfell and Hunt further state that the forms of ix and v which appear 
 in the Bacchylides are also found in two of their papyri of the Eoman 
 period, the Aristoxenus and Thucydides fragments ; but the li in both 
 these MSS. is quite different, being of only ordinary breadth and much 
 more deeply indented, and the v, though shallow in the top, does not very 
 closely resemble the same letter in the Bacchylides. On the whole, the 
 Oxyrhynchus papyri, which are all of the Roman period, seem to me to con- 
 firm the date here assigned to the Bacchylides. Prof. Blass (Bacchylidis 
 Carmina, 1898, pp. vii, viii) assigns the Bacchylides MS. to the first century 
 after Christ rather than to the previous centuiy, on grounds not of 
 palaeography but of orthography, especially its comparative freedom from 
 iotacism. His argument is that (according to the evidence of inscriptions) 
 under the earliest emperors the interchange of ei and 1 was carried to an 
 extreme, while in the course of the first century a reform in this respect 
 was introduced, culminating in the second century under the influence of 
 Herodian. In the absence, however, of more manuscript evidence on the 
 point than is at present available, this argument is somewhat precarious. 
 It is certain that in non -literary papyri the interchange of « and i is quite 
 as common in the first and second centuries after Christ as in the Ptolemaic 
 period, and it is clear that much must have depended on the practice of 
 individual scribes. A well- written MS., such as the Bacchylides, copied 
 from an earlier MS. free from iotacism, would not be likely to be affected 
 by it to any serious extent, certainly not to any extent comparable to 
 inscriptions or non-literary papyri in which the scribe had no earlier copy 
 to follow. Under these circumstances, the evidence of orthograpliy seems 
 much too doubtful to be accepted as the main guide to the date of a MS. ; 
 and the fact that this evidence leads Prof. Blass to assign the Herodas 
 papyrus to the Ptolemaic age may be taken as reinfoi-cing this conclusion 
 (see below, pp. 94, 95). 
 
 ' Specimen facsimiles in Classical Texts from Papyri in the British Museum, 
 ed. F. Gr. Kenyon (1891), plates ii and iii. Alphabets in App. I, cols. 7 and 8. 
 
78 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 papyrus in which the characters are so small — more angular 
 and less well formed. The columns of both lean decidedly 
 to the right. In detail the letters are akin to those of 
 the Herculaneum papyri, and it is on the strength of 
 this comparison that the MS. is assigned to the first 
 century B.C. In the Hyperides, A has the loop in the 
 left-hand corner which has been noticed in the Herculaneum 
 papyri (and in an incipient form in the Louvre dialectical 
 fragment), the right-hand stroke being made separately ; 
 A is formed in a very similar way, but the loop does not 
 fall below the rest of the letter ; € is well rounded, with 
 the cross-stroke rather high; A shows some projection 
 of the right-hand stroke ; K is deeply curved, a sign of the 
 approach of the Roman style ; Z is Ptolemaic, with three 
 distinct strokes; C is well rounded; Y is deeply curved, 
 much as in the reign of Augustus ; CO is fully and carefully 
 Demo- formed. The Demosthenes has many of its details very 
 Ep. III! similar, but is less well written throughout. A varies 
 between the uncial form and the form with the loop in the 
 left-hand corner; some shapes of the latter show the 
 approach of the Roman type, but the letter is still written 
 in two strokes ; € is small and narrow ; A sometimes has 
 the right-hand stroke projecting, sometimes not; M is 
 generally shallow, recalling the Ptolemaic type ; Z has its 
 three separate strokes ; C has rather a flat top ; Y resembles 
 the same letter in the Bacchylides papyrus ; and Ci) is only 
 slightly formed, the second loop being often hardly visible. 
 It will be seen from a consideration of these features, and 
 especially of such test letters as A, M, and Z, that both 
 hands of this MS. are on the border line between the 
 Ptolemaic and the Roman periods. Some forms are still 
 distinctly Ptolemaic, while others are already approaching 
 the types which will be seen in the next chapter to belong 
 to the Roman style. They stand or fall with the papyri 
 of Herculaneum, and cannot be placed very far from them 
 in point of time. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE PTOLEMAIC PERIOD 79 
 
 With these MSS., therefore, we reach the end of the 
 Ptolemaic period, which may be roughly fixed at the 
 middle of the first century b. c. Such precise definitions 
 of time are, however, only useful as aids to the memory, 
 and it is as well to repeat the caution that no precise 
 accuracy can be expected in the dating of literary 
 papyri in the present state of our knowledge. Palaeo- 
 graphical periods necessarily melt into one another, and 
 the forms of letters have no precise boundaries. Even 
 where materials are much more plentiful, as in the minus- 
 cule MSS. of the twelfth to the fifteenth centuries, it 
 is only necessary to look at the published series of dated 
 facsimiles from MSS. in the Bibliotheque Nationale, to have 
 any rash dogmatism checked by the recognition of the fact 
 that types of hands run on much further than is commonly 
 allowed for. Dating MSS. by palaeographical indications 
 alone is, to a considerable extent, a science of conventions. 
 We can say that such and such a MS. is written in a hand 
 which was prevalent in, say, the first century ; but we can 
 much less confidently affirm that it was itself certainly 
 written in that century. Still, it is only by provisional 
 generalizations that science progresses ; and this is as true 
 of palaeography as of physics or chemistry. The crystal- 
 lization of isolated observations into formulas may lead 
 to some mistakes, but it also leads to progress, by the 
 confirmation or rejection of the formulas; and so this 
 mapping out of the province of Ptolemaic palaeography 
 will, it may fairly be hoped, be of some use for the 
 arrangement and systematization of existing knowledge, 
 and as an aid towards the assimilation of the knowledge 
 which future discoveries may bring in. The criteria which 
 have been indicated in the course of this chapter meet, 
 it is believed, all the data which are now forthcoming, and 
 arrange them in an intelligible series; but their final 
 verification, or otherwise, must come from the evidence 
 which the spade of the explorer has still to bring to light. 
 
CHAPTER V 
 
 LTTEKAEY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD. 
 
 The Roman period is, in relation to non-literary papyri, 
 the period concerning which we have the fullest and the 
 most precisely dated evidence ; but the same cannot be said 
 of it in respect of literary MSS. In mere number, indeed, 
 the literary documents of the Roman period exceed those 
 of the Ptolemaic; but it happens that hardly any of 
 them can be even approximately dated upon independent 
 grounds. Consequently there has been great uncertainty 
 as to the dates assigned to many of the MSS. with which 
 we have to deal in this chapter; and it would be rash 
 to say that the period of uncertainty is yet at an end. 
 Any day some fresh piece of evidence may be brought 
 to light which will modify the conclusions to which we can 
 now come; and all statements which rest solely on the 
 impression produced by a MS. itself, without collateral 
 evidence connecting it with better established knowledge, 
 must be taken as only approximate. 
 
 We have seen, at the close of the preceding chapter, 
 the progress of the transition which leads from the 
 Ptolemaic to the Roman age, and have found it exempli- 
 fied chiefly by the papyri from Herculaneum. Speaking 
 generally, the characteristics which distinguish the Roman 
 period from its predecessor are (i) a greater roundness and 
 smoothness in the forms of letters, and (a) a somewhat 
 larger average size. The very small hands which occur 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 8i 
 
 in so many — and those often the best written — of the 
 Ptolemaic MSS. do not recur ; it is rather the characters of 
 such papyri as the Louvre Hyperides and the Bacchylides 
 that set the pattern for the Koman period. And letters 
 which are prevailingly straight or angular in the earlier 
 period, such as A, M, Z, are now rounded off into curves ; 
 while letters like 6 and C, which were rounded before, 
 become more rounded now. 
 
 Before coming to a definitely dated MS. which shows 
 the characteristics of the Roman style fully established, 
 there are one or two papyri to be mentioned, in which 
 the remains of Ptolemaic influence seem to be visible. 
 One of these is a fragmentary roll of the last two books Homer, 
 of the Iliad, now in the British Museum ^- It is written xxiv''"'' 
 in a hand of fair size, somewhat square in shape, with 
 thin, firm strokes. The i adscript is regularly written, 
 which is a sign of a relatively early date ; and there are 
 no breathings, accents, or marks of elision by the first 
 hand. There are, however, some of the critical symbols 
 (the hmXfi and asterisk) employed by Aristarchus, of which 
 this MS. provides the earliest examples as yet extant. 
 In form several of the letters show distinctly Eoman 
 characteristics. A is formed in a single stroke, with 
 a curved body, though there are also signs of the older 
 angular shape; M is deeply curved; £ and C are well 
 rounded, the former having the cross-bar high ; the right- 
 hand stroke of A projects considerably; and Z is of the 
 Roman type, formed continuously. On the other hand 
 Y has the shallow top which appears also in the Bacchylides 
 and Demosthenes ; and this, along with the somewhat tran- 
 sitional form of A and the generally early aspect of the 
 writing as a whole, seems to justify the attribution of the 
 MS. to the latter half of the first century B. c. 
 
 ' Pap. cxxTiii ; collation, with specimen facsimile, in Classical Tens from 
 Greek Papyri ; complete text in Journal of Philology, xxi. 296. Alphabet in 
 App. I, col. 10. 
 
 G 
 
82 
 
 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 The 
 
 Louvre 
 
 Alcman. 
 
 Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. 
 
 OCOLIV. 
 
 Another MS., of less palaeographical, but greater literary, 
 interest, which has sometimes been assigned to the Ptole- 
 maic period, is the fragment of Alcman, now in the Louvre ^. 
 As containing some otherwise unknown lines of this lyric 
 poet, it is a papyrus of considerable value : but it is not 
 a regular literary MS., being roughly written in a non- 
 literary hand. This hand is, no doubt, a fairly early one, 
 but there seems to be no reason for placing it earlier than 
 the Christian era. All the test letters are of the rounded 
 Roman type; while Y has the deep curve and the tail 
 bending far to the right, which are characteristic of the 
 non-literary hands of the first half (and especially the first 
 quarter) of the first century. The fragment may be of 
 the reign of Augustus, but, if so, it belongs to the last 
 years of that emperor. 
 
 We are fortunate in possessing a MS. which enables 
 us to fix the exact state of palaeographical development 
 which had been reached at the beginning of the Christian 
 era. This is Pap. gccliv of the British Museum, a docu- 
 ment of non-literary character, but written in a careful 
 and most elaborate book-hand, and capable of being 
 precisely dated ^- It is a petition for redress of injuries, 
 addressed to the prefect of Egypt, Gains Turranius. This 
 officer is known from an inscription {G. I. G. iii. 4923), 
 which contains a date in the reign of Augustus; and 
 though the date is somewhat mutilated, and has been 
 differently read by different scholars, it is certain that 
 it corresponds to either 15, 10, or 7 B.C. The difference 
 between these dates is quite immaterial for palaeographical 
 purposes, and we thus have a definitely fixed date for the 
 type of hand shown in this MS. It is a hand of great 
 beauty, of medium size, regularly and firmly written, with 
 
 ' Facs. in atlas to Notices et Exiraits, pi. 1. 
 
 " Facs. in the atlas to vol. ii. of Greek Papyri in the British Museum, and 
 a partial facs. (showing best-preserved part; in Plate XIV. Alphabet in 
 App. I, coL II. 
 
Plate XIV. 
 
 |*>eiXKf }^k>^u3 ^Ml H^? JOiJ^ ceWt;^ :^nrrT;W c jt 
 
 
 PETITION.— CirC. B.C. lO. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 83 
 
 graceful and well-formed strokes and curves. There are, 
 perhaps, no better written papyri in existence than this 
 and the MS. to be mentioned next, which is closely akin 
 to it. Of the individual letters, A is generally rounded, 
 but with some examples of the angular shape ; M is pointed 
 in the middle, which recalls one of the Ptolemaic forms; 
 Z is written continuously, but with more sharpness and 
 precision than is usual in later Eoman MSS. ; Y is 
 moderately curved, and the tail is usually kept to the 
 right, though not bent away as in the example last 
 quoted; €, O, C, tO, are all well rounded and fully formed; 
 the right-hand stroke of A projects upwards. 
 
 It so happens that the discovery of this document The 
 enables us to assign a date, with approximate accuracy, jiugg,,^ 
 to a literary papyrus of considerable interest, containing Odyssey. 
 the latter part of the third book of the Odyssey''-- The 
 interest of this MS. lies not only in the fact of its being 
 the earliest extant copy of the Odyssey (which is of very 
 much less frequent occurrence in papyri than the Iliad), but 
 also in the beauty of the writing, which entitles it to be 
 regarded as the handsomest literary papyrus at present 
 known to exist. A terminus ante quern is given by 
 the occurrence of some scholia, written in a cursive hand 
 which appears to belong to the end of the first century; 
 but a more precise date may be derived from its close 
 resemblance in general appearance to the MS. which has 
 just been described. The resemblance, which cannot be 
 missed by any one who compares the two documents, 
 renders it certain, even apart from the collateral evidence 
 furnished by the scholia, that the Homer was written at 
 no great distance of time from the petition to Turranius; 
 while an examination of details shows that the latter is 
 the earlier of the two. In the Homer the A is more 
 rounded, M is deeply curved, Z is written continuously, 
 
 ' Brit. Mus. Pap. colxxi. Facs. in Fal. Soc. ii. 182, partial faos. in Plate 
 XV ; text in Joumcd of Philology, xxii. 238. Alphabet in App. I, col. 12, 
 
 G 2 
 
84 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 and curves replace the sharp angles noticed in the petition. 
 In all these typical letters the angular shapes have given 
 way to curves which are characteristically Roman in 
 nature. Of the other letters, € and C are well rounded, 
 the former having the cross-stroke very high, much as 
 in the Iliad MS. last described; H has the cross-bar ex- 
 ceptionally high ; and Y approaches the y-shape, the two 
 upper limbs branching off more equally than has usually 
 been the case hitherto. This is a transition shape in 
 the direction of the V-form which prevails later. The 
 general conclusion, therefore, to which palaeographical 
 data point is that 'the Odyssey papyrus was written near 
 the beginning of the jfirst century, and that the scholia, 
 which are of later appearance and include quotations 
 from the grammarian Apion, who flourished under 
 Caligula, were added 'in the second half of the same 
 century. 
 The More doubt attaches to another Homer papyrus, con- 
 
 Homer. Gaining the eighteenth book of the Iliad, and commonly 
 known (from the name of its first purchaser) as the 
 Harris Homer i. This was one of the first literary papyri 
 to be brought to light, and consequently enjoyed a some- 
 what exaggerated reputation of extreme old age. Sir 
 E. Thompson, whose authority in such matters is of the 
 highest, places it ' without hesitation as early as the first 
 century b. c.^.' The increase of evidence during recent 
 years makes it Y&rj doubtful whether so early a date 
 can be maintained. The whole aspect of the hand is 
 Eoman, not Ptolemaic, and one might even be inclined 
 at first sight to refer it to the second century, were it 
 not for certain letters which still recall the hands of 
 the first century B. c. These are especially A, which is of 
 
 ' Brit. Mus. Pap. cvii ; facs. in Pal. Soc. ii. 64, and a less successful one 
 in the Cat. ofAnc. MSS. (Greek). Alphabet in App. I, col. 13. 
 
 ^ Handbook, p. 124. In the Pal. Soc. and Cat. of Am. MSS. it is simply 
 described as 'perhaps first century e. c.'; but the Handbook is the latest 
 statement. 
 
Plate XV. 
 
 ow U<kr onofoi 'Coi exo Y c cnx oi 
 
 ^v^ vciu xorrrrt e Yarti p w xrf ' <} :^^' 
 t^ri e i A' u y c c M TC KM ex r j G;e:M h \ n e 
 
 ■t ■ Xjun Yw Qfe^r oju e ^Jo^c^^ xxn Cf c^cecexc 
 r> OIKj o MC-ij^^ w 0X0 eYNfTC ce?4i kf 7 c(?o i C2 
 .: ^yVxf ene4 n ci ockai e aj-t ty oc exef o m < 
 
 f ^c^j^-^ji-Q o . AAf ATf Y xnixk-vi e M4^XY0 M M AC r 
 
 &^#<i^e'XH3H^vineTtiKiienTxoY'^ihYTTTpArf.< 
 
 ■ ■ . . i . ■; 
 
 HOMER, ODYSSEY HI.— EARLY 1ST CENT. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 85 
 
 the angular type which is found in the Bacchylides, though 
 somewhat less sharply pronounced; and 6, which, again 
 as in the Bacchylides, is narrow, with a long projecting 
 cross-bar, and with the head of the letter often separated 
 from the rest. On the other hand M and Z are distinctly 
 Roman in character; A always has a projecting right-hand 
 stroke; M, N, fl, are square, not elongated as in Ptolemaic 
 hands ; C has a somewhat flattened top ; Y is approaching 
 the V pattern, and has quite lost its Ptolemaic appearance. 
 Some omitted lines have been supplied in the margin in 
 an ordinary cursive hand which seems to belong to the 
 beginning of the second century; and it is probably the 
 same hand that has added the accents and breathings. 
 On the whole it would appear that the MS. must be 
 assigned to the first century of our era ; though of course, 
 here as always, no pretence of dogmatism is admissible, 
 especially in conflict with other authorities. 
 
 Another MS. which has commonly been placed in the The 
 first century B. c, and sometimes even earlier, but which Museum 
 may now almost certainly be brought down to the first Hyper- 
 century after Christ, is the great papyrus of Hyperides — 
 the one by which his work was first made known to the 
 modern world — containing the prosecution of Demosthenes 
 and the defences of Lycophron and Euxenippus — the 
 latter being the only extant speech of the orator which 
 is absolutely intact. At the date when this MS. was 
 acquired by Messrs. Harris and Arden, there was practically 
 no means of forming an accurate idea of its age, and its 
 first editor, Mr. Babington, cautiously placed it between 
 the second century before, and the second century after, 
 the beginning of the Christian era. Subsequent scholars, 
 who have tried to be more precise, have in fact ranged 
 over the whole of this somewhat wide period. Sir 
 E. Thompson has assi^ed it to the first century B. c.^ ; 
 
 ■ Ccd. of Anc. MSS. {Greek) ; HaudiooJe, p. 123. A complete facsimile 
 of the MS. (by hand) is given in Babington's edition ; photographic 
 
86 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Prof. Blass to the second century after Christ^- But 
 this discrepancy between two eminent palaeographers 
 is due to the fact that they based their conclusions upon 
 different evidence. Prof. Blass was guided by the cursive 
 hand in which the title of the MS., giving a list of the 
 orations contained in it, is written, which he rightly 
 assigned to the second century after Christ; while Sir 
 E. Thompson equally rightly argued that the title is 
 not in the same hand as the body of the MS., and there- 
 fore gives nothing more than a termi7ius ante quern 
 for our assistance. It is, however, now sufficiently clear 
 that no date within the Ptolemaic age is possible for 
 this style of writing. The most marked feature of the 
 hand in its general appearance is its roundness — a dis- 
 tinctively Koman characteristic; and the forms of the 
 single letters all point the same way. A is written con- 
 tinuously, with rounded angles and somewhat loose con- 
 struction ; M is fully rounded ; Z is continuous, and rather 
 irregular ; C is rounded, and even shows a decided tendency 
 to fall forward — an indication of a date nearer the end of the 
 first century than the beginning ; Y is of the characteristi- 
 cally Koman type. The letters are not always well or firmly 
 formed ; and that again is a sign of a relatively late date. 
 On these grounds alone it would seem almost certain 
 that this papyrus cannot be placed earlier than the second 
 half of the first century ; and this conclusion has been 
 strongly confirmed by evidence which has lately come 
 to light. In the first place, striking resemblances to 
 this Hyperides MS. are found in the long poll-tax rolls 
 recently acquired by the British Museum, which bear 
 dates in the years 72 and 94^. Secondly, a small scrap 
 
 facsimiles of parts of it in Pal. Soc. i. 126, and Cat. of Am. MSS. Some 
 recently discovered fragments, now in the possession of Rossall School, 
 are shown in Plate XVI, through the kind permission of the Kev. J. P. 
 Way, head- master of Rossall. Alphabet in App. I, col. 14. 
 
 ' I. Ton Miiller's Handbuch der klassischen Altertums- Wissmschaft, ed. 2, p. 3 12. 
 
 ' Brit. Mus. Papp. cclvii-cclix, cclx-cclxi. 
 
Plate XVI. 
 
 
 ^•l^'' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 ■.ftf»I;,ft!1J 
 
 
 ri.^:-%.#:M.-^':rr^, 
 
 
 ^^<of^^rT-:t"tf^'n3u.ds»i\r^: '" J '' 
 
 
 ^1^^ 
 :,**^ 
 
 
 t. 
 
 .«;i«. 
 
 
 f'L 
 
 
 /'^^&:^pM 
 
 *^v*^i 
 
 HYPERIDES IN DEMOSTHENEM AND DEMOSTHENES OLYNTHIAC II.-LATE 1ST CENT. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 87 
 
 of a literary papyrus, in a hand almost identical with 
 the Hyperides, but somewhat larger, was acquired along 
 with a number of dated documents of the first and second 
 centuries'^. But the most conclusive evidence is afforded 
 by a fragment brought from Egypt by Mr. Grenfell 
 in 1895, and now in the Bodleian Library. It contains The Bod- 
 a small portion of the Homeric Lexicon of Apollonius, Apoilo- 
 though in a form somewhat different from that in which ''^"^• 
 it has hitherto been known ^- The evidence for its date 
 is a little complicated, but seems fairly conclusive, at 
 least as regards the terminus a quo. The grammarian 
 Apion is mentioned in various places in the Lexicon, and 
 one of these passages occurs in the Bodleian fragment. 
 The papyrus is, however, mutilated in this place, and 
 the name of Apion is not preserved ; so that it is con- 
 ceivable — considering the extent to which the texts of 
 Apollonius hitherto extant have been expanded from the 
 original — that the name might be a later addition. But 
 the size of the lacuna just suits the supposition that the 
 papyrus here had the same text as the later copies, and 
 there is no other natural way of filling it. It is therefore 
 a legitimate conclusion that Apion was mentioned in the 
 papyrus, when it was perfect; and since Apion flourished 
 under Tiberius and Caligula, it is practically certain that 
 the papyrus cannot be earlier than the middle of the 
 first century, while it may, of course, so far as this argu- 
 ment goes, be considerably later. The importance of this 
 conclusion lies in the fact that the fragment is written 
 in a hand of precisely the same type as the long 
 Hyperides MS. ; and if the Apollonius is not earlier 
 than the middle of the first century, the same must also 
 be the case with the Hyperides. The likeness between 
 the two MSS. is as great as it can be between two 
 
 ' Brit. Mus. Pap. covin c. 
 
 ^ A facsimile has been privately circulated by Bodley's Librarian, to 
 •whom the identiiication of the fragment is due. 
 
88 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 hands which are not identical, and will be disputed by 
 no one who has compared the two. 
 
 It seems established, therefore, that the theories which 
 assigned the Hyperides to the Ptolemaic age, or even to 
 the first century of the Eoman period, must be abandoned ; 
 but there still remains the possibility that Blass is right 
 in placing it as late as the second century. But, in the 
 first place, the main ground of his view — namely, that 
 the title of the MS. is written in a cursive hand of the 
 second century — is unsound ; for the date of the title does 
 not necessarily establish the date of the MS., but merely 
 gives a terminus ante quern. Titles not only might be, but 
 actually were, written much later than the MSS. to which 
 they applied. A striking instance is given by the Bacchy- 
 lides papyrus, in which some of the poems are without 
 titles, while those which exist have plainly been written 
 at a later date than the poems themselves. So far, then, 
 as the evidence of the title goes, all that can be said is 
 that the MS. cannot be later than the end of the second 
 century, though it may be considerably earlier. It is here 
 that the evidence of the poll-tax rolls, above mentioned, 
 becomes important ; for they show that hands of the same 
 class as that of the Hyperides were in use in the last 
 thirty years of the first century, while no example of such 
 hands has yet been found of a later date. To this period, 
 then, of the end of the first century, the great Hyperides 
 MS. must almost certainly be referred. External testimony 
 here strongly supports the indications of palaeographical 
 science, and it will need clear evidence to overthrow their 
 joint conclusion. 
 Brit. Mus. ^t this point in the history of papyrus-palaeography 
 we come upon another document which, though not 
 literary in its contents, is yet, like the petition to Turranius 
 of circ. B.C. 10, of considerable value for the study of 
 literary hands. It is a lease of an oliveyard and other 
 lands in the village of Socnopaei Nesus, dated in the year 
 
Plate XVII. 
 
 , Hi 
 
 
 
 .'I 
 
 
 
 f" 3' ^'^" ri 
 
 "ill C^ *.H, v^"^ r) 
 
 K i 't J ^f 
 
 
 '^^t.^^ 
 
 
 rk I •f 
 
 
 wi 
 
 V ''^ ^H '"'^ c^ 
 
 •pjii 
 
 
 /'h n; f ^ ^ 
 
 il' 
 
 ) 
 
 ^^ 
 
 r«i '">! 
 
 .H 
 
 t 
 
 1-^' 
 
 
 
 
 a 1 
 
 -i 
 
 4 
 
 i J 
 
 
 ;: ^? >- . '* 
 
 
 ' ' ' I [ 
 
 i f 
 
 ( 
 
 (• 
 
 ,4^ 
 
 it 
 
 
 Y^\'i 
 
 
 U'.v/ ; 
 
 ( 
 
 
 1".,^^' 
 ^ 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 89 
 
 88 ; and instead of being written, as usual, in a small 
 and very cursive hand, it is executed in careful uncials 
 of a large size, with only a sprinkling of minuscule forms ^■ 
 In size, the characters of this MS. are larger than any 
 that we have yet described, though some later documents 
 perhaps equal them. In type, they are plainly the fore- 
 runners of the handsome uncials in which the earlier vellum 
 MSS. are written. Before the discovery of this papyrus, 
 with its precise date near the end of the first century, 
 there was little or nothing to show that such hands went 
 back earlier than the fourth century at most. The present 
 document, though by no means perfect in execution, shows 
 that we must look much higher for the origin of this 
 hand ; and it also suggests a conclusion to which we shall 
 have to refer again presently, that the palaeography of 
 Greek papyri anticipated in its development the subsequent 
 history of writing upon vellum, so that the corresponding 
 stages of writing on the two materials are not contemporary, 
 but are separated by some centuries of time. 
 
 The letters of this papyrus are not uniformly uncial in 
 character, some of them being merely the current minuscule 
 forms written on a large scale. This is notably the case 
 with A and Y, while €, which is correctly formed as a general 
 rule, occasionally lapses, through the forgetfulness of the 
 scribe, into a completely minuscule form. Of the other 
 letters, M is conspicuously shallow in its central depression ; 
 Z is of the regular Roman type, and somewhat cursive 
 in appearance; C is well formed and upright; is large 
 and prominent; ti) is well written. The MS. as a whole 
 must be regarded, not as a thorough-going example of 
 a book-hand of a large uncial type, but as an indication 
 of what the contemporary book-hand might be. We cannot 
 say that this is a hand of the same character as those 
 
 ' Facsimile in Pal. Soc. ii. 146, and in the atlas to Greek Papyri in the 
 British Museum, vol. ii ; partial facs. in Plate XVII. The papyrus is known 
 as Brit. Mus. Pap. cxli. 
 
go PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 which are found in the great vellum MSS. of the fourth 
 and jfifth centuries; but we can say that, if this hand 
 could be found in a non-literary document of the year 88, 
 then a hand of the same character as those of the vellum 
 MSS. may have been in use for literary papyri at the 
 end of the first century. The large uncial hand, in short, 
 instead of being a creature of the fourth century, called 
 forth by the adoption of vellum into general use, exists on 
 papyrus at least three centuries earlier. 
 Brit. Mus. Further evidence in the same direction is given by another 
 oijcxxvii. papyrus in the British Museum (Pap. clxxxvii), which 
 contains a small fragment of a moral or historical treatise, 
 giving a description of the training of the youths of some 
 nation, apparently the Lacedaemonians ^ Only some sixteen 
 lines are preserved intact, or approximately so, with small 
 traces of some other lines in the same and adjoining 
 columns ; but quite enough remains to show that it was 
 a carefully written MS., in a large uncial hand. The letters 
 are of about the same size as those of the lease just 
 described, and are free from the intermixture of minuscules 
 by which that is disfigured. Its date is not known with 
 certainty, but the evidence which has just been given 
 authorizes us to place it at the end of the first or in the 
 course of the second century; and this is confirmed by 
 the fact that the verso of the papyrus bears writing in 
 a cursive hand which may safely be referred to the 
 beginning of the third century. The writing of the 
 AaKsMiixovCaiv TroAtreta (or whatever the treatise is) is careful, 
 delicate, and handsome ; and its size and shape put it 
 definitely in the line of ancestry of the vellum uncials. 
 A ' continues to be of the rounded form ; M is very deeply 
 curved ; C is so much rounded as to be hardly distinguish- 
 able from O, a feature which is perhaps in favour of 
 a date in the second rather than the first century. The 
 
 ' Published (without facsimile) in the Eomw de Philologie, xxi. i (1897). 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 91 
 
 columns of writing are narrow, containing, in this large 
 hand, only some twelve to fifteen letters. 
 
 Between the first and the second centuries after Christ 
 it is impossible, at any rate with the evidence now available, 
 to draw any firm line of palaeographical demarcation. No 
 external change came over the government of Egypt which 
 could affect the local handwriting. The development of 
 the Roman hand pursued a natural course ; and in the 
 absence of precisely dated examples it is impossible to 
 fix its stages with certainty. There are a considerable 
 number of MSS. which appear to belong to this period; 
 but it would require a bold palaeographer to decide, with 
 regard to most of them, whether they were written in 
 the second century or the last half of the first. It so 
 happens that most of the MSS. referred to contain parts 
 of Homer; but the list also includes the unique papyrus 
 of Herodas, a speech ■ of Isocrates, and a few minor 
 pieces ^. 
 
 Close to the border line, but almost certainly within The 
 the limits of the first century, comes a papyrus of very ^"gg^^^ 
 great literary interest, namely that which contains the Aristotle. 
 'AdrivaCoov YloXireCa of Aristotle ^ ; but unfortunately, of the 
 four hands in which it is written, only one at all approaches 
 the character of a book-hand, and that is plainly not 
 the work of a trained scribe, from the number of clerical 
 blunders which it contains. Rather is the MS. a striking 
 example of what may be called the private method of 
 circulating literature in the ancient world. Libraries were 
 few'and far between, and copies of literary works written 
 by professional scribes may have been difficult and expen- 
 sive to obtain in the upper parts of Egypt. Hence we 
 seem to see the existence of a practice of lending MSS. 
 
 ' The list has been considerably increased by the recent discoveries 
 of Messrs. Grenfell and Hunt at Oxyrhynchus, which include several 
 literary fragments belonging to this period. 
 
 ^ Complete facsimile published by the Trustees of the British Museum 
 (1891) ; specimen plate in Pal. Soc. ii. 12a. 
 
92 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 to be transcribed privately by those who wished toi possess 
 copies of the work; and if new papyrus could not be 
 readily obtained, a roll which had already been used 
 might be made to do duty again. This is what happened 
 in the case of the Aristotelian treatise. It is written on 
 the back of some old farm accounts," and the greater 
 part of it is written in hands of a very cursive character. 
 Apparently speed was necessary — perhaps the MS. from 
 which it was copied could only be lent for a short time ; 
 for the different scribes evidently began independently, 
 and their several sections do not exactly join. Two of 
 the writers seem to be men of culture, able to write Greek 
 correctly ; and since their hands are similar in appearance 
 (though certainly not identical, as ha^ been suggested), 
 it is perhaps not very fanciful to suppose that they are 
 those of the owner of the MS. and a near kinsman. The 
 other scribes seem to have been slaves, and their Greek 
 is far from correct. One of them writes a sort of rough 
 uncial hand, square, thick, and inelegant; the other, who 
 takes up his work when he has finished it, tries at first 
 to. imitate his uncials, but quickly slides into a loose 
 and ill-formed cursive hand, in which he completes his 
 portion. Some of the more glaring blunders of the illiterate 
 scribes are corrected in the hands of their educated 
 collaborators. The date of the whole MS. is limited on 
 the one side by the fact that the farm accounts on the 
 recto are dated in the years 78-9 ; while the close resem- 
 blance of the cursive writing of the Aristotle to that of 
 several documents (since discovered) of the reign of Domi- 
 tian^ makes it highly probable that it was not written 
 very far from the year 90. 
 The auto- A somewhat special interest attaches to this MS., not 
 fhe^New o'^ty ^^ ^^^ ground of its contents, but also because 
 Testa- the method of private transcription, of which it is an 
 
 inent. 
 
 ' See above, Plate VI, for an example. Another (of a. d. 83-4) is given in 
 the Fuhrer durch die AussteHung der Papyrus Ersher^g Rainer, pi. ix. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 93 
 
 example, must have been very commonly employed in 
 the case of the Scriptures of the New Testament. The 
 Christians of the first century were not predominantly 
 an educated body, nor were they, as a rule, wealthy. 
 Hence, in many parts of the Greek world, they could 
 neither transcribe their Scriptures in the best literary 
 hands of the period, nor pay professional scribes to do 
 so for them; and they must consequently have often 
 fallen back on the method of amateur, or private, tran- 
 scription. This would especially be the ease in times of 
 persecution, when the trade of transcribing the Scriptures 
 could not have been carried on publicly even in the 
 communities where there were otherwise facilities for 
 such work. In the writing of the Aristotle, therefore, 
 one may see an example of the manner in which the 
 Christian Scriptures were often transmitted ; and in these 
 circumstances one may find part of the explanation of the 
 early rise of a large number of various readings. No 
 doubt there were exceptions, and some of the autographs 
 of the New Testament books may have been well and 
 carefully written ; but the manner of transmission just 
 described must have been employed on all the books 
 in some stage of their history, and its characteristics 
 should therefore be borne in mind as a datum in the 
 textual criticism of the New Testament. 
 
 This, however, is somewhat of a digression from the 
 immediate subject in hand, the development of the literary 
 form of writing on papyrus; and it is time to return 
 to the other MSS. which, as mentioned above, seem to 
 fall within the latter part of the first century or in the 
 course of the second. One of these, which ranks next 
 to the Aristotle in point of literary interest, is also 
 remarkable as standing rather apart from the general 
 line of development, and provides a salutary proof of the 
 error of assuming that only one type of hand can have 
 prevailed at any one period. This is the papyrus of 
 
94 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 The Herodas^, containing the mimes of that otherwise prae- 
 
 Herodas . . . 
 
 Papyrus, tically unknown writer of the Alexandrian age. As has 
 
 been stated in an earher chapter, it is the smallest papyrus- 
 roll extant in respect of height, measuring no more than 
 5 inches, and containing only i8 lines, on an average, 
 in each column. As an almost necessary consequence, it 
 is written in a small and compact hand, clear and easy 
 to read, but almost entirely devoid of ornamentation. 
 Indeed the matter-of-fact realism of the poems seems 
 to be reflected in the plain, unadorned appearance of 
 the writing. The forms of the letters, when examined 
 in detail, are unquestionably of the Eoman period, but 
 the general appearance of the writing is so unlike that 
 of any other extant papyrus, that it is exceptionally 
 difiicult to fix its date from palaeographical considerations. 
 In the editio princeps it was assigned to the second or 
 third century, but increased knowledge makes it almost 
 certain that this date is too late. The clearest proof 
 of this comes from the accuracy with which non-literary 
 hands can now generally be dated. In the course of the 
 MS. a line has been accidentally omitted, and has been 
 supplied in the upper margin of the papyrus in a cursive 
 hand ; and it happens that this contains an ?/ of the pecu- 
 liar form (^) which has been described in a previous chapter 
 as characteristic of the period from about A. d. 50 to 160. 
 It is, no doubt, impossible to say how long after the 
 transcription of the MS. this omission was made good. 
 It may be said that the probabilities are against an error 
 in so comparatively rare a poet, and in a MS. in private 
 hands, being corrected from any except the original MS. 
 from which it was copied; but such a probability does 
 not amount to an argument of much strength. It is, 
 however, clear that the third century, and even the last 
 
 ■ Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxxt. Complete facsimile published by the Trustees 
 of the British Museum (1892) ; text, with specimen facsimile, in Classical 
 Texts ; facs. of one column in Plate XVIIL 
 
ir'LATE A V 111. 
 
 ^^c T«N iri-f »f; ^ K.j-f rf-r^ nr\. ceo r-^ 
 
 . ^.^-,- . _^ _j _::;:^-:^.«— .^„_l '^^iS 
 
 IIERODAS.— 1ST OR 2ND CENT. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 95 
 
 part of the second, is too late a date to assign, and that 
 the MS. should rather be placed in the first century 
 or the first half of the second century. The forms of 
 the individual letters require little notice ; A is of the 
 rounded type ; M is deeply curved (ju, u) ; Z has the top 
 stroke separate, but the middle and lower strokes united 
 ( jI ), a variant which may indicate a relatively early date, 
 but is so rare as to provide no secure basis of argument ' ; 
 Y is very stiff" and straight, usually with a very short 
 tail. Throughout it is a plain representation of Roman 
 semi-uncial, with less grace than usual, but quite without 
 affectation or mannerism ^. 
 
 Another MS. which should probably be placed about The 
 the turn of the century is the British Museum papyrus Museum 
 of Isocrates Flept Elprivr]s ^. ' It is a large papyrus, mutilated isoerates. 
 at the beginning, and written in two distinct hands, the 
 first of which is decidedly better than the second. The 
 latter indeed verges closely on the non-literary type of 
 hand, and is certainly not the work of a trained scribe. 
 The first hand has several features in common with the 
 large Hyperides MS. A is rounded; Y is curved, not 
 forked, which favours a date in the first century; C falls 
 forward to some extent, which shows that it cannot be 
 early in that century. The other letters are not distinctive. 
 The second hand is loose and straggling to an extent 
 which is not found before the latter part of the first 
 
 ' This form recurs in the Oxyrhynchus fragment of Demosthenes, men- 
 tioned above (p. 76). 
 
 '' Prof. Blass has recently, in a sort of obiter dictum, assigned the Herodas to 
 the Ptolemaic period {Bacchylidis Garmina, pp. vii, viii), on the ground of its 
 frequent interchange of 1 and ei, which he regards as characteristic of this 
 period ; but (i) a study of the non-literary papyri of the first and second 
 centuries shows that such iotaeisms were extremely common then (and 
 this evidence is especially applicable to a MS. which, like the Herodas, is 
 evidently not the work of a highly-trained scribe) ; and (2) the forms 
 of the letters are wholly of the Roman type. 
 
 ' Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxxii. Two specimen facsimiles in Classical Texts, 
 with collation. 
 
96 
 
 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Some 
 Homeric 
 papyri : 
 Brit. Mus, 
 Pap. 
 
 CXXXVI. 
 
 century at earliest. Its A, C, and Y are substantially the 
 same as those just described; and it has a very cursive 
 form of e. On the whole, the end of the first century 
 or the first half of the second seem to be the most 
 probable dates for this MS., which, it may be remarked, 
 is of some importance in the history of the transmission 
 of Greek literary texts, since it shows that, of the two 
 well-marked families into which the vellum MSS. of 
 Isocrates are divided, neither is exclusively to be trusted, 
 and that the formation of these families does not go back 
 to classical, or even to early Christian, times. It also 
 tends to show that the text of Isocrates was substantially 
 the same in the first century of our era as that which 
 has been preserved for us in MSS. a thousand years 
 later. But this is to trespass outside the domain of 
 palaeography. 
 
 We come now to a large group of Homer MSS., including 
 three somewhat small fragments in the Louvre, three long 
 rolls in the British Museum, and a long and very inter- 
 esting MS. in the Bodleian. It would be absurdly rash 
 to try to place these in a precise chronological sequence ; 
 but it is worth while to describe them severally, and to 
 show on what grounds they are assigned to the period 
 now under consideration. 
 
 In one instance there is external evidence in the shape 
 of dated writing on the other side of the papyrus. This 
 is Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxxvt, a roll containing nearly the 
 whole of the fourth book of the Iliad, and fragments 
 of Book III ^ It is written in a rough, uneducated hand, 
 which gives it an appearance of later date than seems 
 to be actually true. The recto of the papyrus is occupied 
 by accounts, and among these are dates which must belong 
 to the reign of Augustus ; and since a papyrus of accounts 
 
 ' Specimen facsimile in Classical Texts, Plate vii. The MS. is there 
 wrongly dated, the evidence derivable from the vrriting on the recto not 
 having been discovered. Attention was first called to it by Prof. Wilcken. 
 
Plate X1.\. 
 
 -TOviK>i^-*H?{owHCTtfcn'«^ocKfc:scjucfOQn(a&tt|ic^^, 
 
 
 HOMER, ILIAD XIII.— 1ST OR 2ND CENT. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 97 
 
 would not be likely to be preserved very long (the case 
 of the Aristotle MS. shows how soon such a papyrus 
 might be used again), it seems almost certain that the 
 Homer must have been inscribed upon the verso in the 
 course of the first century. On the other hand the over- 
 hanging shape of C and the v-shape of Y make it impossible 
 to place it before the latter part of the century ; and it 
 may be even later than this. It is, however, so plainly 
 not the work of a professional transcriber of literary 
 MSS., that its importance in palaeographical history is not 
 great. 
 
 Much more interesting, from the palaeographical point Brit. Mus. 
 of view, is a papyrus brought from Egypt by Mr. Grenfell j,o^xxii. 
 in 1896, and now in the British Museum (Pap. Dccxxxii)^. 
 It is one of the longest Homer papyri in existence, 
 containing the greater part of Iliad xiii and xiv, carefully 
 written in a fine and ornamental hand. Indeed in point 
 of appearance it is perhaps inferior to none but the British 
 Museum Odyssey papyrus, described above. It has the 
 uncial form of A — always a sign of a carefully written 
 MS., but not confined to any one period ; and the general 
 aspect of the hand is square, firm, and well-formed. The 
 other letters have the shapes which we have seen to be 
 characteristic of the fully-developed Koman hand; G is 
 well-rounded, with rather a long cross-bar; Z is square 
 in form, and its cross-stroke not unfrequently meets the 
 lower bar in the middle instead of at the end, which 
 is an archaic feature; H has its cross-bar very high; 
 the right-hand stroke of A projects but little above the 
 point of junction; M and Z have their regular Roman 
 forms; C is well rounded, but upright; Y is v-shaped; 
 4' is very angular; and CO is rather stiff and compact. 
 The whole writing is rather compressed, and has a ten- 
 dency to lean backwards. So far as the forms just 
 
 ' A facsimile of a portion is given in Plate XIX. Alphabet in App. I, 
 col. 15. 
 
 H 
 
Bankes 
 Homer. 
 
 98 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 described differ from the average Roman hand of the 
 end of the first and the second century, they lean towards 
 the earher forms ; and consequently, if one were compelled 
 to assign a date within narrow limits, one would be disposed 
 to place it in the first century. It is, however, just a ease 
 where additional care on the part of the scribe may make 
 a MS. appear older than it is, through his retaining the 
 older forms of letters ; and it would consequently not be 
 wise to attempt to define the date too closely. 
 The The same may be said of another Homer-papyrus, which, 
 
 in contrast to that just described, was the earliest of its 
 class to be discovered. This is the MS. known as the 
 Bankes Homer, from the name of the gentleman who 
 brought it from Egypt in the year 1831. It contains 
 the last book of the Iliad, in very good condition 1. It 
 is written in a typically Eoman hand, but with less 
 precision and compactness than the last example. A is 
 of the angular form which is seen as far back as the 
 first century B. c, but is more irregularly written ; the cross- 
 bar of G is low; A has a long projection above the point 
 of junction ; C is round and upright ; Y is v-shaped and 
 rather straggling. The greater looseness and irregularity 
 of the writing suggest that it is somewhat later than 
 the last-mentioned MS., and that it should be placed in 
 the second century, as it has been by Sir E. Thompson; 
 but here again one does not know how much to allow 
 for the personal equation of the scribe. There are a few 
 corrections in a cursive hand which appears to be of 
 this century, but one cannot tell how long after the 
 original MS. they were written. An earlier date than 
 the first century, such as used formerly to be ascribed 
 to this MS., may be pronounced quite impossible in view 
 of modern knowledge. 
 
 The Homer papyri of the Louvre may be dismissed 
 
 ' Now Brit. Mus. Pap. cxrv ; specimen facsimile in Cut. of Ancient MSS. 
 {Greek}, plate vi, and in Pal. Soo. i. 153. Alphabet in App. I, col. 16. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 99 
 
 more summarily, being very much smaller in extent The 
 and of no importance, either palaeographical or textual. Homers 
 Three fragments are included in the publication in the 
 Notices et Extraits (nos. 3, 3**^ and 3*^')^. Of these the 
 best from the palaeographical point of view is no. 3'*'', 
 a small fragment of what must once have been a hand- 
 some copy of the thirteenth book of the Iliad. It has 
 the uncial A, but all the other test letters, such as M, Z 
 and Y, are distinctly Roman. It may belong to either 
 the first or the second century. Papyrus no. 3'''° is less 
 handsomely written, and has the .rounded minuscule form 
 of A ; but there is nothing in the shapes of the letters to 
 show that it is substantially later than the others. The 
 remaining fragment, no. 3, is the least ornamental of the 
 three, and probably the latest in date, being written in 
 a somewhat loose and shaky hand. It does not appear, 
 however, to be later than the second century, and shakiness 
 of hand is less to be relied on as a sign of a relatively late 
 date in papyri than in vellum MSS. ; for the latter are 
 almost invariably the work of professional scribes, and are 
 generic rather than individual in their styles, whereas 
 a large number of papyrus MSS. were written by amateur 
 or semi- amateur transcribers, and reflect the idiosyn- 
 crasies of the individual as well as the tendencies or 
 fashions of the age in which he lived. In cases such as this, 
 therefore, we must be content with a rather wide range of 
 uncertainty. 
 
 The first and second centuries represent the prime of the 
 Roman style, and the principal MSS. belonging to them 
 have now been described. It will have been seen that it is 
 normally a hand of moderate size, with letters square in 
 shape and well-rounded ^ ; moreover, so far as we have yet 
 
 1 Facsimiles (by hand) in the atlas accompanying vol. xviii. of N. et R, 
 plates xii and xlix. 
 
 ^ The terms are not contradictory, ' square ' implying that the letters, 
 whether angular or curved in outline, may be enclosed within a square. 
 
 H 2, 
 
loo PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 gone, the letters are upright, even though the columns 
 of writing sometimes lean to the right. It is a neat, 
 orderly, business-like hand, and in its best manifestations 
 graceful and, so far as is consistent with simplicity, 
 ornamental. It is very probable that a fragment of the 
 Orestes of Euripides, now at Geneva, should be added to 
 the list of beautifully- written MSS. of this period; but 
 its editor^, Prof. Nicole, who describes it as the handsomest 
 example of writing upon papyrus known to him, does not 
 fix its date precisely, and no facsimile of it has been 
 published. Certainly, in the present writer's judgement, 
 the best examples of the Roman period excel those of any 
 other period in grace and beauty, as well as in general 
 workmanlike qualities ; and this without in the least depre- 
 ciating the attractiveness of the strength and precision 
 seen in the best Ptolemaic papyri, such as the Louvre 
 Hyperides or the British Museum Bacchylides ^. 
 
 Ptolemaic letters are generally broader than they are high, and Byzantine 
 higher than they are broad, while Roman are normally abont equal in 
 each dimension. And whereas Ptolemaic letters are angular, Eoman have 
 their curves well rounded. 
 
 ' In the Bmue de Philologie, xix. 105. 
 
 - The account which has been given of the palaeography of the first and 
 second centuries is oonfii-med by the recently-published Oxyrhynohus 
 papyri. The published facsimiles from these papyri include a small but 
 beautifully- written fragment assigned to Alcman, apparently of the end 
 of the first century ; a fragment of Thucydides (Book iv.) in a small, 
 irregular hand, probably of the latter part of the first century, but 
 recalling in its size the much earlier papyrus of the third Demosthenic 
 epistle (p. 78 above) ; and the fragment of the TIpooifiia Armrj-^optKo. of 
 Demosthenes, to which reference has been made above in connexion with 
 the Bacchylides MS., written in a broad, slightly sloping hand, rather 
 loose in formation. Some other fragments of later date will be mentioned 
 below. Another recently-published papyrus of this period is a mathe- 
 nlatical fiagment known as the Ayer papyrus, brought from Egypt in 
 189s, and now in the Field Museum at Chicago (edited, with facsimile, 
 by Mr. E. J. Goodspeed in the Ammcan Journal of Philology, xix. 25^ It is 
 written in an ornamental hand approaching the uncial type, and has 
 been assigned by some authorities to the second or even the third century, 
 but would appear from the facsimile to be not later than the first. Some 
 of the letters, especially Y, are quite of the early Roman type. 
 
Plate XX. 
 
 r 
 
 > ' /"vs ^'-^li '^ V "- '■ - "^ ^'M i^- ^ ^-^ >n 
 <- ' r"" ■ •-• ' ~ >^ •"- *■;. v ■"'". K^ -^ >^ CT' '--^ -^ '■ 
 
 - ■-, ^..':*^ :*■., .^ .:.■.■ -,i:c^ Y'^'-"'' .'i'^!^ ]k ^ X --' -'.s' * 
 
 o 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 z 
 
 7 
 
 >•■ *"^ fr ^- ^ c <^-^-y Z.>^:;- ■^.: ,%l: , 
 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD loi 
 
 One MS. has, however, been reserved for separate con- The 
 sideration, which has a strong claim to be regarded as yet Homer, 
 handsomer than any that has hitherto been mentioned. 
 This is a copy of the second book of the Iliad, found 
 at Hawara by Mr. Fhnders Petrie, and now in the 
 Bodleian Library ; and it has been reserved on account of 
 the doubt attaching to its date. Sir E. Thompson, whose 
 judgement in palaeographical matters stands unquestionably 
 first, originally assigned it to the fifth century, on account 
 of its resemblance to the vellum MSS. of that date ; and it 
 is with great diffidence that a different opinion is here 
 propounded. The MS. is written in an exceptionally large 
 and carefully-formed hand^. The letters are square in 
 build, upright in position, with well-rounded curves. A is 
 of the uncial shape, with the cross-bar rather high ; £ has 
 the cross-bar rather low, as also has H ; M is deeply curved ; 
 Y is Y-shaped, but not of the Ptolemaic or early Roman type. 
 The other letters possess no distinctive characteristics, but 
 are square, well-curved specimens of the best Roman hand. 
 Now in many respects the characteristics here described 
 apply to the vellum uncials of the fifth and sixth centuries, as 
 they are seen in such MSS. as the Codex Alexandrinus and 
 the Codex Claromontanus ; and it is on this ground that 
 Sir E. Thompson assigns to the papyrus a date contempora- 
 neous with these MSS. On the other hand it will be seen 
 that, except in point of size, the forms of the letters are just 
 those of the Roman hand of the first and second centuries. 
 At the time when the papyrus was discovered, no uncials 
 of this size had been found among the papyri, and it was 
 perfectly natural to associate them with the vellum uncials 
 to which they unquestionably bear a considerable resem- 
 blance. The position has, however, since been altered by 
 the discovery of such documents as the lease of a. d. 88, 
 
 1 Facsimile of one column in Petrie's Hawara, Biahmu, and Arsinoe ; 
 part of a column in plate XX. Alphabet in App. I, col. 17. 
 
I02 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 described above, and the fragment of the AaKeSainxovtwv 
 YloXiTua, which show that a large uncial hand was in 
 use upon papyrus as early as the first or second century. 
 Hitherto the genesis of the hands seen in the early vellum 
 uncials has been unknown; but it now begins to seem 
 probable that they are the direct descendants of the hand 
 which had been used for the best papyrus MSS. two 
 hundred years earlier. Further reasons in support of this 
 view will be found below, and will be considered in the 
 next chapter, in connexion with the transition from 
 papyrus to vellum ; but meanwhile there is another argu- 
 ment in favour of an early date for the Oxford Homer. 
 A few notes have been added in the margins by a hand 
 different from that of the text; and these are written 
 in a sloping hand which will be seen presently to belong to 
 the third century ^. No doubt a sloping hand also followed 
 the vellum uncials of the fifth and sixth centuries; but 
 it is to be remembered that after the beginning of the 
 seventh century Greek writing upon papyrus becomes very 
 much less common, and there is nothing Byzantine in 
 the hand in which these notes are written. 
 
 It is not maintained that these arguments are conclusive, 
 especially as the history of large uncial writing on papyrus 
 is not by any means fully known to us; but they seem 
 to establish a strong probability that the Homer may 
 be placed as early as the second century. Some slight 
 confirmation of this conclusion may be found in a com- 
 parison of this MS. with the two minute scraps which 
 appear at the bottom of the plate containing the fragments 
 of the large Hyperides MS. (plate XVI). These scraps, 
 coming from what must have been a very handsome copy 
 of Demosthenes' Olynthiacs, were found in a dummy 
 roll of papyrus along with the Hyperides fragments and 
 
 ' One of these notes may be seen in the right-hand margin of the 
 facsimile ; but it is so faint in the plate as to be of little use to any one 
 who has not seen the original. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 103 
 
 other material, none of which was later than the second 
 century. There is therefore some slight presumption 
 that they were themselves not very much later than that 
 period ; and it will be seen that there is a considerable 
 resemblance between them and the Oxford Homer. It 
 may be doubted also whether so handsome a copy 
 would have been written on papyrus at a time when 
 the substitution of vellum for that material had already 
 been in progress for nearly a century ; but this argument 
 cannot be pressed, since such a question might be affected 
 by the idiosyncrasies of an individual book-lover. The 
 safest conclusion appears at present to be that the 
 probabilities point to the second century as the date 
 for this handsome MS., but that it would not be safe 
 to treat it as an ascertained fact which may be used for 
 the dating of other papyri. There can be very little doubt 
 that the point will be settled before long by the discovery 
 of fresh materials ^. 
 
 A short mention is perhaps due, in conclusion, to a MS. The 
 of considerable literary importance belonging to this oration of 
 period, though it falls rather outside the sequence of j^^P®''' 
 palaeographical development; namely the papyrus which 
 contains the Funeral Oration of Hyperides^. Like the 
 papyrus of Aristotle, the oration is written on the verso 
 of the roll, and in a private and non-literary hand. It 
 is not even, as the Aristotle is, a copy made by some 
 
 • An important piece of evidence in support of the conclusion stated 
 above has already come to light in one of the Oxyrhynchus papyri (Gren- 
 fell and Hunt, Oxyrhynchus Papyri, i, no. ao, plate v). This is, curiously 
 enough, also a copy of the second book of the Iliad, and is written in 
 a large and ornamental hand, sti-ongly resembling that of the Oxford 
 Homer ; while its date is approximately fixed by the occurrence on the verso 
 of some accounts which cannot be later than the third century. The 
 Oxford Homer may, therefore, now be assigned to the second century with 
 considerable confidence. 
 
 " Brit. Mus. Pap. xcviii ; complete facsimile (by hand) in the editio 
 princeps by Churchill Babington ; specimen photographic facsimile in 
 Cat. ofAnc. MSS. (Greek), -plate iv. 
 
104 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 private person desirous of possessing a work of classical 
 antiquity. The character of the handwriting and the 
 multitude of mistakes sliow that it must be a mere school- 
 boy's exercise. Its literary value, in spite of the many 
 blunders of transcription, is very great, since it alone 
 preserves for us one of the most famous speeches of an 
 orator who stood among the first in a time when the 
 oratory of the world reached its highest pitch; but for 
 the humbler purposes of palaeography it is not very useful. 
 A schoolboy's exercise can throw little light on the writing 
 of trained literary scribes, and holds no place in the 
 history of palaeography. The date of the MS. is given 
 approximately, though not precisely, by the writing on 
 the recto, which consists of a horoscope, the year of which 
 is shown by astronomical calculations to be either A. d. 95 
 or A. D. 155, with a decided probability in favour of the 
 former. A horoscope would probably lose its interest 
 after the lapse of a generation or so, and the oration 
 may consequently be dated with practical certainty in 
 the course of the second century^. The horoscope itself 
 is written in a neat and graceful hand, which approaches 
 the literary type, and serves to confirm the description 
 which has already been given of the Roman hand. The 
 same may be said of another horoscope in the British 
 Museum (Pap. ex), which is dated in the year 138 ^- 
 
 The third The character of the book-hand of the first and second 
 
 century, centuries has now been established as fully as the extant 
 
 materials allow, and all the important documents which 
 
 ' A MS. which in some degree recalls the writing of the Funeral 
 Oration is published by Messrs. Greufell and Hunt among the Oxyrhynchus 
 papyri (no. 9, plate iii). It is a fragment of a treatise upon metre, 
 probably by Aristoxenus, written in a rather ugly hand of medium size, 
 sloping backwards, and in dark ink. It may be assigned to the latter 
 part of the second or to the third centuiy. 
 
 ° Facsimiles of both these horoscopes are giyen in the atlas accompanying 
 vol. i. of Greek Papyri in the British Museum, 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 105 
 
 come within that period have been described. In passing 
 to the third century we enter a region much more obscure. 
 There are no MSS. which can be assigned to it with 
 absolute certainty, or even with such a clear approach 
 to certainty as was the case with many of the papyri 
 which have hitherto been discussed; and there are not 
 many which can be placed in it on reasonably probable 
 evidence. There is, however, a group of MSS., exhibiting 
 the same general type of hand, which, in the light of 
 recent discoveries, appears to belong to this century; and' 
 it is a group of some importance in palaeographical history. 
 The evidence on which this date is assigned to it is cir- 
 cumstantial rather than direct; but it seems to be fairly 
 conclusive. 
 
 The MS. on which the decision of the question mainly Brit. Mus. 
 turns is a papyrus in the British Museum containing the ^P''^*'^'- 
 second, third, and fourth books of the Iliad^. Unlike 
 all the papyri which have hitherto been described, it is 
 in book form, consisting of eighteen leaves, the text being 
 written on one side only. The most noticeable character- 
 istic of the hand in which it is written is that it has 
 a decided slope. This in itself marks it oif from the 
 upright hands of the first and second centuries, and it 
 also produces a lateral elongation of many of the letters 
 which is quite alien to the square build of the earlier 
 characters. A becomes broad, with a tendency to revert 
 to the angular shape of the later Ptolemaic style ; M shows 
 a similar tendency, becoming at once wider and shallower 
 than before ; € is less weU rounded ; O is very small ; Y is 
 angular and Y-shaped. The general aspect of the hand 
 is rough and coarse, but this may be due to the scribe, 
 who certainly was not a well-educated man, rather than 
 to the times in which he lived. 
 
 ' Pap. cxxvi ; specimen facsimile in Classical Tenets, plate vi. The cata- 
 logue of ships is omitted from Book ii. and only the first hundred lines of 
 Book iv. are preserved. Alphabet in App. I, col. 18. 
 
io6 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 There is no direct evidence of the date of the MS., but 
 some indirect evidence is provided by the writing which 
 stands on the verso of the last four leaves, containing 
 a short grammatical treatise attributed to Tryphon^- It 
 is written in a fairly good cursive hand, rather small 
 and compact, and leaning somewhat to the right. Until 
 quite recently there was nothing to fix the date of this 
 hand, so that it was of no use in establishing the age of 
 the writing on the recto ; but the clue has been fur- 
 nished by some of the papyri brought home in 1896 by 
 Mr. Grenfell. Some of these are dated in the reign of 
 Diocletian, in the years just on either side of a. d. 300 ; 
 and a comparison shows great similarity between these 
 hands and that of the Tryphon. If, then, the Tryphon is 
 to be placed somewhere about the year 300, the Homer 
 must have been written earlier, and may safely be as- 
 signed to the third century. These dates are earlier 
 than those which have previously been attached to the 
 MS. ^ ; but whereas the former opinion rested upon little 
 but conjecture, the new dates are based upon fairly good 
 evidence. 
 
 The results of this discovery are of some importance. 
 In the first place it seems to carry with it the dates of 
 a certain number of other documents, to which no dates 
 could be satisfactorily assigned before, but which exhibit 
 a sloping hand akin to that which has been described. 
 For instance, there is a fragment of the well-known 
 The Berlin theological work, the Shepherd of Hermas, published 
 Hermas. (^i^Q^gi^ ^^^ identified) by Wilcken ^. The editor of this 
 fragment, who stands quite at the head of the continental 
 students of papyri, could not, at the time of the publica- 
 tion (j8go), make any closer approximation to its date 
 
 ' Specimen facsimile in Classical Texts, plate ix. 
 
 '' In Classical Texts the Homer is provisionally assigned to the fourth 
 or fifth century, the Tryphon to the fifth or perhaps the sixth. 
 ^ Tafeln zur dlieren griechischen Palaographie, plate iii. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 107 
 
 than to say that it must be some centuries older than 
 a certain vellum MS. of the eighth century (the Frag- 
 mentum Mathematicum Bobiense) to which it bears some 
 general resemblance. It is now, however, fairly clear 
 that it must be placed in or near the third century, 
 being written in a sloping hand akin to that of the British 
 Museum Homer, though somewhat finer and thinner in 
 style. The letters are of much the same shape, except 
 that the curve of M is rather less shallow, and the hand 
 as a whole shows the same evidence of looseness and 
 degeneration. 
 
 Another fragment of some interest is the small piece other 
 of Ezekiel discovered by Mr. Grenfell, and now in the siopi'n " 
 Bodleian, containing a Hexaplar text, with a few of the l»and. 
 critical symbols employed by Origen^. Mr. Grenfell's 
 second volume contains three additional examples of this 
 type of hand, which may all be assigned to the same 
 century ; namely, the very interesting scrap of Pherecydes, 
 a portion of a drama (there identified with the Melanippe 
 Besmotis of Euripides, but perhaps a comedy), and parts 
 of two columns of a prose work, which has been identi- 
 fied by Prof. Blass and others as a portion of the Memora- 
 bilia of Xenophon^. In the case of the drama, the 
 evidence of date is strengthened by its possessing some 
 scholia in a cursive hand which cannot be later than the 
 third century. 
 
 The existence may consequently be taken to be estab- 
 lished of a sloping type of hand, which is characteristic 
 of the third century; and this confirms the conclusion 
 to which reference has already been made, that the history 
 of writing upon papyrus anticipates that of writing upon 
 vellum, so that similar phenomena on different materials 
 do not indicate contemporaneousness in date, but, on the 
 
 ' Grenfell, Greek Papyri, i. 5 (without facsimile). 
 
 ^ Grenfell and Hunt, Greek Papyri, ii. 11-13; facs. of the Pherecydes and 
 the drama, in plates iv and iii respectively. 
 
io8 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 contrary, admit of a difference of some centuries. On 
 vellum a sloping hand is first found about the eighth cen- 
 tury ; but no one would propose to place the papyri which 
 exhibit a sloping hand so late as this, when Greek writing 
 was practically extinct in Egjrpt. If, however, these 
 papyri are put back to the fifth or sixth century, as has 
 hitherto been done, the principle of conformity with the 
 vellum MSS. is abandoned, and there is consequently no 
 reason why we should not carry them yet further back 
 to the third century, if, as is now the case, trustworthy 
 evidence points to such a conclusion. 
 The Jt go happens that papyri of this type are, at present, 
 
 Isocrates. not at all plentiful in number, and nearly all that exist 
 are mere scraps. Besides the Homer MS. already described, 
 only one literary document of any size can as yet be 
 placed in this category, namely the Marseilles papyrus 
 of Isocrates In Nicoclevi'': Concerning the date of this 
 MS., which is of some value to the textual tradition 
 of Isocrates, very diverse opinions have been expressed; 
 the first editor, Schoene, assigning it to the Ptolemaic 
 age, while B. Keil, who followed Schoene in discussing 
 the MS., places it in the fifth century after Christ. The 
 former date is manifestly impossible ; the latter is probably 
 too late. The MS. is written in two hands, the first 
 a light, sloping hand, with affinities to those which have 
 just been described, while the second is solider and heavier, 
 having no very close parallels among extant papyri. It 
 is, of course, possible that this hand shows us the successor 
 of the third-century hand, but the difierences in the shapes 
 of individual letters are not very great, and it is more 
 likely that both hands belong to the third century, and 
 only differ through the personal idiosyncrasies of different 
 scribes ^. 
 
 ' Two specimen facsimiles (showing the different hands) in Melanges 
 Graux, with article by E. Schoene. 
 " The Oxyrhynchus papyri contribute some additional examples of this 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD 109 
 
 In addition to this sloping book-hand, a semi-literary 
 hand of a very different appearance is found in use in 
 the latter part of the century. It resembles the cursive 
 hand of the same period, which has been described in 
 chapter III (p. 46), and is, in fact, that cursive hand 
 adapted for literary use. An example of it may be seen British 
 in a fragment of a Psalter in the British Museum^, Psaiter 
 which may apparently stand with the Oxford Ezekiel, ^^P- 
 a page of St. Matthew among the Oxyrhynchus papyri, 
 and a scrap of Isaiah in the Rainer collection at Vienna, 
 as the earliest extant remains of the Greek Bible. The 
 hand is upright and somewhat showy, with the letters 
 K and O especially prominent ; but as it does not appear 
 to be a regularly-established book-hand, it need not be 
 described at length. The Psalter in question was appar- 
 .ently used as a school-book, having the separate syllables 
 marked off by a different hand, to which is probably also 
 to be ascribed some writing on the verso in which the 
 syllables are actually written apart. This writing on the 
 verso is in a cursive hand which belongs to the third or 
 fourth century, and consequently confirms the date which 
 has been assigned to the Psalter. 
 
 A hand very similar to that of the Psalter, though 
 rather smaller, is found in a long magical papyrus in 
 
 sloping third-eentury hand. The most important of these from the 
 literary point of view is the fragment -which is attributed, with great 
 probability, to Sappho (no. 7, plate ii), and which is palaeographically 
 notable as containing the only written example of a digamma, with the 
 exception of one in the Paris Alcman. Still more important palaeo- 
 graphically is a fragment of Plato's Laws (no. 23, plate vi), on the verso 
 of which is a date in the year a. d. 295, and which consequently confirms 
 the attribution of hands of this type to the third century at latest. A 
 fragment of St. Matthew (no. is, plate i), which is likewise assigned to the 
 third centm-y, is written in too rough and untrained a hand to be of 
 much palaeographical value. 
 
 ' Brit. Mus. Pap. coxxx ; a roughly printed facsimile in Alhenceum for 
 Sept. 8. 1894. The arguments there adduced for believing the papyrus 
 to have been in book form do not appear to be sound. 
 
no PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 the British Museum ^ ; the semi-literary character of the 
 contents being suited well enough by the semi-literary 
 style of the writing. 
 
 The consideration of these MSS. has brought us to the 
 end of the third century, and here, with the re-organization 
 of the Roman world by Diocletian, the Roman period of 
 palaeography comes to an end too. In the domain of non- 
 literary papyri we have seen that this change of government 
 is accompanied by a change in the current style of writing, 
 which makes the division into periods real, and not merely 
 arbitrary. In the department of literary palaeography 
 there is likewise a change, which comes to pass at about 
 the same date, but it is a change of a different character, 
 the nature of which will be considered in the following 
 chapter. 
 
 To sum up in brief the history of the period which has 
 just been described, it will be seen that it covers a space 
 of some 350 years, as against the 250 or 200 which are 
 all that the present limits of our knowledge give to the 
 Ptolemaic age. The main characteristic introduced into 
 Greek writing during this period is that of roundness, 
 which is accompanied by increased fluency of style. 
 Letters are formed with curves instead of angles, and they 
 are written, as much as possible, without raising the pen. 
 The half-century which lies before the beginning of the 
 Christian era concludes the period of transition which had 
 begun under the later Ptolemies, and by about a. d. i the 
 Roman style, with its rounded curves and square build 
 of letters, is well established. The first century is the 
 period of its perfection ; but before the close of it signs 
 of decay appear in the greater slackness and looseness 
 of formation in many letters. During the second century 
 this tendency is increased, and the appearance of firmness 
 combined with grace, which marks the earlier Roman 
 
 ' Brit. Mus. P.np. cxxi ; facs. in atlas aoeompanying vol. i. of Greek Papyri 
 in the British Museum. 
 
LITERARY PAPYRI OF THE ROMAN PERIOD iii 
 
 hand, disappears from all except the best MSS. In the 
 third century uprightness is exchanged for a sloping hand, 
 — always a sign of degeneracy in palaeography ; and this 
 is generally accompanied by looseness and irregularity 
 in the individual letters. The Roman hand has plainly 
 run its course, and there is room for the new departure 
 which has now to be considered. 
 
CHAPTER VI 
 
 THE TRANSITION TO VELLUM 
 
 No Byzan- In treating of the non-literary papyri it has been shown 
 of"uterary ^^^* *^^ Roman period is followed by an equally long and 
 papyri. prolific period, to which the name of Byzantine has been 
 given. But in the sphere of literary papyri there is no 
 Byzantine period. It is true that a certain number of 
 literary texts upon papyrus have been, at various times, 
 located between the fourth and the seventh centuries; 
 but reason has been shown in the previous chapter for 
 transferring some of these to much earlier dates, while 
 those which remain are, as will be seen presently, few 
 and unimportant. Indeed the student who is acquainted 
 with the principal extant papyri will already have re- 
 cognized that hardly any of them still remain to be 
 dealt with. The explanation is not to be found in any 
 scarcity of papyrus as a writing material. The masses 
 of documents of the sixth and seventh centuries which 
 have been found in Egypt are sufficient to disprove any 
 such theory. The cause is different, and is to be found 
 in the successful rivalry of another material, namely 
 parchment or vellum. 
 Early use The beginnings of the use of vellum are to be found 
 o ve um. jjj^^gjj^ earlier, and are recorded in the standard works 
 on palaeography. Without discussing the precise value 
 of the story which tells of its invention in Pergamum 
 
THE TRANSITION TO VELLUM 113 
 
 in the second century before Christ, or the reference by 
 Cicero to the use of bL(j)9epai'^, it is clear from Martial's 
 Apophoreta that vellum was considerably used as a writing 
 material in the second century of our era. It seems 
 certain, however, that at this time it was generally 
 regarded as inferior to papyrus. It was used for note- 
 books, or for rough copies of literary compositions; and 
 if, as Martial shows, copies of classical authors, such as 
 Homer, Virgil, Livy, and Ovid, were sometimes made on 
 vellum, they were common and cheap reproductions, better 
 to give away to clients and hangers-on than to keep as 
 ornaments of a good library. 
 
 The earliest extant example of writing upon vellum Fragment 
 is perhaps a specimen of this very class of book. It is gtheneson 
 a somewhat recent acquisition of the British Museum, vellum, 
 consisting of two small leaves of vellum, with two columns 
 to each page, containing part of Demosthenes' speech De 
 Falsa Legatione^. This fragment was found in Egypt, 
 and though the exact circumstances of its discovery are 
 not known, it came to Europe among a large collection 
 of papyri, the majority of which belonged to the Roman 
 period. The hand in which it is written bears a decided 
 resemblance to that of the Herodas papyrus. It is quite 
 unlike any known vellum hand, and we are therefore 
 justified in regarding it as belonging to the period to 
 which its appearance seems to assign it, namely, about 
 the second century. It may thus fall within the period 
 at which Martial was writing, and it corresponds very 
 well to what has been said of the character of the 
 vellum MSS. mentioned by the poet. It is plainly not 
 an elaborately written copy. There is nothing of the 
 appearance of an edition de luxe, as in the Vatican or 
 Sinaitic MSS. of the Bible, or the Palatine and Medicean 
 
 ' Epp- ad Ait. xiii. 24. See Thompson, pp. 35-37, for a summary of the 
 data on this subject. 
 
 ' Brit. Mus. Add. MS. 34473 ; text and description in Journal of Philology, 
 xxii. 247 (1894). 
 
 I 
 
114 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Virgils. It may well have been regarded as an inferior 
 class of book to the best papyrus MSS. of the period. 
 Absence of For the present, this example stands alone, and there 
 papyri^ is every reason to suppose that to the end of the third 
 after third century papyrus held its own, at any rate in Egypt, as 
 ^' the material on which literary works were written. But 
 when we come to the fourth century the situation is 
 changed. For non-literary purposes, as has been shown 
 above, the Roman period is succeeded by a Byzantine 
 period, equally long and equally prolific, lasting well 
 into the seventh century. Literary palaeography, how- 
 ever, has no Byzantine period, so far as papyri are con- 
 cerned. It cannot be due to accident that scarcely any 
 literary works on papyrus .have come down to us which 
 can reasonably be assigned to dates between the fourth 
 and seventh centuries. It is true that there have been 
 periods which, until quite lately, were unrepresented 
 among extant papyri; but the cases are not parallel. 
 In those instances no papyri at all of the periods in 
 question had been discovered; which merely meant that 
 the spade of the explorer had not hit upon any site of 
 that particular date. In the case of the Byzantine period, 
 on the contrary, not hundreds merely, but thousands 
 of papyri have been found, which now choke the libraries 
 of Berlin and Vienna; yet among these scarcely one 
 contains literary work, and the few that do are palpably 
 not written by professional scribes for the public market. 
 It is, therefore, a fair conclusion that papyrus was not 
 at that date being used so freely for literary purposes 
 as it had been during the Roman period. 
 Vellum This inference from the negative argument of the 
 
 the fourth absence of literary papyri later than the third century 
 century, jg confirmed by positive evidence from the other side. 
 The fourth century is the date to which our earliest 
 extant vellum MSS. (the above-mentioned Demosthenes 
 excepted) are assigned; and though the grounds for this 
 
THE TRANSITION TO VELLUM 115 
 
 ascription are not quite so conclusive as one could wish, 
 they are sufficient to justify a fair amount of confidence. 
 The MSS. in question include the Vatican and Sinaitic 
 Codices in Greek, the Codex Vercellensis of the Old Latin 
 Bible, the Codices Palatinus, Romanus, Vaticanus, and 
 Sangallensis of Virgil, and possibly the Bembine Terence. 
 The period of transition is further marked by the well- 
 known statement of Jerome, that Acacius and Euzoius 
 (towards the end of the fourth century) caused a number 
 of damaged volumes in the famous library of Pamphilus 
 at Caesarea to be replaced by copies upon vellum. The 
 language employed by him^ implies that this was a 
 deliberate and systematic attempt to renovate the library ; 
 and the adoption of vellum in place of papyrus indi- 
 cates that the victory of the former material had been 
 gained by this time. It is consequently certain that the 
 introduction of vellum had begun at a considerably earlier 
 date. Finally, the evidence is clinched by the statement 
 of Eusebius that the emperor Constantine, after his 
 acceptance of Christianity, ordered fifty copies of the 
 Scriptures to be prepared on vellum for use in the churches 
 of Constantinople. When an emperor, on so special an 
 occasion, orders vellum copies for the churches of his 
 capital, in the beautifying of which no expense had been 
 spared, we may be confident that vellum was by that time 
 regarded as the best material for literary purposes. 
 
 It does not follow that papyrus was at once and alto- -^ few 
 gether extinguished by the victory of vellum, and there mss. of 
 
 remain a few MSS. to be mentioned which appear to ^°^\^\ 
 
 ^ '- century 
 
 belong to the fourth or later centuries. In no case, how- or later. 
 ever, are they documents of much palaeographical im- 
 portance. A very long magical papyrus at Paris ^, and 
 
 ' 'Quam [bibliothecam] ex parte cormptam .... in membranis 
 instaurare conati sunt' (£p. 141). 
 
 ^ Specimen facs. in Omont's Facsimiles desplus andens Manuscrits Grecs, . . 
 de la Bibliothegue Rationale, plate i. 
 
 I a 
 
ii6 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 a less long one in the British Museum ^ have been 
 assigned to the fourth century, though there is no direct 
 evidence to fix their date. They are written in book 
 form, on rather narrow pages (as in the case of the 
 papyrus of Iliad ii-iv, which has been assigned above 
 to the third century), and the writing slopes somewhat; 
 but it is not quite of the same type as the sloping hands 
 of the third century. It is a rounder, thicker, harder 
 hand, and its appearance suggests the possibility of the 
 writer having been familiar with vellum MSS. Further, 
 the text is written on both sides of the leaf, unlike the 
 Homer papyrus mentioned above ; and this again seems 
 to indicate the influence of vellum. On the whole, the 
 case is one on which the only safe plea is that of ignorance ; 
 but such indications as there are seem to point to the 
 fourth century rather than the third. The contents of 
 both documents are strongly coloured by Gnosticism, but 
 so intermixed with other elements that it is not at all 
 likely that they were written during the flourishing time 
 of that philosophy; while mistakes are so frequent as 
 to show that they are somewhat unintelligent copies, and 
 not original works. So far, therefore, as the contents 
 are concerned, there is nothing to discredit the date that 
 has generally been assigned to these MSS. 
 Psalter Of more interest is a papyrus Psalter in the British 
 
 Museum. Muscum ^, as to the age of which exceedingly different views 
 have been held. It consists of thirty-two leaves, rather 
 short and square in shape, containing Psalms x-xxxiv, 
 written in an irregular sloping hand. Tischendorf, who 
 first published its text, regarded it as earlier than any 
 vellum MS. in existence ; but there is no reason to suppose 
 that he had ever given much attention to the palaeography 
 
 ' Pap. XLVi ; facs. in Atlas accompanying vol. i. of Greek Papyri in the 
 British Museum^ plates xxxvi — xlix. 
 
 ^ Pap. XXXVII ; specimen facs. in Cat. of Anc. MSS. {Greek), plate xii ; Pal. 
 Soc. i. 38. 
 
THE TRANSITION TO VELLUM 117 
 
 of papyri, nor was there then sufficient evidence extant 
 to enable him to form an opinion. The editors of the 
 Palaeographical Society at first left it as early as the 
 fourth or fifth century, but subsequently brought it 
 down to the sixth or seventh; and there is little doubt 
 that the later date is correct. The hand is not that of 
 a trained scribe at all, and is not of the literary type. 
 It is not in the least like the sloping hand which we 
 have assigned to the third century. It is closely akin 
 to the non-literary hands of the late Byzantine period, 
 described in Chapter III. It will be remembered that 
 a sloping hand comes into use for non-literary documents 
 towards the end of the sixth century, and continues 
 into the seventh ; and it is to this class of hands that 
 the Psalter in question belongs. It is of some importance 
 to fix the date, on account of the interest that would 
 attach to the MS. if Tischendorf's claim could be made 
 good; but its palaeographical importance is not great. 
 
 So far, the late papyrus hands have had no direct Britisii 
 and close connexion with the contemporary vellum hands. Hesiod!^ 
 There are, however, some cases in which there is a con- 
 siderable resemblance. The earliest, in all probability, of 
 such MSS. is a fragment of Hesiod in the British 
 Museum^, written in a large uncial hand of the same 
 general type as the Codex Alexandrinus. It is an up- 
 right hand, square in formation and well-rounded, but 
 difiering from the second century MSS., of which the 
 same description has been given, in the thickness and 
 coarseness of the writing. This does not appear to be 
 due to a lack of skill on the part of the scribe, but to 
 be the result of deliberate intention. It is rather an 
 imitation of the earlier hand at a time when the light- 
 ness of touch, so necessary for good writing upon papyrus, 
 had been lost; and consequently there seems to be no 
 
 ' Pap. CLix ; text in Revue de Philologie, xvi. 181. 
 
ii8 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 reason for separating it from the vellum hands to which 
 it appears, prifna facie, to be akin. 
 The Another papyrus, reproducing even more evidently 
 
 St. Cyril, the writing of contemporary vellum MSS., is a MS. at 
 Dublin which contains some portions of the treatise De 
 Adoratione of St. CyriP. It is written in page-form 
 in a good-sized uncial hand of the type that is generally 
 called Coptic. It is especially marked by the upright 
 A and the deeply curved M (AA), which are found in 
 a few vellum MSS., such as the Codex Zacynthius and 
 the Codex Marchalianus. These MSS. are generally 
 assigned to the sixth or seventh century, and the papyrus 
 of Cyril may reasonably be placed in the same period. 
 In a very similar hand is the fragment of a Festal Letter 
 from a patriarch of Alexandria to his clergy, which was 
 obtained by Mr. Grenfell in 1895-6, and of which the 
 date is probably a. d. 577 ^. 
 Papyrus of The last MS. that need be mentioned in this connexion 
 Prophets. ^^ o'^® ^^ ^^^ prophets Zechariah and Malachi, which 
 was formerly (and probably is still) in the possession 
 of a Viennese dealer, Theodor Graf. It was exhibited 
 at the London Oriental Congress of 1893, with the state- 
 ment that its date was in the second century^- This 
 date is, however, wholly impossible. The MS. is really 
 of the same type as the last, but larger, rougher, and 
 more irregular. It is a large, coarse uncial hand, written 
 on pages of a good size. The leaves are bound together 
 into quires by pieces of string. The seventh century is 
 probably quite as early a date as it is entitled to claim, 
 and, like the Cyril MS., it falls rather outside the domain 
 of papyrus palaeography. The material on which it is 
 written is indeed papyrus, but the writing is that which 
 
 ' Published with facsimile in Transactions of the Soyai Irish Academy, vol. 
 xxix, pt. xviii, by the Kev. J. H. Bernard. 
 
 ^ Published with facsimile in Grenfell and Hunt's Greek Papyri, vol. 
 ii ; now Pap. nccxxix in the British Museum. 
 
 ' A rough facsimile was given in the Times during the Congress. 
 
THE TRANSITION TO VELLUM 119 
 
 belongs properly to vellum. It shows a late stage in the 
 transition from papyrus to vellum, when the victory of the 
 latter had been won, though the Coptic Church continued 
 for some centuries to use the ancient material for its ver- 
 nacular Bible, and also, to some extent, for Greek copies 
 of the Scriptures also. 
 
 Conversely, there are one or two MSS. which show upon Vellum 
 vellum a style of writing to which we are accustomed only Jf^^ 'j-Jj" 
 in papyri. The first of these, the fragment of Demosthenes' style. 
 De Falsa Legatione, has been described already: the 
 other which seems to deserve notice is the MS. of the 
 Gospel and Revelation of Peter, discovered at Akhmim 
 in 1886 and published in 1893^- This has been assigned 
 to the eighth century by some palaeographers, including 
 the very high authority of M. Omont ; but in truth there 
 is no even approximate parallel to it among vellum MSS. 
 Its kinsmen must be found in the Byzantine papyri of the 
 sixth and seventh centuries, especially the former, as they 
 have been described in Chapter III; and there seems to 
 be no reason for declining to give this date to the Peter MS. 
 It is confirmed by the other contents of the same volume, 
 which are written in hands more closely conforming to 
 the vellum type, and apparently of the sixth century. 
 
 Instances such as these, however, whether of vellum The 
 MSS. written in papyrus hands, or of papyrus MSS. t^^elium. 
 in hands which belong properly to vellum, are so scarce 
 as to be plainly exceptional, the natural concomitants 
 of a period of transition. The general conclusion seems 
 certain, that about the fourth century papyrus ceased to be 
 the normal material for works of literature, and its 
 place was taken by vellum. Of course this change of 
 material involved a certain amount of change in the style of 
 writing ; but the general type remained the same, or rather, 
 developed only in an ordinary manner and at an ordinary 
 
 ' Full facsimile by the French Mission Arch^ologique at Cairo ; also by 
 Gebhardt. 
 
120 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 rate. The earliest vellum MSS. carry on the traditions 
 of the Roman style of writing upon papyrus. The only 
 change that is apparent is one in the direction of greater 
 care and precision. The scribes found that the new 
 material lent itself very easily to a handsome style of 
 writing ; and they consequently abandoned the somewhat 
 slovenly sloping style which had come in during the third 
 century, and modelled themselves on the earlier and 
 more careful writing of the first and second centuries. 
 The resemblance of the Sinaitic and Vatican codices 
 to papyrus MSS. has been noticed more than once. Not 
 only in the narrow columns, arranged four or three on 
 a page, and showing eight or six at each opening of the 
 book, but also in the hands themselves, there is a very 
 real resemblance to papyri of the best Roman period. 
 The Vatican MS. recalls such a papyrus as the British 
 Museum Odyssey, or that which contains books xiii, xiv 
 of the Iliad; the Sinaitic MS. reminds one still more 
 strongly of the great Hyperides papyrus. The chief varia- 
 tion is in the increased thickness of the heavier strokes, 
 which are differentiated from the light strokes far more 
 than was natural on the comparatively delicate papyrus; 
 though this tendency actually reacts upon the papyri 
 written after the vellum period had set in, and accounts 
 for the greater heaviness and thickness mentioned above 
 as characteristic of such papyri. 
 The dates The question is sometimes asked whether the evidence 
 early derivable from papyri does not modify our views as 
 vellum to the dates of the early vellum uncials. It has been 
 
 uncials. 1 • ,1 T , 
 
 shown m the precedmg chapter that a hand of the same 
 general type as that of the vellum MSS. is found on 
 papyrus as early as the end of the first century. Is it 
 not possible that the great MSS. of the Greek Bible are 
 earlier than they have hitherto been supposed to be ? 
 It is impossible to argue the question fully here, since 
 its decision rests largely upon details not properly palaeo- 
 
THE TRANSITION TO VELLUM 
 
 graphical, such as the presence or absence of certain 
 divisions of the text of the New Testament (the Eusebian 
 canons, the Ammonian sections, the Euthalian divisions of 
 the Acts) ; but it may be stated that the palaeographical 
 evidence does not require any departure from the dates 
 which have become traditional. In the case of the Codex 
 Alexandrinus, the presence of a treatise of Athanasius 
 (attached to the Psalms) precludes a date earlier than 
 the latter part of the fourth century; while the Codex 
 Sinaiticus has two notes or colophons which contain 
 references to the library of Pamphilus at Caesarea — a 
 library only formed at the beginning of the fourth 
 century. On the other hand, the style of the beginning 
 of the sixth century is fixed by the Vienna MS. of Dios- 
 corides written for Juliana Anicia, daughter of Flavins 
 Anicius Olybrius, who was emperor in the west in a. d. 472. 
 A fuller discussion of this subject would belong rather 
 to an essay on vellum-palaeography; but the facts here 
 summarized show that the dates of the early Bible uncials 
 do not rest upon palaeographical considerations alone, 
 and are too firmly fixed to be afiected by the evidence 
 of the papyri. The same cannot be said of the very 
 fine MS. of Homer, with illustrations, now at Milan 1. 
 The hand of this has a particularly early appearance ; and 
 though it would be rash to express a definite judgement 
 merely on the strength of a few facsimiles, it is worth 
 while suggesting a doubt whether this MS. may not be 
 considerably older than the fifth century, the .date to which 
 it is now assigned. 
 
 The conclusion, therefore, to which the evidence leads 
 is that the literary tradition passed wholly from papyrus 
 to vellum in the fourth century, the exceptions in either 
 direction being too few and too unimportant to require 
 much notice. It appears, further, that the hands of the 
 early vellum uncials are the direct descendants of the 
 ' Specimen facsimiles in Pal. Soc. i. 39, 40, 50, 51. 
 
122 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 hands found in literary papyri, especially those of the first 
 
 and second centuries. The results of this revolution are 
 
 not solely of palaeographical importance. They have also 
 
 had a bearing on literary history, and have fundamentally 
 
 aflFected our present knowledge of ancient literature. 
 
 Results of So long as papyrus was the material, and the roll the 
 the change p . j tj. -j. • ^\.^ 
 
 frompapy- lorm, m common use tor uterary purposes, it was impossible 
 
 rus to ^ include works of very great extent in a single volume. 
 
 Very large rolls were cumbersome to use, and perhaps 
 
 were liable to be torn more easily than those which 
 
 were lighter and shorter ; in any case, as has been shown 
 
 in an earlier chapter, a length of ao to 30 feet is the 
 
 greatest to which a single roll attains, while most of those 
 
 which are now extant must have been considerably shorter. 
 
 Consequently works of any great length could not be 
 
 contained in a single roll, but had to be divided into 
 
 a number of rolls. No papyrus roll of Homer hitherto 
 
 discovered contains more than two books of the Iliad^. 
 
 Three short orations fill the longest extant roll of Hy- 
 
 perides. The 'A6rivai<av IloXtreia occupies no less than four 
 
 rolls, though these, it is true, are of very small dimensions. 
 
 A single play, a single long oration, would be enough 
 
 to fill an ordinary roll. In the domain of sacred literature, 
 
 the four Gospels and the Acts must each have occupied 
 
 a separate roll; and no complete New Testament was 
 
 possible until vellum came into use. It is obvious that 
 
 conditions such as these favour selection among the works 
 
 of an author. The ordinary literary student would not 
 
 possess a complete Aeschylus or Sophocles, but only his 
 
 favourite plays ; and, since opinion tends to run in similar 
 
 directions, some plays would be very much more in request 
 
 than others. It is this fact that accounts for the state 
 
 ' There is perhaps an exception to this rule in a papyrus recently 
 discovered by Mr. Grenfell, and now in the Bodleian, the fragments 
 of which contain lines from books xxii, xxiii, and xxiv. This MS. is in 
 the small hand of the third century b. c, which would admit of a great 
 amount of text in a roll of ordinary size. 
 
THE TRANSITION TO VELLUM 123 
 
 in which the tragedians have come down to us. We 
 have only a small proportion of their plajj^s, but we have 
 all that were most admired in antiquity. The meaning 
 of this is that, at the time when vellum came into use 
 and large collections became possible, the great majority 
 of the dramas had already become scarce, and consequently 
 few save those which we now possess were transcribed 
 into vellum codices. We can imagine a similar state of 
 things if the plays of Shakespeare had continued for two 
 or three centuries, or even more, to circulate only in their 
 original quarto form, where each play occupies a single 
 volume, instead of being collected into the folios shortly 
 after his death. In that case posterity would, no doubt, 
 possess Hamlet, Macbeth, As You Like It, and Much Ado 
 about Nothing; but it is highly probable that Ti/mon 
 of Athens, All's Well that Ends Well, Pericles, and Titus 
 Andronicus would have been lost, or would survive only 
 in fragments. 
 
 Other causes no doubt co-operated largely in determining 
 the survival or disappearance of the various works of 
 ancient literature. The stream of time, though far from 
 acting as Bacon, in a pessimistic frame of mind, declared, 
 has yet been singularly capricious in its choice of the 
 cargoes which it has brought safely down to us. But 
 among the conditions which have exercised an important 
 influence upon its operations are, beyond doubt, the use 
 of papyrus and of the roll-form as the vehicle of literary 
 tradition for six centuries after the great Attic period, 
 and its supersession by vellum, and by the modern book- 
 shape or codex, in the fourth century of our era. 
 
 The influence of papyrus palaeography does hot, however. The 
 
 end here. For non-literary purposes, for the ordinary jj^nd on ^ 
 
 occasions of daily life, papyrus continued to be used yellum 
 
 I • 1 , J • T-i 1 1 ±1 developed 
 
 almost exclusively, at any rate m Jigypt, and apparently from late 
 
 elsewhere, for several centuries after its practical dis- ^^^■^g"^ 
 
 appearance from the literary field. The development of 
 
124 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 cursive writing for private and business purposes runs 
 its regular course, as has been traced in the third chapter 
 of this essay, until the seventh, or even the eighth century. 
 Then our evidence ceases, through the accidental fact that 
 the use of Greek was about that time obliterated in the 
 only country from which materials for this department 
 of palaeography are derivable. But common sense tells 
 us that elsewhere in the Greek-speaking world — in Con- 
 stantinople, in Athens, in Asia Minor — Greek cursive 
 writing continued to be used for every-day purposes, 
 whether upon papyrus or (as no doubt was increasingly 
 the case after the severance of Egypt from the Empire) 
 on vellum. The stream runs underground for a space, 
 but it reappears at the time of the palaeographic revolution 
 of the ninth century, when minuscules superseded uncials 
 as the current book-hand. As has been briefly stated by 
 Wilcken i, in a sort of obiter dictum, the minuscule of the 
 tenth century is the descendant of the papyrus-cursive 
 of the seventh. The interval of time is so considerable 
 that very close resemblances are hardly to be expected, 
 especially since the tenth-century hand was a refined 
 and idealized reproduction of its archetype; but the 
 resemblance is quite traceable. The forms of letters in 
 the late Byzantine papyri are already approaching those 
 of the vellum minuscule; and when they are written 
 small, as in the receipts and accounts of the seventh 
 century, the resemblance is still more apparent. 77 has 
 developed its h-shape, and jx has its long perpendicular 
 tail; V has its familiar v-shape, and v has lost its tail 
 and become a simple curve; a, 8, e, and indeed most 
 of the letters, approximate to the forms in which we 
 know them now. In the better examples there is even 
 something of the sharpness and precision which mark 
 the early vellum minuscules. They are not, it is true, 
 nearly so beautiful as the MSS. of the tenth century 
 
 ' In the Introduction to his Tafeln. 
 
THE TRANSITION TO VELLUM 125 
 
 — the perfection of Greek minuscule writing — but they 
 show plainly that they stand in the line of their ancestry. 
 
 It is so that, for the first time, the minuscule hand 
 enters the line of literary tradition. The hand which 
 for fifteen hundred years had been confined, so far as 
 its proper use was concerned, to accounts, wills, and other 
 such legal and private documents, and had only acci- 
 dentally, as it were, become at times the vehicle of 
 literature, now, in an improved and purified form, becomes 
 the regular repository of literary works. The minuscule 
 hand, even in its most cursive manifestations, is as old 
 as the set uncial, so far at least as our records go back, 
 and comes down side by side with it, though confined 
 to less dignified functions. But at the last, when the 
 uncial hand was exhausted, and could no longer supply 
 the needs of increasing literary demands, the minuscule 
 hand came forward to take its place, and to carry on the 
 torch of literature for the five hundred years that still 
 remained before the invention of the printing-press. 
 
 So, up to the end, the influence of papyrus remains 
 traceable. Its immediate literary function was over when 
 its book-hand gave birth to the vellum uncials of the 
 fourth century; but its non-literary hand carried on 
 a tradition which was to claim its place in literature 
 six hundred years afterwards. Then its duties were at 
 an end, and it is only in its remote descendants that 
 it still survives, in the Greek types of to-day, which have 
 been imitated or developed from the written hands of the 
 Middle Ages. 
 
APPENDIX I 
 
 ALPHABETS OF LITERARY PAPYRI 
 
 The following table gives the alphabets of the chief literary 
 papyri which have been described in the preceding pages. 
 They are arranged in what is believed to be their chronological 
 order, though in the cases of MSS. of the first and second 
 centuries this order must be regarded as only approximate. 
 In the process of reproduction the size of the letters has been 
 slightly reduced throughout. The following are the MSS. 
 from which the alphabets are taken. 
 
 1. Literary fragments (Grenfell and Hunt, Gk. Pap. ii. i 
 
 =Brit. Mus. Pap. dclxxxviii). Early third century b. c. 
 
 2. Petrie Phaedo (Brit. Mus. Pap. cccclxxxyiii). Third 
 
 century b. c. 
 
 3. Petrie Antiope (Brit. Mus. Pap. cccclxxxv). Third 
 
 century b. c. 
 
 4. Dialectical Fragment (Louvre Pap. 2). Before 160 b. c. 
 
 5. Hyperides, In Athenogenem (in the Louvre). Second 
 
 century b. 0. 
 
 6. Bacchylides (Brit. Mus. Pap. dccxxxiii). First century 
 
 B. c. 
 
 7. Hyperides, In Philijopidem (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxxii). First 
 
 century B. c. 
 
 8. Demosthenes, Ep. Hi. (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxxiii). First 
 
 century b. c. 
 
 9. Herculaneum Pap. 152. First century b. c. Other 
 
 Hereulaneum MSS. have similar alphabets. 
 10. Homer, Biad xxiii, xxiv. (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxviii). Late 
 first century b. c. 
 
128 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 11. Petition (Brit. Mus. Pap. cccliv). Circ. lo b. c. 
 
 12. Homer, Odyssey iu. (Brit. Mus. Pap. colxxi). Circ. a. d. i. 
 
 13. Homer, Hiad xviii. (Harris Homer = Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 
 cvii). First century. 
 
 1 4. Hyperides, InBemostJienem, etc. (Brit. Mus. Papp. cviii, cxv). 
 
 Late first century. 
 
 15. Homer, Eiad xiii, xiv. (Brit. Mus. Pap. dccxxxii). First 
 
 century. 
 
 16. Homer, Iliad xxiv, (Bankes Homer = Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 
 cxiv). Second century. 
 
 17. Homer, Iliad ii. (Bodleian MS. Gr. class, a. 1 (P)). 
 
 Second century. 
 
 18. Homer, Uiad ii.-iv. (Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxvi). Third 
 
 century. 
 
 For the non-literary papyri, an excellent table of alphabets 
 will be found in Sir E. M. Thompson's HandbooTc to GreeJc and 
 Latin Palaeography. 
 
ALPHABETS OF 
 
 3"" CENT. B.C.- 
 
 Z^.oCENT 
 B.C. 
 
 100-50 B.C. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 G 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 A/ 
 
 Aa 
 
 hl^A 
 
 AA 
 
 Afi 
 
 A A 
 
 A A 
 
 o*>.A 
 
 A^ 
 
 fi J 
 
 8 
 
 £ 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 B 
 
 £ 
 
 (S-lf 
 
 6 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 r j- 
 
 r 
 
 r r 
 
 r 
 
 r r 
 
 r r 
 
 .A A 
 
 ^i 
 
 <i 
 
 A^ 
 
 A 
 
 A A 
 
 i^A 
 
 ^ A 
 
 AA 
 
 r r 
 
 f £f- 
 
 e 
 
 f 4 
 
 ee 
 
 f-f- 
 
 e e 
 
 ft 
 
 ef 
 
 
 T 
 
 zc 
 
 XX 
 
 Z2 
 
 zx 
 
 2 
 
 X 
 
 Z-z 
 
 >< 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 >1 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H h 
 
 hn 
 
 H 
 
 e 
 
 «0 
 
 1 
 
 ee 
 
 I 
 
 e 
 
 J 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 e 
 1 
 
 Y. K 
 
 1 
 
 f JC 
 
 
 1 
 
 KK 
 
 
 J 
 
 ;< X 
 
 
 / 
 
 >A 
 
 A 
 
 A A 
 
 hk 
 
 AA 
 
 AA 
 
 A\ 
 
 1- r- 
 
 AA 
 
 ^ 
 
 /WM 
 
 A,^ 
 
 />/* 
 
 h 
 
 Mn 
 
 Jtf-ir 
 
 /■^ 
 
 Al/M 
 
 N- N 
 
 N N 
 
 N 
 
 /M 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 fJ 
 
 N 
 
 r 
 
 — 
 
 ^ 
 
 T 
 
 - 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z Z 
 
 2 i 
 
 t; 
 
 0» 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 r> 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 nv 
 
 nn 
 
 nn 
 
 rr 
 
 n ! 
 
 ;p 
 
 f 
 
 ff 
 
 /^' 
 
 f 
 
 /r 
 
 /^ 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 ti 
 
 f r 
 
 £■ C 
 
 cc 
 
 cc 
 
 c r 
 
 c C 
 
 f r 
 
 r i 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 TT 
 
 T 
 
 7 
 
 T 
 
 T r 
 
 T 
 
 Y Y 
 
 YY 
 
 Y 
 
 1 Y 
 
 y 
 
 YT 
 
 N 
 
 YY 
 
 YY 
 
 f 
 
 ff 
 
 t 
 
 ^^ 
 
 fi 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 tt 
 
 n 
 
 )^ 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X X 
 
 X 
 
 y 
 
 X 
 
 > 
 
 X 
 
 
 ft 
 
 f 
 
 y 
 
 1 
 
 -f 
 
 i 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 WVV^ 
 
 u i» 
 
 (v 1. 
 
 £x) (V 
 
 01 li 
 
 t-: to 
 
 cvw 
 
 ^ 1- 
 
 Iri W 
 
LITERARY WiPYRI. 
 
 50-1 B.C 
 
 is; 
 
 CENT 
 
 Z'-.-CENT 
 
 3HI> 
 
 CENT 
 
 10 
 
 u 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 l« 
 
 AAA. 
 
 A& 
 
 <)i<i 
 
 AA 
 
 £l il 
 
 fiA 
 
 AA 
 
 >\A 
 
 (XA 
 
 R 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 S5 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 
 
 B & 
 
 B 
 
 ^ 
 
 r r 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 f 
 
 Tr 
 
 r 
 
 rr 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 AA 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 AA 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 ZV/i 
 
 e 
 
 ee 
 
 e e 
 
 e^ 
 
 £ e 
 
 e e 
 
 e e 
 
 e 
 
 <^^ 
 
 z 
 
 X 
 
 zz 
 
 z 
 
 ■2 
 
 2 z 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 z. 
 
 hH 
 
 H 
 
 n/1 
 
 H 
 
 n 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 && 
 
 fle 
 
 e 
 
 a- 
 
 ee- 
 
 0- 
 
 & 
 
 e 
 
 ^ 
 
 li 
 
 ) 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 ti 
 
 I 
 
 KJi 
 
 KJ< 
 
 KIC 
 
 kK 
 
 K 
 
 KK 
 
 K 
 
 K 
 
 KU. 
 
 X 
 
 XX 
 
 x\ 
 
 AX 
 
 A X 
 
 AX 
 
 AX 
 
 A 
 
 Xa 
 
 MjJi 
 
 MM 
 
 ^Xl 
 
 M 
 
 A.U 
 
 /W 
 
 ^ 
 
 AA 
 
 H 
 
 >J 
 
 H 
 
 )\ 
 
 M 
 
 NJ 
 
 Al 
 
 Ni 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 X 
 
 I 
 
 51 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 li 
 
 11 
 
 X 
 
 Hz 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nn 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 H 
 
 nrc 
 
 rr 
 
 n 
 
 !l 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 )" 
 
 ff 
 
 f 
 
 f 
 
 f 
 
 / 
 
 cr 
 
 cc 
 
 C (? 
 
 r r 
 
 cr 
 
 c c 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 rr 
 
 T 
 
 rr 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 rr 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 TT 
 
 ■^^ 
 
 TT 
 
 vr 
 
 rr 
 
 V 
 
 YY 
 
 Y 
 
 r 
 
 ^ 
 
 if 
 
 tf 
 
 tf 
 
 f 
 
 'f' 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 ff 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 A 
 
 X 
 
 X- 
 
 A 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 1- 
 
 f 
 
 t 
 
 r 
 
 t 
 
 f 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 f 
 
 Cw 
 
 O) LO 
 
 acu 
 
 tj L* 
 
 CV k) 
 
 
 Cu w- 
 
 CO 
 
 u o 
 
APPENDIX II 
 
 CATALOGUE OF LITEBARY PAPTEI 
 
 The following list was originally compiled independently, 
 but since its preparation a similar list has been published by 
 P. Couvreur in the Revue de PMlologie Ixx. 165), and another 
 by C. Haeberlin in the Centralllatt fur Bibliothekswesen (xiv. i, 
 2or, 263, 337, 389, 473), giving fuller details of the literature 
 relating to each MS. From these lists some references have 
 been taken ; but the magical papyri (the principal publications 
 of which are mentioned in App. Ill) and a few other non- 
 literary works included by Haeberlin are not given here. 
 The Oxyrhynchus papyri do not appear in either of the above- 
 mentioned lists. In the case of papyri not in the British 
 Museum, and of which no facsimile has been published, the 
 dates given are those assigned by their editors. Where none is 
 given, it will be understood that the editors have given none. 
 
 The following abbreviated references are used in this list : 
 
 Gat. of Additions = G3,ta\ogae of Additions to the Department of MSS., 
 
 British Museum (published every six years). 
 Cat. of Anc. Greek JfSS. = Catalogue of Ancient MSS. in the British 
 
 Museum ; part I, Greek. Edited by Thompson and Warner (1881). 
 Class. Texts — Classical Texts from Papyri in the British Museum ; 
 
 ed. Kenyon (1891). 
 
 F. or #w/j7-er = ruhrer duroh die Ausstellung der Papyrus Erzherzog 
 Eainer ; GreeJc section edited by Wessely (1894). 
 
 G. P. = Greek Papyri ; vol. i by Grenfell (1896), vol. ii by Grenfell and 
 Hunt (1897). 
 
 Mitth. or Miah. Erzh. ifamer =Mittheilungen aus der Sammlung der 
 Papyrus Erzherzog Eainer. 
 
 K 
 
I30 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Notices et Extraiis = 'Notices et Extraits des Manuserits de la Bibliothfeque 
 
 ImpSriale et autres Bibliothfeques, vol. xviii (1865). 
 0. P. =Oxyrhynchus Papyri ; ed. Grenfell and Hunt (part i, i8g8). 
 P. P. = Petrie Papyri ; ed. Mahaffy, two vols. (1891 and 1893). 
 PhU. ^n«ejg. =Philologisoher Anzeiger (separate publication of Philo- 
 
 logus) '. 
 Bev. de Phil. = Eevue de Philologie. 
 Rhein. Mus. = Eheiniscbes Museum. 
 
 ra/e!n = Tafeln zur alteren griechischen Palaograpbie; ed. Wilcken (1891). 
 Wien. SiM(2. = Wiener Studien. 
 Zeitschr.f. ag. SpmcAe = Zeitschrift fur agyptisehe Sprache. 
 
 AeseMnes, In Ctesiphontem, §§ 178-186. Fifth century. 
 
 Eainer Coll. Mentioned by Karabacek, Mitth. JSrzh. Bainer, 
 
 i. 51- 
 Aeschylus, Cari(ms{?); frag, ('fifteen lines). Before b. c. 161. 
 
 Did ot Papyrus. Weil, Monuments Grecs (1879), with facs. 
 — Myrmidons i^) ; frag, (eight lines). Before b.c. 161. Didot 
 
 Pap. Ed. Weil, with facs. 
 Alcidamas, Movo-eiov ; fragment. Third century b. c. Brit. 
 
 Mus. Pap. ccccxcix. Mahaffy, P. P. i. 25, with, facs. 
 
 Aleman, frag, of a lyric poem ; portions of three columns. 
 
 First century. Louvre Pap. 71. "Eggev, Memoir es d' Hist. 
 
 anc. et de Philol. 1863, p. 159 ; facs. in atlas to Notices et 
 
 Extraits, xviii., pi. 50. 
 Alcmau (?), seven hexameter lines, three being imperfect, in 
 
 Aeolo-Doric dialect. First or second century. Grenfell 
 
 and Hunt, 0. P. i. 8, with facs. 
 Apollonius, Homeric Lexicon ; fragment. Late first century. 
 
 Bodl. MS. Gr. class, e. 44 (P). Facs. by Nicholson. 
 
 Apollonius Ehodius; fragment. Eainer Coll. Mentioned 
 in Phil. Anzeig. xv. 650. 
 
 ' A number of literary fragments among the Kainer papyri are briefly 
 mentioned in various short notices in the Philologischer Anzeiger for 1884-6 ; 
 but it has seemed best not to include these, except vfhen they are fairly 
 explicit. It is possible that mistakes were made in the first identifications, 
 and until fuller details are published these fragments cannot be considered 
 available for practical purposes. 
 
APPENDIX II 131 
 
 Aratus, Phaenomena ; two fragments, in book form. Berl. 
 Pap. Blass, Zeitschr. f. ag. SpracJie, 1880. 
 
 Aristophanes, Birds logy-ioSi, 1101-1127, Louvre Pap. 
 Weil, Bev. de Phil. 1882. 
 
 Aristotle : — 
 
 'A6rjvaLu>v IIoXtTeta. End of first century. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 cxxxi verso. Ed. Kenyon, 1891, with facs. ; subsequent 
 editions by Ferrini, Kaibel and Wilamowitz, Herwerden 
 and van Leeuwen, Blass, Sandys. 
 
 'AOrjvaimv lioXireCa, two fragg., in book foi;m. Fourth cen- 
 tury (?). Berl. Pap. 5009. Blass, Bhein. Mus. 1880; 
 Dials, Abh. d. Berl. Akad. 1885, with hand-made facs. 
 
 Post. Analytics, i. 7iBig — 72A38;in book form. Seventh 
 century (?). Berl. Pap. 166. Landwehr, PMlologus, xliv. 21 
 (1885). 
 
 Aristoxenus (?), pvOfuKo. o-roixeta, portions of five columns. 
 Third century. Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 9, with partial 
 facs. 
 
 Baeehylides, Odes ; incomplete. First century b. c. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. Dccxxxiii. Ed. Kenyon (1897), vrith facs. ; sub- 
 sequent editions by Blass and Jurenka (1898). 
 
 Basil, -E^. V. 77 E, vi. 79 b, ccxciii. 432 b, cl. 239 c, 
 ii. 72 A. Fifth century (?). Berl. Pap. Blass, Zeitschr. 
 f. ag. Sprache, 1880; Landwehr, PMlologus, 1884 (with a 
 facsimile). 
 
 Bible :— 
 
 Psalms xii. 7 — xv. 4. Late third century. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 ccxxx, Athenceum, Sept. 8, 1894, with facs. 
 
 — xi. 2 — xix. 6, xxi. 14 — xxxv. 6, in book form. Seventh 
 century. Brit. Mus. Pap. xxxvii. Tischendorf, Mon. Sac. 
 Ined., nov, coll. i. 217; specimen facs. in Cat. of Anc. 
 Greek MSS. 
 
 xl. 16 — xli. 4, in book form. Berl. Pap. Blass, Zeitschr. 
 
 f. cig. Sprache, i88i. 
 
 K 2 
 
132 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Bible 
 
 Song of Solomon i. 6-9, in book form. Seventh or eighth 
 century. Bodl. MS. Gr. Bibl. g. i (P). Grenfell, G. P. 
 i. 7- 
 
 Isaiah xxxviii. 3-5, 13-16. Third century. Eainer Pap. 
 8024 {Fuhrer, 536). 
 
 Eeehiel v. 12 — vi. 3, in book form. Late third century. 
 Hexaplar symbols. Bodl. MS. Gr. Bibl. d. 4 (P). Grenfell, 
 a. P. i. 5. 
 
 Zechariah iv — Malachi ?, in book form. Seventh century (?). 
 Graf papyrus. Hechler, Times, Sept. 7, 1892, with speci- 
 men facs. 
 
 Matthew i. 1-9, 12, 14-20. One leaf of a book. Third 
 century. Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 2, with facsimile. 
 
 — XV. 12-16, fragment, Greek and Coptic, in book form. 
 Sixth century. Eainer Coll. Mentioned by Gregory in 
 Tischendorf's Novum Testamentum Graece iii. 450 (1884). 
 
 — xviii, fragment, in book form (?). Eainer Coll. Fourth or 
 fifth century. Mentioned by Gregory, ib. 
 
 MarJc XV. 29-38, in book form (?\ Fourth century. Eainer 
 
 Coll. Mentioned by Gregory, ib. 
 LuJce V. 30 — vi. 4, in book form (attached to MS. of Philo, 
 
 vid.infr.). Fourth century. Paris, Bibl. Nat. &ohei[,Mdm. 
 
 de la Mission Arch. Frangaise au Caire, tom. 9 (1893), with 
 
 facs. 
 
 — vii. 36-43, X. 38-42, in book form. Sixth century. 
 Eainer Pap. 8021 (F. 539). 
 
 Johni. 29, in book form (?). Seventh century. Eainer Coll. 
 Mentioned by Gregory, ubi supra. 
 
 I Corinthians i. 17-20, vi. 13-18, vii. 3, 4, 10-14, imperfect, 
 in book form. Fifth century (?). At Kiew, Uspensky 
 Coll. Gregory, qp. eit. iii. 344. 
 
 — i. 25-27, ii. 6-8, iii. 8-10, 20, in book form. Fifth cen- 
 tury. At SinaL Eendel Harris, Biblical fragments from 
 Mt. Sinai {i8go). 
 
APPENDIX II 133 
 
 Bible (fiontinued^ ■ — 
 
 Vneanonical Gospel ; very small frag., parts of seven lines. 
 
 Third century (?), Eainer Coll. Bickell, Mitth. Ereh. 
 
 Bainer, i. 52 (1887), with facs. 
 Logia lesu ; one leaf of a book. Third century. Egypt 
 
 Exploration Fund. Ed. Grenfell and Hunt (1897), with 
 
 facs. ; also in 0. P. i. i . 
 Chronological Treatise; fragment, portions of six columns, 
 
 covering b. c. 355-315. Third century. Grenfell and 
 
 Hunt, 0. P. i. 12. 
 Cyril of Alexandria, De Adoratione, p. 242 e — 250 d, with 
 
 lacunas, 286 b, in book form. Sixth or seventh century. 
 
 Dublin Pap. Bernard, Boyal Irish Acad. xxix. pt. 18, with 
 
 partial facs. 
 Demetrius ; , philosophical works among Herculaneum papyri. 
 
 First century b. c. See Scott, Fragmenta Herculanensia. 
 
 Demosthenes : — 
 
 In Aristocratem, lexicon to ; fragment. Fifth century (?). 
 Berl. Pap. Blass, B^ermes, xvii. 148. 
 
 Be Corona, p. 308, small fragment. Third century, Grenfell 
 and Hunt, 0. P. i. 25, with facs. 
 
 Epistle III, wanting end. First century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 cxxxiii. Kenyon, Class. Texts, p. 56, with specimen facs. 
 
 De Falsa Legatione, § 10, imperfect. First or second century. 
 Bodl. MS. Gr. class, f. 46 (P). Grenfell and Hunt, 
 G. P. ii. 9. 
 
 Contra Leptinem, §§ 84-91, with lacunas. First or second 
 century. Berl. Pap. 5879. Wilcken, Tafelrn, i. 
 
 In Meidiam, §§ 41, 42. Fourth or fifth century. In 
 possession of Mr. F. Cope Whitehouse. Proceedings of 
 Society of Biblical Archaeology, xv. 86, with facs. 
 
 In Meidiam : hypothesis and part of commentary. Late 
 first century. Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxxi verso. Kenyon, 
 'A$rjv(uu)v TloXiTela ed. 3, appendix i, with facs. 
 
 In Meidiam, lexicon to : fragment. Eainer Coll. Men- 
 tioned by Karabacek, Mitth. Erzh. Bainer, i, 51 {1886). 
 
134 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Demosthenes {continued) : — 
 
 Olynthiacs II, fragments from §§ lo, 15. First-second 
 century. In library of Eossall School. Kenyon, Class. 
 Rev. vi. 430 ; facs. above, pi. XVI. 
 
 Third Philippic, fragment. Egypt Exploration Fund. Hogarth 
 and Grenfell, E. E. F. Archaeological Report, 1895-6, p. 17. 
 
 Contra Phormionem, §§ 5-7, imperfect. Second century. Bodl. 
 MS. Gr. class, f. 47 (P). Grenfell and Hunt, G. P. ii. 10. 
 
 TLpooifua Ar;fj,7]yopLKd, §§ 26-29, parts of seven columns. First 
 or second century. Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 26, with 
 facs. 
 
 Dialectical Treatise, With quotations from Hoiner, Sappho, 
 Alcman, Anacreon, Ibycus, Thespis, Timotheus, Euripides, 
 &c. : fourteen columns, imperfect. Before b. c. 160. Louvre 
 Pap. 2. Letronne, Notices et Extraits, xviii. 77, with facs. 
 in atlas, pi. xi. 
 
 Dioseorides ; ten fragments in a chemical papyrus. Leyden 
 Pap. X. Leemans, Cat. of Leyden Papyri, ii. 205. 
 
 Drama : — 
 
 Anonymous : fragment, apparently of an ' Iphigenia,' begin- 
 nings of seventeen lines. Third century B.C. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. ccccLxxxvi h. Mahaffy, P. P. i. 3 (2), with facs. 
 
 — parts of eighteen lines, apparently comedy. Third 
 century b. 0. Brit. Mus. Pap. occclxxxvii a. lb. i. 4 (i), 
 with facs. 
 
 — parts of twenty-eight lines, apparently tragedy. Third 
 century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. occclxxxvii h. lb. i. 4 (2), 
 with facs. 
 
 — parts of twenty lines. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. Dxc. Mahaffy, P. P. ii. 49 c. 
 
 — two small fragments. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. Dxci a. lb. ii. 49 d. 
 
 — two small fragments. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 DCLXxxviii a. Grenfell and Hunt, G. P. ii. i a, with facs. 
 
APPENDIX II 135 
 
 Drama {continued) : — 
 
 Anonymous: very small fragment. Third century b. c. 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. dclxxxviii 6. Ih. ii. i h, with facs. 
 
 — four fragments. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 Dcxc. lb. ii. 6 a. 
 
 — fragment. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. dcxci a. 
 lb. ii. 6 b. 
 
 — two small fragments. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. DCXCI 6. Ih. ii. 6 c, with facs, 
 
 — two small fragments. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. Dcxciv. lb. ii. 8 b. 
 
 — fragment, fourteen lines. Before b. c. 161. Pap. Didot. 
 Weil, Monuments Grecs, with facs. 
 
 — fragment of comedy, parts of fifty lines. First or second 
 century. Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 11. 
 
 — fragment. Second century. Brit. Mus. Pap. cccclxxxiv d. 
 Unpublished. 
 
 — fragment of comedy, twenty lines, nine nearly perfect. 
 Second or third century. Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 10. 
 
 — parts of three or four columns, on subject of Jason. 
 Second or third century. Brit. Mus. Pap. clxxxvi verso. 
 Cat. of Additions, 1894. 
 
 — fragment. Late third century. Brit. Mus. Pap. dcxov a. 
 Grenfell and Hunt, 6r. P. ii. 12, with facs. 
 
 — fragment, ten lines. Berl. Pap. Blass, Zeitschr. f. dg. 
 Sprache, 1881. 
 
 Elegiac Poetry : — 
 
 Anonymous : fragment, parts of twenty-four lines. Third cen- 
 tury b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. dlxxxix. Mahaffy, P.P.ii. 49 a. 
 
 fragment, parts of eighteen lines. Second century. 
 
 Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 14- 
 
 Epic Poetry : — 
 
 Anonymous : two small fragments. Third century b. c. 
 Bodl. MS. Gr. class, f. 45 (P)- Grenfell and Hunt, G. P. ii. 5- 
 
136 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Epic Poetry {continued) :-^ 
 Anonymous : fragment. Second century. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 ccccLxxxiv e. Unpublished. 
 
 — considerable fragments. Second-third' century. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. coLxxiii. Cat. of Additions, 1894, 
 
 — fragment, fifty-four lines. Fourth century (?). At Lim- 
 erick (?). Bp. Graves, Hermatheiia, 1885, with facs. 
 
 — quotation, four lines. Fourth-fifth century. Paris, Bibl. 
 Nat. Wilcken, Sitzimgsberichte der Berl. Ahad., 1887. 
 
 — two fragments, on subject of Phineus. Eainer Coll. 
 Mentioned in Phil. Aneeig. xiv. 477. 
 
 — fragment, in book form. Fourth century. Berl. Pap. 
 5003. Stern, Zeitschr. f. ag. Sprache, i88i ; facs. in 
 Wilcken, Tafeln, v. 
 
 Epicharmus ; fragment, parts of four lines, from an antho- 
 logy. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. occolxxxvi a. 
 Mahaffy, P. P. i. 3 (i), with facs. 
 
 — 'OSvarcrev's avTOfioXo^, fragment, ten lines with commentary. 
 First or second century. Eainer Pap. 8023 (F. 537,withfacs.). 
 
 Epicurus, various works among Herculaneum papyri. First 
 century b. 0. Cf. Scott, Fragmenta Herculanensia. 
 
 Epigram, anonymous, on conquest of Egypt by Augustus. 
 Early first century. Brit. Mus. Pap, oolvi (2). Cat. of 
 Additions, 1894 ; Eev. de Phil xix. 177. 
 
 Epigrams ; collection by unknown authors, fragment. Third 
 century b. 0. Bodl. MS. Gr. class, e. 33 (P). Mahaffy, 
 P. P. a. 49 &, with facs. 
 
 — fragment of a collection. Third century. Grenfell and 
 Hunt, 0. P. i. 15. 
 
 Euclid, ii. 5. Third or fourth century. Grenfell and Hunt 
 O.P. i. 29. ' 
 
 Eudoxus, astronomical treatise. Early second century b. c. 
 Louvre Pap. i. Brunet de Presle, Notices et ExtraHs, xviii. 
 25, with facs. in atlas, pi. i-x. 
 
APPENDIX II 137 
 
 Euripides : — 
 
 .4 Mfiqpe, fragment from end of play, 123 lines. Third cen- 
 tury B. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. cccclxxxv. Mahaffy, P. P. i. i, 
 with facs. 
 
 ■ — parts of three lines from an anthology. Third century 
 B. c. Brit. Mus.. Pap. cccclxxxvi a, Mahaffy, P. P. i. 
 3(1), with facs. 
 
 Medea, 11. 5-12. Before b. c. 161. Pap. Didot. Weil, 
 Monuments Grecs, with facs. 
 
 Orestes, 11. 339-343, with musical notes. Giro. a. d. i. 
 Eainer Pap. 8029 (P. 531, with facs.). Wessely, Mitth. 
 V. 65. 
 
 — 11. 1062-iogo. Cire. second century. Geneva Pap. 
 Nicole, Rev. de Phil. xix. 105. 
 
 [Euripides], Bhesus, 11. 48-96, in book form. Fourth-fifth cen- 
 tury. Paris, Bibl. Kat. WUcken, Sitzwngs'b. d. Berl. AJcad. 
 1887. 
 
 Euripides, Temenides (?), forty-four lines. Before b. c. 161. 
 Pap. Didot. WeU, Monuments Grecs, with facs. 
 
 Grammarian, anonymous ; fragment. First century. Eainer 
 Coll. Mentioned by Karabacek, Mitth. i. 51. 
 
 Gregory of Nyssa, Life of Moses ; extracts. Fifth centmry (?). 
 Berl. Pap. Blass, Zeitschr. f dg. Sprache, 1880. 
 
 Hermas, Pastor, Mand. xi. 9, with an additional passage. 
 Third-fourth century. Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 5 
 (c/. V. Bartlet, Athenceum, Oct. 8, 1898). 
 
 — Sim. iL 7-10, iv. 2-5. Third century. Berl. Pap. 5513. 
 Wilcken, Tafeln, iii, Diels and Harnack, Sitswngsb. d. Berl. 
 Ahad. 1891. 
 
 Herodas, Mimes ; incomplete. First-second century. Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. cxxxv. Kenyon, Glass. Texts, with specimen 
 facs. ; complete facs. in separate vol. Later editions by 
 Butherford, BUcheler, Crusius, Meister. 
 
138 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Herodotus : — 
 
 i. 76. Second or third century. Grenfeil and Hunt, 0. P. 
 i. 19 verso, 
 
 — 105-6. Third century. Grrenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 18. 
 
 Hesiod : — 
 
 WorJcs and Bays, 11. 111-118, 153-161, 174-182, 210-221, 
 with four additional verses; in book form. Fifth century. 
 Geneva Pap. Mcole, Mcvl de Phil. xii. 113. 
 
 — 11. 251-266, 283-296, 313-329, 346-361, 686-709,718- 
 740, 748-812, 817-828.; Shield of Heracles, 11. 5-30, 
 434^440, 465-470 ; in book form. Circ. a. d. 400. 
 Eainer Coll. W«ssely, Mitth. i. 73. 
 
 Theogonia, 11. 75-145, in book form. Fourth-fifth century. 
 Paris, Bibl. Nat. Wilcken, Sitzungsb. d. Bed. Ahad., 1887. 
 
 — 11. 210-238,260-270. Fourth-fifth century. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. cLix. Kenyon, Rev. dePhil. xvi. 181. 
 
 Hesiod (?), Eoeae (?) ; portions of six lines. Third century 
 B. o. Brit. Mus. Pap. cccctxxxvi c. Mahaffy, P. P. i. 
 3 (3), with facs. 
 
 History : — 
 
 Anonymous, fragments of collection of vofj-Lfm /Sap^apiKa. 
 Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. cocclxxxix. Mahafify, 
 P. P. i. 9-, with facs. 
 
 — ■ on Spartan training (■? a AaKc8ai/ioi/t<o]/ IIoXiTeta) ; fragment. 
 Second century. Brit. Mus. Pap. clxxxvii. Kenyon, 
 Rev. de Phil. xxi. i. 
 
 Homer : — 
 
 Hiad i. 37-54, 65-67, 207-22*5 ; on the verso of accounts. 
 Third oen!tury (?). Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxix. Kenyon, 
 Class. Texts, .p. 80. 
 
 — i. 44-60. Ojrc. second 'Century (?). Geneva Pap. Nicole, 
 Rev. de Phil, xviii. 103. 
 
 — i. 129-150. Second century. Brit, Mus. Pap. ccLxxir. 
 Cat. of Additions, 1894. 
 
APPENDIX II 139 
 
 Homer (continued) : — 
 
 Iliad i. 273-362. Second century. Gizeh Museum (from 
 Egypt Exploration Fund). Unpublished (c/. Hogarth and 
 Grenfell, U. E. F. Archaeological Report, 1895-6, p. 16). 
 
 — i. 298-333. First or second century. Bodl. MS. Gr. 
 class, e. 58 (f). Unpublished. 
 
 — i. 506, 507; ii. 1-6, 45-49> m-nS, i55-i57> 200-205, 
 223-228, 245-252, 289-292, 331-337, 345-382, 391-404, 
 411-422, 433-446, 454-470, 472-486, 488-492, 494-510, 
 516-531, 538-560, 562-598, 601-621, 624-686, 692-731, 
 735-753, 755-841, 843-877; with few scholia and 
 Aristarchean symbols. Second century. Bodl. MS. Gr. 
 class, a. I (P). Petrie, Hawara, p. 24 ; ■specimen facs. 
 there and above, pi. XX. 
 
 — fragments of Iliad i, ii, iv, viii, xi, xvii. EainerColl. 
 Mentioned in Phil. Angeig. xvi> 414, 477. 
 
 — ii. 1 01 — iv. 40 (omitting ii. 494-877), in book form. 
 Third century. Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxvi. Kenyon, Class. 
 Texts, p. 81, with specimen f«,cs. 
 
 — ii. 730-828, with an additional line after 1. 798. Second 
 century. Grenfell and Hunt, O. P. i. 20, with pa-rtial facs. 
 
 — ii. 745-764, First or second «entury. Grenfell and 
 Hunt, O.P.I 21. 
 
 — iii. 317-337, 342-372; iv. 1-28, 56-69, 74-79, iii-'So, 
 159-192, 198-201, 208-245, 256-293, 303-3451 352-544; 
 on the verso of tax-register. Late first century. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. cxxxvi. Kenyon, Class. Texts, p. 93, with specimen 
 facs. 
 
 — iv. 82-95. First-second -century (■?). G^ievaPa,p. Nicole, 
 Bev. de Phil, xviii. 103.. 
 
 — iv. 1 09-1 13. Third centu-iy B.C. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 DCLxxxix b. Grenfell aaid Hunt, 6f. P. ii. 3, with facs. 
 
 — iv. 191-219., omitting I96, 197, 215. Gizeh Museum. 
 Sayce, Academy, May 12, 1894. 
 
 — V. 731-734, 815-818, 846-850. Second century (?). 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxvii (i). Kenyon, Class. Texts, p. 98. 
 
I40 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Homer {continued) : — 
 
 Iliad vi. 1-39. First-second century. Louvre Pap. 3*^1. 
 Longp6rier, Notices et Extraits, xviii. izo, with facs. in 
 atlas, pi. xlix. 
 
 — vi: 90-100, 1 19-125. Second century (?). Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. cxxvii (2). Kenyon, Class. Texts, p. 98. 
 
 — vi. 327-353 ; on verso of business document. First- 
 second century (?). Geneva Pap. Nicole, Bev. de Phil. 
 xviii. 104. 
 
 — viii. 64-75, 96-116. First or second century. Bodl. 
 MS. Gr. class, d. 20 (P). Grenfell, G. P. i. 2. 
 
 — viii, a fragment. Second century b. c. Egypt- Exploration 
 Fund. Hogarth and Grenfell, K U. F. Archaeological 
 Report, 1895-6, p. 17., 
 
 — viii. 217-219 (?),. 249-253,, with two additional lines. 
 Third century b. c, Brit. Mus. Pap. bclxxxix a. Grenfell 
 and Hunt, G-. P. ii. 2. 
 
 — viii. 433-447. Berl. Mus. Pap. 6845. Verzeichniss der 
 dgypt. Altert. p. 370. 
 
 — xi. 502-537, with five additional lines. Third century b. c. 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. cccclxxxvi A Mahaffy, P. P. i. 3 (4), 
 with facs. 
 
 — xi. 788— xii. 9, with thirteen additional lines. Second 
 century b. o. Geneva Pap. Nicole, Rev. de PMl. xviii. 
 104: facs. inSitzungsb. d. Berl. Ahad. 1894. 
 
 — xii. 178-198. Third century. Bodl. MS. Gr. class, e. 
 21 (P). Grenfell, G. P. i. 4. 
 
 — xiii. 26-47, 107-111, 149-173. First or second century. 
 Louvre Pap. 3. Brunet de Presle, Notices et Extraits, 
 xviii. 109, with facs. in atlas, pi. xii. 
 
 — xiiL 143-150. Second century. Vatican Pap.; part of 
 same MS. as the preceding. Comptes-rendus de VAcad. 
 des Inscr. 1893. 
 
APPENDIX II 141 
 
 Homer {continued) : — 
 
 Hiadx^. i-io, 38-50, 73-87, 149-437, 456-653, 658-674, 
 740-747 ; xiv. 120-293, 322-394, 397-522, First century. 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. dccxxxii. Hunt, Journal of Philology, 
 xxvi. 25. 
 
 — xvii. 102-115, 142-152. Second century. Eainer Pap. 
 8027 (F. 533). 
 
 — xviii. 1-2 1 8, 3 1 1-6 1 7. First century. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 cvii. Thompson and Warner, Cat. of Anc. MSS. ; facs. 
 in Pal. Soc. ii. 64. 
 
 — xviii. 1-22, 29-33, 77-92, 98-121, 125-136, 152-161, 
 168-175, 227-230, 273-275, 279-288, 320-349, 359-371, 
 387-394, 398-410, 412-425, 442-450, 455-465, 467-477, 
 479-492, 501-518, 534-543, 563-575, 578-617. Second 
 century (?). Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxvii (3). Kenyon, Class. 
 Texts, p. 98. 
 
 — xviii. 475-499, 518-535, 544-561. Second century. 
 Louvre Pap. 3^'^. Longperier, Notices et Extraits, xviii. 
 114, with facs. in atlas, pi. xlix. 
 
 — XX. 36-110. Second century. Gizeh Museum (from 
 Egypt Exploration Fund). Unpublished {cf. Hogarth 
 and Grenfell, E. E. F. Archaeological Eeport, 1895-6, p. 17). 
 
 — xxi. 387-399, 607-611; xxii. 33-38, 48-55, 133-135, 
 151-155, 160-262, 340-344; xxiii. 159-166, 195-200, 
 224-229 ; with additional lines. Third century b. c. 
 Bodl. MS. Gr. class, b. 3 (P). Grenfell and Hunt, G. P. 
 ii. 4, with specimen facs. 
 
 — xxi. 544-609 ; xxii. 390-435. Berl. Pap. Blass, Zeitschr. 
 f. ag. Sprache, 1880. 
 
 — xxiii. 1-79, 402-633, 638-897 ; xxiv. 1-83, 100-144, 
 150-243, 248-282, 337-341, 344-351, 382-387, 402-479, 
 490-520, 536-548, 559-579, 596-611, 631-657, 671-729, 
 ^gY-743, 754-759 ; with a few scholia and Aristarchean 
 symbols. First century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxvm. 
 Kenyon, Glass. Tends, p. loo, with specimen facs., and 
 Journal of Philology, xxi. 296. 
 
143 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Homer {continued) : — 
 
 J7mdxxiv. 127-804. Second century. Brit. Mus. Pap. cxiv. 
 Thompson and Warner, Cat. of Am. MS8., with facs. 
 
 Odyssey iii. 267-278, 283-294, 319-336, 352-366, 389-497, 
 with scholia. Early first century. Brit. Mus. Pap. cclxxi, 
 with some small fragments in Eainer Coll. Kenyon, 
 Journal of Philology, xxii ; specimen facs. in Pal. Soc. ii. 
 182 ; Wessely, Mitth. vi. i, with hand-made facs. of 
 Vienna fragments. 
 
 — iii. 364-375, 384-402. Geneva Pap. Nicole, Eev. de 
 Phil, xviii. loi. 
 
 — V. 346-3S3. Third century. Bodl. MS. Gr. class, g. 
 7 (P). Grenfell, G. P. i. 3. 
 
 — xiv. 15-24, 36-60, 71-86, 374-376, 378-381, 407-409, 
 430-441. Berl. Pap. 154 a. Landwehr, PMoZo^MS, xliv. 
 685. 
 
 — XV, fragment. Gizeh Museum. Sayce, Academy, May 1 2, 
 1894. 
 
 Homer : Lexicon to Hiad i ; fragment. Fifth century. Berl. 
 
 Pap. Wilcken, Sitmngsb. d. Berl. ATtad. 1887. 
 Homer : Commentary and paraphrase to Hiad i ; fragment. 
 
 Third-fourth century. Paris, Bibl. Nat. Wilcken, ib. 
 
 Homer : Paraphrase of Iliad iv ; fragment. Eainer Pap. 
 Mentioned in Phil. Anzeig. xiv. 44. 
 See also s. v. ApoUonius. 
 
 Hyperides : — 
 
 In Athenogenem ; imperfect. Second century b. c. Louvre 
 Pap. Ed. Eevillout, with facs. ; subsequent editions 
 by Weil, Herwerden, Blass, Kenyon, Vogt. 
 
 In Demosthenem, fragments ; Pro Lycophrone, imperfect ; 
 Pro Euxenippo. Late first century. Brit. Mus. Papp. 
 cviir, cxv (with fragments in Paris and at Eossall School). 
 Ed. Babington, with hand-made facs. ; other editions by 
 Sauppe, Boeckh, Schneidewin, Caesar, Cobet, Linder, 
 Comparetti, Blass. 
 
APPENDIX II 143 
 
 Hyperides {continued) : — 
 
 Funeral Oration, imperfect. Second century. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. xcviii verso. Ed. Babington, with hand-made facs. ; 
 subsequent editions by Sauppe, Kayser, Tell, Cobet, 
 Comparetti, Dehfeque, Caffiaux, Blass. 
 
 In Philippidem, imperfect. First century b. c. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. cxxxiv. Ed. Kenyon, Class. Tends, with specimen facs. ; 
 subsequent editions by Weil, Herwerden, Blass, Kenyon. 
 
 Isocrates : 
 
 De Antidosi, §§ 83, 87, small fragment. First or second 
 century. Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 27. 
 
 Contra Nicoclem, §§ 1-30. Third century. Marseilles Pap. 
 Schoene, Melanges Graux, 481, with specimen facs. 
 
 — §§ 2-4, fragment. Fourth century. Eainer Pap. 8029 
 (F. 532). Wessely, Mitth. iv. 136 (1888). 
 
 De Pace, §§ 1-6 1 fragmentary, rest nearly perfect. First- 
 second century. Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxxii. Kenyon, Class. 
 Texts, p. 63, with specimen facs. 
 
 Philippus, §§ 1 1 4-1 1 7. First-second century. Eainer Pap. 
 Wessely, Mitth. ii. 74 (1887). 
 
 Isocrates : criticism of the Evagoras, anonymous. First- 
 second century. Eainer Pap. Wessely, Mitth. ii. 79 
 (1887). 
 
 Literary Criticism : — 
 
 Anonymous, on the names of the gods ; fragment. Second- 
 third century. Berl. Pap. 1970. Wilcken, Tafeln, ii. 
 
 — life of Aesop. One leaf of a book. Sixth century (?). 
 At St. Petersburg. Weil, Bev. de Phil. ix. 1 9. 
 
 Lives of Saints, anonymous ; lives of SS. Abraham and 
 Theodora, fragments. Louvre Papp. 7404-8 bis. Wessely, 
 Wien. Stud. 1889. 
 
 Lyric Poetry : — 
 
 Anonymous ; two small fragments. Third century b. c. 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. dcxciii. Grenfell and Hunt, G. P. ii. 8 a. 
 
144 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Lyric Poetry (continued) : — 
 
 Anonymous ; fragment of imviKLov, twenty lines. Louvre 
 Pap. Egger, Comptes-rendus de I'Acad. des Inscr. 1877. 
 
 — portions of three columns. Second century. Egypt 
 Exploration Fund. Hogarth and Grrenfell, K E. F. 
 Archaeological Beport, 1895-6, p. 16. 
 
 Mathematics, anonymous ; fragment on mensuration of land. 
 First century. Ayer Papyrus. E. J. Goodspeed, Ameri- 
 can Journal of Philology, xix. 25, with facs. 
 
 Medicine : — 
 
 Anonymous ; treatise on diseases, with extracts from Menon's 
 latrica. First-second century. Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxxvii. 
 Ed. Diels, Supjplementum Aristotelicum, iii. i, with speci- 
 men facs. (1893). 
 
 — fragment, on dentistry &e. First-second century. Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. CLV. Cat. of Additions, 1894. 
 
 Menander, rccopyo'?, portions of one leaf, about eighty lines. 
 
 Fourth-fifth century {?). Ed. Nicole (1897), Grenfell 
 
 and Hunt (1898). 
 Mime, anonymous, in rhythmical prose or lyrical verse ; 
 
 imperfect. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. dov 
 
 verso. Grenfell, G. P. i. i, with facs. 
 Oratory : — 
 
 Anonymous ; fragment. First century. In Paris (?). 
 
 Egger, M6m. d'liist. anc. 175 (1863). 
 
 — remains of three rhetorical exercises, mutilated. Late 
 first century. Brit. Mus. Pap. cclvi verso. Cat. of 
 Additions, 1894; Kenyon, Melanges Weil, p. 243 (1898). 
 
 • — two columns of a private oration. Second century. 
 Egypt Exploration Fund. Hogarth and Grenfell, E. E. F. 
 Archaeological Beport, 1895-6, p. 16. 
 
 — fragments. In Paris (?). Late first or second century. 
 Egger, Mem. de I'Acad. des Inscr. xxvi (1870), with facs. 
 
 Pherecydes, n£i/Te/*vxos : fragment. Third century. Bodl. 
 MS. Gr. class, f. 48 (P). Grenfell and Hunt, G. P. ii. 11, 
 with facs. 
 
APPENDIX II 145 
 
 Philo, Tts o T&v Oeiuiv KXrjpov6fji.o^ and Trepl yevicrem^ ''AyScX : in book 
 
 form. Sixth century (? third). Grizeh Museum. Ed. 
 ScheU, Mem. de la Mission Arch. Frangaise au Caire, tom. 
 9 (1893), with specimen facs. 
 Philodemus, various works among Herculaneum papyri. Cf. 
 Scott, Fragmenta Herculanensia. 
 
 Philosophy : — 
 
 Anonymous ; fragment. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. Doxoii. Grenfell and Hunt, G-. P. ii. 7 a. 
 
 — five small fragments. Third century b. c. Bodl. MS. 
 Gr. class, e. 63 (P). lb. 7 6. 
 
 — fragment. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. dxci 6. 
 Mahaffy, P. P. ii. 49 e. 
 
 — several rolls among Herculaneum papyri. First cen- 
 tury B. c. Cf. Scott, Fragmenta Herculanensia. 
 
 — several fragments of a treatise, apparently philosophical, 
 on verso of land-register. Second century. Brit. Mus. 
 Pap. Dccxxxiv. 
 
 — life of the philosopher Secundus. Second century (?). At 
 St. Petersburg. Tischendorf, Notitia Editionis Codicis 
 Sinaitici, p. 69 (i860). 
 
 — fragment on ethics. Second or third century. Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. CLXXxiv. Cat. of Additions, 1894. 
 
 — considerable fragments on ethics. Third century (?). 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. colxxv. Ibid. 
 
 — (? Aristotle), fragment on aesthetics. Eainer Coll. Men- 
 tioned in Phil. Ameig. xiv. 414; cf. Gomperz, Mitth. 
 i, 84 (1887). 
 
 Plato : — 
 
 Gorgias, parts of pp. 504 B-E, 505 A, in book form. Third 
 
 century. Eainer Coll. Wessely, Jlf«m. ii. 76 (1887). 
 
 Laches, small fragments of pp. 1 8 1 B-i 8 2 A. Second century. 
 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. clxxxvii verso. Cat. of Additions, 1894. 
 
 — pp. 190 B-192 A, with lacunas. Third century b. c. 
 Bodl. MS. Gr. class, d. 22, 23 (P). Mahaffy, P. P. ii. 50, 
 with facs. 
 
 L 
 
146 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Plato {continued) : — 
 
 Laws, ix. pp. 862-3. Third century (before a. d. 295). 
 
 Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 23, with facs. 
 Phaedo, pp. 67 E-69 A, 79 C-81 D, 82 A-84 B, with 
 
 lacunas. Third century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. cccclxxxviii. 
 
 Mahaffy, P. P. i. 5-8, with facs. 
 B&public, X. pp. 607-8. Third century. Grenfell and Hunt, 
 
 0. P. i. 24. 
 
 Political Treatise, fragment of letter to a king of Macedon 
 against the Thebans. Second or third century. Grenfell 
 and Hunt, 0. P. i. 13. 
 
 Posidippus, two epigrams. Before b. c. i6i. Pap. Didot. 
 Weil, Monuments Grecs, with facs. 
 
 Romance : — 
 
 Anonymous, on adventures of Heracles ; fragments. Third 
 century b. c. Brit. Mus. Pap. dxcii. Mahaffy, P. P. ii. 49/. 
 
 — on adventures of Ninus ; fragments. Circ. b. c. 50-A. d. 50. 
 Berl. Pap. 6926. Wiloken, Hermes, xxviii. 161 (1893). 
 
 — on Metiochus and Parthenope ; fragment. Second cen- 
 tury. Berl. Pap. 7927. Krebs, Hermes, xxx. 144 (1895). 
 
 — with narrative of shipwreck ; fragment, on verso of 
 accounts. First-second century. In Dublin (?). Mahaffy, 
 Rendiconti della B. Accad. dei Lincei, 1897, with facs. 
 
 — considerable fragments. Second century. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 ccLxxiv. Cat. of Additions, 1894. 
 
 Sappho (?; ; five fragmentary stanzas. Third century. Ee- 
 stored by Blass, ap. Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 7, with 
 facs. 
 
 Scazon Iambics, anonymous ; fragment. Third century (?). 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. clv verso. Cat. of Additions, 1894. 
 
 Science : — 
 
 Anonymous, on optics. Louvre Pap. 7733. Wessely, Wien. 
 Stud. xiii. 312 (1891). 
 
APPENDIX II 147 
 
 Science {continued) : — 
 
 Anonymous, chemical excerpts. Third-fourth century. 
 Leyden Pap. x. Leemans, Papyri Graeci Lugduni-Batmi, 
 ii. 199 (1885). 
 
 — on mathematics. Seventh century (?). Gizeh Museum. 
 Ed. Baillet, in Mem. de la Miss. Arch. Fr. au Caire, tom. 
 9 (1892), vpith facs. 
 
 — on astronomy ; fragment. Eainer Pap. Mentioned in 
 Phil. Anmg. xiv. 477 (1884). 
 
 Sophocles, Oed. Tyr. 375-385, 429-441, in book form. Fifth 
 century (?). Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. i. 22. 
 
 Theology : — 
 
 Anonymous ; fragment, sixteen lines. Sixth-seventh een 
 tury. Brit. Mus. Pap. cxiii. 12 a. Kenyon, Gat. of Papyri, 
 i. 224, with facs. (1893). 
 
 — fragment, thirty-two lines. Sixth-seventh century. Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. cxiii. 12 6. lb. p. 225, with facs. 
 
 — fragments, forty-six lines. Sixth-seventh century. Brit. 
 Mus. Pap. CXIII. 12 c. 76. p. 226, with facs. 
 
 — fragment, twenty-six lines. Sixth-seventh century. 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. CXIII. 13 a. Tib. p. 2 2 7, with facs. 
 
 — fragment. Sixth or seventh century. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 ccocLxii. Unpublished. 
 
 — fragment. Sixth or seventh century. Brit. Mus. Pap. 
 ccccLxiv. Unpublished. 
 
 — fragment. Berl. Pap. Blass, Zeitschr. f. ag. Sprache, 
 1881, 
 
 — fragment, on verso of papyrus. Fourth century. Gren- 
 feU and Hunt, 0. P. i. 4- 
 
 Thucydides : — 
 
 ii. 7, 8. Second or third century. Grenfell and Hunt, 0. P. 
 
 i. 17. 
 iv. 36-41. First- second century. Hunt, E. E. F. Archaeo- 
 logical Report, 1896-7, p. 13, and 0. P. i. 16, with partial 
 facs. 
 
 L % 
 
T48 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 Travels ; fragment of a description of Athens . Second century . 
 Petrie, Hawara, p. 28 (1889); cf. Wilcken, Berl. Phil. 
 WocJienschrift, Dec. 7, 1889. 
 
 Tryphon, Ti-xy-q ypafifLaTiKri, imperfect, in book form. Early 
 fourth century. Brit. Mus. Pap. cxxvi verso. Kenyon, 
 Class. Texts, with specimen facs. 
 
 Xenophon : — 
 
 Cyropaedia, v. 2. 3-3. 26, imperfect. Second century. Eaitier 
 Coll. Wessely, Mitth. vi. i (1897). 
 
 Hellenica, i. 2. 2-5. 8, imperfect. Third century. Eainer 
 Coll. Wessely, ib. vi. 17. 
 
 — ui. I, parts of three columns. Second century (?). 
 Grenfell and Hunt, O.P.i. 28. 
 
 Memorabilia, i. 3. 15, 4. 1-3. Third-fourth century. 
 Brit. Mus. Pap. dcxcv h. Grenfell and Hunt, G. P. ii. 13. 
 
APPENDIX III 
 
 THE PEINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OP NON-LITEBARY PAPYKI 
 
 (Arranged chronologically under the respective countries. 
 Isolated publications in periodicals are not included ; they 
 will mostly be found in Bermes, Phitdogus, and the Seme de 
 Philologie.) 
 
 I. Austria. 
 
 1. Pettretini (G-.), Papiri greco-egwi ed altri greet monumenti 
 
 dell' I. B. Museo di Corte {Vienna., 1826), with three plates. 
 
 2. Peyeon (A.), Papiri greco-egm di Zoide deW I. B. Museo 
 
 di Vienna, with two plates (Turin, 1828) ; a revision 
 of some of Pettretini's texts. 
 
 3. Wessely (K.), articles in Wiener Studien, iii-v, vii, xi 
 
 (Vienna, 1 881-1889). 
 
 4. Wessely (K.), articles in MittJieilungen aus der Sammlung 
 
 der Papyrus Erehersog Bainer (Vienna, 1887-1897). 
 
 5. Wessely (K.), Papyrus Ereherzog Bainer: Filhrer durch die 
 
 AussteUung (Vienna, 1894) ; edited by J. Karabacek, the 
 Greek section by Wessely, with nine facsimiles of Greek 
 papyri. 
 
 6. Wessely (K.), Corpus Papyrorum Baineri, voL i. Griechische 
 
 Texte (Vienna, 1895). 
 
 II. Feance. 
 
 7. Beunet de Peesle (W.), Notices et Textes des Papyrus Grecs 
 
 du Musee de Louvre et de la BiUiotheque Imperiale (in 
 Notices et Extraits des Manuscrits de la BiUiotheque Imperiale 
 et autres BiUiotheques, vol. xviii), with atlas of fifty-two 
 plates (1865). 
 
I50 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 8. Wessely (K.), Lettres a M. Eevillout (in Bevue Egyptologique, 
 
 1884). 
 
 9. Wessely (K.), article in Wiener Studien, viii (i886). 
 
 10. Wessely (K.), GriecMscJie Zauberpapyrus von Paris und 
 
 London {Benkschriften der Jcais. Alcademie der Wissen- 
 schaften, Vienna, 1888). 
 
 1 1 . Wessely (K.), Die Pariser Papyri des Fimdes von El-Faijum 
 
 {ib. 1889). 
 
 12. Wessely (K.), Zu den griechischen Papyri des Lowvre vnd 
 
 der BibliotMque Nationale (in Jahresbericht des Jc. Jc. 
 Staatsgymnasiums Hernals, two parts, Vienna, 1889, 
 1890). 
 
 13. WiTKowsKi (S.)> Prodromus grammaticae papyrorum Grae- 
 
 carum aetatis Lagidarum (Cracow, 1897) > includes 
 revision of no. 7. 
 
 III. Geeat Britain and Ieeland. 
 
 14. FoESHALL (J.), GreeJi Papyri in the British Museum (London, 
 
 1839)- 
 
 15. Peyeon (B.), Papiri Greci del Museo Britamnico di Londra 
 
 e della Bihliotheca Vaticama {Tuvin, 1841); Forshall's texts 
 re-edited with commentary. 
 
 16. Wessely (K.), articles in Wiener Studien, viii, ix, xii 
 
 (Vienna, 1886, 1887, 1890). 
 
 17. Wessely (K.), Griechische Zauherpapyrus von Paris wnd 
 
 London {Benkschriften der k. Akademie der Wissenschaften, 
 Vienna, 1888) ; = no. 10 above. 
 
 18. Wessely (K.), Neue Griechische Zauberpapyri {ib. 1893). 
 
 19. Mahaefy (J. p.), The Flinders Petrie Papyri; Part I, with 
 
 thirty plates (Dublin, 1891); Part II, with eighteen 
 plates (Dublin, 1893) ; appendix, with three plates 
 (Dublin, 1894). 
 
 20. Ken YON (F. G.), Greek Papyri in the British Museum, 
 
 Catalogue with Texts; vol. i, with atlas of 150 plates 
 (London, 1893) ; vol. ii, with atlas of 123 plates (London, 
 
APPENDIX III 151 
 
 21. Kenyon (F. G.), Catalogue of Additions to the Department of 
 
 Manuscripts in the British Museum, 1888-1893, pp. 
 390-450 (descriptions of papyri cxxi-ccoclviii in the 
 British Museum). 
 
 22. Geenpell (B. p.), Greeh Papyri from ApoUonopolis {Journal 
 
 of Philology, 1894). 
 
 23. Gbenfell (B. p.) and Mahafey (J. P.), Revenue Laws of 
 
 Ptolemy Philadelphus, with thirteen plates (Oxford, 1896). 
 
 24. Geeneell (B. p.), An Alexandriam, Erotic Fragment and 
 
 other GreeJc Papyri (Greek Papjrri I), with one plate 
 (Oxford, 1896). 
 
 25. Grenfell (B. P.) and Hunt (A. S), New Classical Fragments 
 
 and other Greek and Latin Papyri (Greek Papyri II), 
 with five plates (Oxford, 1897). 
 
 26. Geenfell (B. p.) and Hunt (A. S.), The Oxyrhynchus 
 
 Papyri, Part I, with eight plates (Egypt Exploration 
 Fund, London, 1898). 
 
 IV. Geemany. 
 
 2 7 . BoEOKH (A.), Frkldrwng einer agyptischen Urkunde auf Papyrus 
 (Abhandlungcn der Berl. Alcademie, Berlin, 1821). 
 
 28. Leteonne (J. A.), Catalogue des antiquites decouvertes en 
 
 EgypteparM. Passalacqua, with a facsimile (Paris, 1826). 
 
 29. Schmidt (W. A.), Die griechischen Papyrusurhumden der 
 
 JconiglicJien Bibliothek zu Berlin, with two facsimiles 
 (BerHn, 1842). 
 
 30. Paethey (G. F. C), Zauberpapyri {Alhandlungen der Mnigl. 
 
 Alcademie 0U Berlin, 1865). 
 
 31. Paethey (G. F. C), Die griechische Papyrusfragmente der 
 
 Leipsiger UniversitdtsUUiotheh {Sitzwngsherichtc der hmigl. 
 AMdemie zu Berlin, 1865). 
 
 32. Wessely (K.), Die griechischen Papyri Sachsens {Berichte der 
 
 Mnigl. Sachs. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, 1885). 
 
 33. Magieus (K.) and WiissELY (K.), Griechische Papyri im 
 
 agyptischen Museum in Berlin (in Wiener Siudien, Vienna, 
 1886). 
 
152 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GAEEK PAPYRI 
 
 34. WiLCKEN (U.), ArsinoitischeSteuerprofessionenundverwandte 
 
 UrJcimden, with four plates {Sitzungsberidlite der Mnigl. 
 AJcademie ^u Berlin, 1883). 
 
 35. WiLCKEN (U.), Actenstuche aus der Tioniglichen Bank zu Theben 
 
 in den Museen von Berlin, London, Paris {Abhandlungen 
 der Mnigl. AJcademie zu Berlin, 1886). 
 
 36. WiLCKEN (U.), articles in Hermes, xix, xx, xxi, xxii, xxiii, 
 
 xxvii, xxviii, xxLx, xxx (1884-1895), and Philologus, liii 
 (1894). 
 
 37. WiLCKEN (U.), Tafelm, zur dlteren griecJiischen Paldographie 
 
 (Leipzig and Berlin, 1891) ; twenty plates. 
 
 38. WiLCKEN (U.), Keebs (F.), and Viekeck (P.), Griechisclie 
 
 Urlcwnden aus den Museen in Berlin, vol. i, with three 
 facsimiles (1892-1895), vol. ii, with facs. of Latin papyrus 
 (189 5- 1898), vol. iii in progress. 
 
 V. Holland. 
 
 39. Eetjvens (C. J. C), Lettres a M. Letronne sur les Papyrus 
 
 lilimgues et grecs . . . du Musee d'Antiquites de I'Universite 
 de Leide (Leyden, 1830). 
 
 40. Leemans (0.), Pwpyri Graeci Musei Antiguarii PuUici 
 
 Lugduni-Batavi, vol. i, with six plates (1843); vol. ii, 
 with four plates (1885). 
 
 VI. Italy. 
 
 41. ScHow (N.), Charta papyraeea graece scrijpta Musei Borgiani 
 
 Velitris, with six plates (Eome, 1788). 
 
 42. Fueia (F. del), HlMstramone di un papiro Greco, che si 
 
 conserve presso il ch. sig. Imgi Lambruschini (in Furia's 
 Gollezione, vol. 17, Florence, 181 3). 
 
 43. Peyeon (A.), Papyri Graeci Regii Taurimnsis Musei Aegyptii, 
 
 with six plates (Turin, 1826). 
 
 44. Mai (A.), Auctores Classici, vol. iv. 445, v. 352, 356, 601, 
 
 602, 603 (Eome, 1831, 1832) ; texts of six papyri in the 
 Vatican. 
 
APPENDIX III 153 
 
 45. Peyron (B.), Papiri Greci .... della Bibliotlieca Yaticana 
 
 (Turin, 1841); = no. 15 above. The Vatican papyri are 
 four of those given by Mai, with commentary. 
 
 VII. SWITZEBLAND. 
 
 46. Nicole (J.), articles in Bevvs de Philologie, xvii, xx (1893, 
 
 iSg6), Heme ArcMologique, xxiv, xxv (1893, 1894), Bevue 
 des JEtudes Grecgues, 1895. 
 
 47. Nicole (J.), Les Papyrus de Geneve, vol. i. fasc. i (1896). 
 
APPENDIX IV 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 
 
 In the following list, A =the Brit. Mus. papyrus of Aristotle's 'ASi^vaiaiv 
 
 TloKiTeia, 
 H = Herculaneum Papyrus 157-152. 
 M = Medical Papyrus in the British Museum. 
 
 Tables of abbreviations and symbols used in non-literary papyri will 
 be found in the indices to the British Miiseum Catalogue of Papyri, 
 Grenfell's Oreek Papyri, vols, i and ii, and the Griechische Urkunden 
 of the Berlin Museum. All except those which are the caprices of an 
 individual, or as to which some doubt attaches, are included in the 
 list given below. In late theological papyri the familiar abbreviations 
 9s, Ks, ai/os K.T.X. are found, as in contemporary vellum MSS. 
 
 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED IN 
 PAPYRI. 
 
 (a) IN LITERARY PAPYRI. 
 
 i = at (as part of a word) 
 
 (A). 
 (/^ = aiTios, ahCa, k.t.\. (M). 
 a =: &va (A). 
 ^ = avTos and cases (A and 
 
 non-lit.). 
 y' = ydp (A, M). 
 
 y = y»p (H). 
 
 r* = ylverai k.t.X. (M). 
 
 6' =8€'(A). 
 
 8' = hid (A). 
 
 8" = bvvajxLs and cases (M). 
 
 \ = ehat. (A, H, M). 
 
 ^ = daiv (A, M). 
 / = ian (A, H, M). 
 e' = dai (A). 
 
 K = KOI (A). 
 K = Kal (H). 
 K = KOTci (M). 
 
 K = Kard (A). 
 
 ^ = \o'yos(M,magicalpapp.). 
 
 Ij! = ixev (A, M). 
 
 jx = \xeTd (A). 
 
 N = vov (M). 
 
 I>J = KTJS (M). 
 
 IV = vmv (M). 
 
APPENDIX IV 
 
 155 
 
 0' = ovv (A). 
 
 T 
 
 = Trjz; (A). 
 
 5 = ovT(o (M). 
 
 5 
 
 r 
 
 = rr,, (A). 
 
 ^^ = ^apk (A, M). 
 
 f 
 
 = TpoTTos and cases (H). 
 
 it' = Trep or wept (A). 
 
 r 
 
 = rrnz^ (A, M). 
 
 7r' = Trpo's (M). 
 
 T 
 
 = TWV (H). 
 
 U = TTotjyriJs (Harris Homer). 
 
 i) 
 
 = v-nApx^i K.T.k. (M). 
 
 ffl = TTporepop (M). 
 
 u' 
 
 = vTiep (A). 
 
 rfl = irpo's (H, Brit. Mus. 
 
 i;^ 
 
 = ^TTO' (A). 
 
 Pap. COLTI verso). 
 
 ^ 
 
 = (l>-r\(TiV, K.T.\. (M). 
 
 a-' = ovv (A). 
 
 )^ 
 
 = xpovos (A, H). 
 
 
 (&) IN NON-LITEEAEY PAPYEI. 
 
 rf 
 
 = aiTO. 
 
 = ir^x''^' 
 
 -« 
 
 = apovpa (rare). 
 
 U = ■aoi-qp.a (magical papp.). 
 
 h 
 
 = apovpa (common). 
 
 P — ■npayp.a (magical papp.). 
 
 < 
 
 = apTa^T} (rare). 
 
 C\ = IToXlS. 
 
 ^ 
 
 = apTdp-r] (rare). 
 
 t = ■uvpov, or loosely irvpov 
 
 
 
 = apTd^t) (common). 
 
 dpTajSri. 
 
 5 
 
 = avTos and cases. 
 
 C = aekrivT} and cases 
 
 ^ 
 
 = belva (in magical papp.). 
 
 (magical papp.). 
 
 h 
 
 = bpaxm (Ptolemaic). 
 
 ii = (TKrJTTTpov (magical 
 
 < 
 
 = 6(0ax(X7j (Roman). 
 
 papp.). 
 
 / 
 
 = bpaxp-ri (Roman, less 
 
 A = TaXavTOv. 
 
 
 common). 
 
 ^ — virep (By?ia,Titine). 
 
 ^ 
 
 = bpaxM (Roman). 
 
 ^L = )(«A.K0C. 
 
 L 
 
 = eroy and cases. 
 
 ;^ = xpte, K.T.X. (magical 
 
 6 
 
 = ■qkios and cases (magical 
 
 papp.). 
 
 
 papp.). 
 
 — =1 obol. 
 
 5 
 
 = KaC (l). 
 
 = = a obols. 
 
 s 
 
 = Kal. 
 
 r = 3 obols. 
 
 V 
 
 = KepaTLOv. 
 
 F = 4 obols. 
 
 t 
 
 = /^erpjjTTjy. 
 
 F = 5 obols. 
 
 D 
 
 H, or Dp-a = ovop.a 
 
 X° = 2 chalchi. 
 
 
 (magical papp.). 
 
 0' = 4 chalchi or ^ obol. 
 
 E! 
 
 Q El , □ D , or n ra = ovo- 
 
 o'x° = 6 chalchi. 
 
 
 nara (magical papp.). 
 
 q =90. 
 
156 
 
 PALAEOGRAPHY OF GREEK PAPYRI 
 
 9 
 
 = 90. 
 
 ^ 
 
 = 900 
 
 a 
 
 = !^ 
 
 3 
 
 9. 
 
 
 
 - f • 
 
 L 
 
 = 1. 
 
 d 
 
 -il 
 
 = i 
 
 = yiverai, or total. 
 = yivSTai, or total. 
 = sign of subtraction. 
 1 = remainder. 
 
 remainder [■wepUcrri). 
 
 n 
 
 ' A combination of the signs for \ and \. 
 
 ' The explanation of this sign is given by Brit. Mus. Pap. norv ; it is 
 the letter A (=4) written like o (as often in numerals, e. g. ^6 constantly = 
 ^^), and with a stroke above it to mark that it is a fraction {6, hence d). AS 
 of the form d does not appear till the fourth century. 
 
INDEX 
 
 (Figures in heavy type indicate that the principal description of the 
 MS. in question is to be found on the page so indicated.) 
 
 A, importance of, as a, test letter, 
 
 73- 
 Abbreviations, 32. 
 Abinnaeus, papyri of, 7, 47. 
 Accentuation, 28. 
 Alcman, Louvre fragment of, 5, 28, 
 
 32, 82. 
 Alexandrine MS. of the Bible, 121. 
 Apollonius, fragment of Homeric 
 
 Lexicon, 87. 
 Arden (J.), papyrus of Hyperides 
 
 discovered by, 5. 
 Aristarchean marks, 31, 81. 
 Aristotle, 'AOrjvaioiv XIoAiTSia, papyrus 
 
 of, 6, 17, 21, 22, 32, 44, 56, 91. 
 Arainoe, great find of papyri at, 6. 
 Ai-temisia, Curse of, 28, 57. 
 Ayer mathematical papyrus, 100. 
 
 Babington (Churchill), 85, 103. 
 
 Bacohylides, papyrus of, 7, 18, 27, 
 28, 29, 30, 31, 75. 
 
 Bankes (W. J.), papyrus of Homer 
 discovered by, 5 ; and see s.v. 
 Homer. 
 
 Bernard (J. H.), 118. 
 
 Bible, earliest extant papyrus frag- 
 ments of, 109 ; early vellum uncial 
 MSS. of, 120. 
 
 Birt (T.), on manufacture of 
 papyrus, 15. 
 
 Blass (F.), 3, 57, 77, 86, 95, 107. 
 
 Borchardt (L.), on length of papyrus 
 
 rolls, 18. 
 Borgia (Cardinal Stefano), 4. 
 Breathings, 30. 
 
 British Museum Papyri, not indexed 
 under authors' names (mostly non- 
 literary) : 
 Pap. xxiv, 39. 
 XLiv, ib. 
 XL VI, 116. 
 Lxxvil, 52. 
 xcviii recto, 103. 
 ox, 104. 
 
 OXIX, 2 2. 
 CXXI, 20, 110. 
 
 oxxxvii, 20. 
 cxLi, 88, loi. 
 
 CXLIII, 43. 
 OLXXVII, 16. 
 CLXXXVII, 90, 102. 
 
 COVIIIC, 87. 
 
 cox, 51. 
 
 ccLvn-ccLix, 18, 86. 
 coLX, 2 2, 43, 86. 
 
 COLXVl, 20. 
 CCLXVIII, 18. 
 COLXXVI, 43. 
 
 cooxxn, 46. 
 oooxxxn, 45. 
 
 OCOLI, 46. 
 CCOLIV, 16, 82. 
 DOXXIII, 2 2, 53. 
 DCLXXV, 2 2. 
 
158 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Codices, papyrus, 24. 
 
 Corrections, how indicated in papyri, 
 
 31- 
 Cyril, Dublin papyrus of, 118. 
 
 Dates, how expressed in papyri, 53. 
 Demosthenes, llpoolf^ia 5Tjfj.7]yopucd, 
 
 among Oxyrhynchus papyri, 76. 
 Demosthenes, third Epistle, papyrus 
 
 of, 16, 77. 
 Demosthenes, De Falsa Legatione, 
 
 vellum fragment of, 113. 
 Diaeresis, marks of, 30. 
 Dialectical treatise, in Louvre, 65. 
 Dioscorides, Vienna MS. of, 121. 
 Diphthongs, accentuation of, 29. 
 Division of words at end of line, 31. 
 
 Egyptian and extra-Egyptian writing, 
 70. 
 
 Erotic Fragment, 28, 68. 
 
 Eta, peculiar form of, 44. 
 
 Eudoxus, astronomical treatise de- 
 rived from, in Louvre, 56. 
 
 Euripides, Antiope, papyrus of, 6, 
 19, 27, 29, 61. 
 
 Euripides, Orestes, Geneva fragment 
 of, 100. 
 
 Ezekiel, Bodleian fi-figment of, 107. 
 
 Fayyum, discoveries of papyri in, 4, 
 5, 6, 49. 
 
 Festal Letter, fragment of, 118. 
 
 Forshall (J.), editor of British Mu- 
 seum papyri, 5. 
 
 Gardthausen (V.), treatment of papyri 
 in his GriecMsche Paldographie, 
 
 ', 15- 
 Goodspeed (E. J.), 100. 
 Grenfell (B. P.), 7, 36, 40, 41, 47, 59, 
 
 60, 68, 76, 87, 91, 97, 106, 107, 
 
 118. 
 
 Harris (A. C), papyrus of Hyperides 
 discovered by, 5 ; papyri of Homer, 
 «&. ; and see s.v. Homer. 
 
 Heracles, papyrus fragment of adven- 
 tures of, 60. 
 Heiculaneum, papyrus rolls of, 3, 32, 
 
 70. 
 Hermas, fragment of, at Berlin, 106. 
 Hermopolis, papyri discovered at, 6. 
 Herodas, Mimes, papyrus of, 6, 16, 
 
 17, 18, 22, 27, 29, 31, 94. 
 Herodotus, on use of skins as writing 
 
 material, 14, 
 Hesiod, British Museum fragment of, 
 
 117. 
 Hogarth (D. G.), 7, 40, 41. 
 Homer, lUad II, Oxford papyrus of, 
 
 31, 101. 
 Homer, Iliad II-IV, papyrus of (B. 
 
 M. Pap. oxxvi), 25, 27, 29, 105. 
 Homer, Iliad III, IV, papyrus of 
 
 (B. M. Pap. oxxxvi), 96. 
 Homer, Iliad XI, Geneva fragment 
 
 of, 68. 
 Homer, Iliad XIII, XIV, papyrus 
 
 of (B. M. Pap. Dcoxxxii), 97. 
 Homer, Iliad XVIII, papyrus of 
 
 (Harris Homer, B. M. Pap. ovil), 
 
 22, 23, 28, 29, 30, 84. 
 Homer, Iliad XXIII, XXIV, papy- 
 rus of (B. M. Pap. cxxviii), 17, 18, 
 
 21, 28, 29, 31, 81. 
 Homer, Iliad XXIV, papyrus of 
 
 (Bankes Homer, B. M. Pap. cxiv) , 
 
 28, 29, 30, 73, 98. 
 Homer, /Kad, fragments of, in Louvre, 
 
 6, 80- 
 Homer, Iliad, Milan MS. of, on vel- 
 lum, 121. 
 Homer, Odyssey III, British Museum 
 
 papyrus of, 16, 18, 21, 28, 29, 30, 
 
 31, 83. 
 Hunt (A. S.), 7, 76, 9T. 
 Hyperides, In Athenogenem, Louvre 
 
 papyrus of, 6, 18, 21, 27, 64, 65, 67. 
 Hyperides, In Demosthenem, Pro 
 
 Zycopkrone, and Pro Huxenippo, 
 
 papyrus of, 5, 17, 18, 21, 22, 27, 
 
 31.85. 
 Hyperides, Funeral Oration, papyrus 
 
 of, S, 103. 
 
INDEX 
 
 159 
 
 Hyperides, In Philippidem, papyrus 
 
 non-literary, 9 ; value of the latter 
 
 of, 6, 16, 18, 21, 22, 27, 77. 
 
 for palaeography, 12. 
 
 
 Papyrus as writing material, early 
 
 Indiction-period, dating by, 54. 
 
 use of, 14; preparation for use. 
 
 Inscriptions, beaming of, upon palaeo- 
 
 15; dimensions of sheets, 16 ff . ; 
 
 graphy, 9. 
 
 recto and terso, 19 ; width of 
 
 Isaiah, fragment of, at Vienna, 109. 
 
 columns, 21 ; use of rollers, 23; its 
 
 Isoorates, De Pace, papyrus of, 18, 
 
 use in book form, 24. 
 
 21, 22, 95. 
 
 napaypaipos, 27. 
 
 Isocrates, In Nicoclem, Marseilles 
 
 Periods of papyrus-palaeography, 34. 
 
 papyrus of, 27, 108. 
 
 Peter, Gospel and Kevelation of. 
 
 
 vellum MS. of, 119. 
 
 Kepara, 23. 
 
 Petrie (W. M. F.), papyri discovered 
 
 KoWrj/xa, 16. 
 
 by, 6, 36, 36, 58, loi. 
 
 
 Peyron (A.), editor of Turin papyri, 5. 
 
 
 *oii'(5a.7)j, 24. 
 
 Leemans (C), editor of Leyden 
 
 Pherecydes, fragment of, 107. 
 
 papyri, 5. 
 
 Philodemus, papyri of, at Hercu- 
 
 Zogia lesu, papyrus of, 7. 
 
 laneum, 71. 
 
 
 Philyra, 15. 
 
 Magical papyrus at Paris, 115. 
 
 Plato, Laches, papyrus of, 63. 
 
 Mahaffy (J. P.), 35, 60, 62, 68. 
 
 Plato, Laws, Oxyrhynohus fragment 
 
 Mariette (F. A. F.), papyrus of Aloman 
 
 of, 109. 
 
 discovered by, 5. 
 
 Plato, Phaedo, papyrus of, 6, 19, 27, 
 
 Mattliew, St., Oxyrhynohus fragment 
 
 28, 29, 61. 
 
 of, 109. 
 
 Pliny, on the preparation of papyrus, 
 
 Medical papyrus in British Museum, 
 
 IS, 16, 17. 
 
 20, 32, 56. 
 
 Prisse Papyrus, 14. 
 
 Menander, Teapyds, papyrus of, 7, 25. 
 
 Psalter, fragment of (B. M. Pap. 
 
 Minuscule hand on veUum, origin 
 
 ccxix), 109. 
 
 of, 51, 124. 
 
 Psalter, portion of (B. M. Pap. 
 
 Montfauoon (B. de), 3. 
 
 XXXVJI), 116. 
 
 
 Punctuation, 27. 
 
 New Testament, the earliest MSS. 
 
 
 of, how written, 93. 
 
 Hainer collection of papyri, 47. 
 
 Nicholson (E. W. B.), Bodley's 
 
 Recto and Verso, rule of, 19. 
 
 Librarian, 87. 
 
 Kevenue Papyrus, 17, 20, 35. 
 
 Nicole (J.), 7, 68, 100. 
 
 Hollers, use of, 23. 
 
 'OpupaUs, 23. 
 
 Sappho, Oxyrhynohus fragment of, 
 
 Oxyrhynohus, papyri found at, 7, 47, 
 
 109. 
 
 49. 76. 77. 91. i°o> i°3. 108. 
 
 Scapns, 18. 
 
 
 Schow (N.), 4. 
 
 Palaeogr.nphy, uncertainty of, 79. 
 
 Scott (W.), edition of Heroulanean 
 
 Papyri, history of discoveries of, 3 ; 
 
 papyri, 71, 74- 
 
 chronological period covered by, 7 ; 
 
 ScAi's, 21. 
 
 distinction between literary and 
 
 Separation of words, 26. 
 
i6o 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Serapeum at Memphis, papyri of, 4, 
 
 38- 
 'SiXhiPos, 22. 
 
 Sinaitio MS. of the Bible, 120. 
 Sloping hand, use of in third century, 
 
 105. 
 Socnopaei Nesus, great find of papyri 
 
 at, 6. 
 Stobart (H.), papyrus of Hyperides 
 
 discovered by, 6. 
 
 Tachygraphy, 33. 
 
 Thompson (Sir E. Maunde), 57, 62, 
 84, 85, 98, loi ; his Handbook of 
 Greek mid Latin Palaeography, 3, 
 
 15. 24. 36. 74. "S- 
 
 Titles, 22. 
 
 Tryphon, papyrus of treatise attri- 
 buted to, 27, 106. 
 
 Uncial and cursive writing, dis- 
 tinction between, with regard to 
 papyri, 10. 
 
 Vatican MS. of the Bible, 120. 
 Vellum, earliest use of, 112; papyrus 
 
 superseded by it, 115; results of 
 
 the change, 122. 
 
 Wattenbach (W.), 3, 31. 
 
 Wessely (K.), 57. 
 
 Wilcken (U.), 19, 106, 124; his 
 
 Tafeln zttr alteren grieohischen 
 
 FaldograpMe, 46, 47. 
 Writing, early use of, 8. 
 
 3, importance of, as a test letter, 73. 
 
 Zechariah, papyrus of, 25, 118. 
 
 THE END 
 
ai/s/gS 
 
 Clatenbon press, ©ytotb. 
 
 SELECT LIST OF STANDARD WORKS. 
 
 STANDARD LATIN WORKS . 
 STANDARD GREEK WORKS . 
 MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD WORKS 
 STANDARD THEOLOGICAL WORKS . 
 
 . Page I 
 ■■ 3 
 .. 7 
 
 1. STANDARD LATIN WORKS. 
 
 Avianus. The Fables. Edited, 
 ■with Prolegomena, Critical Appa- 
 ratus,Commentary,&;e., by Robinson 
 Ellis, M.A., LL.D. 8to. 8s. 6d. 
 
 Catulli Veronensis Liber. 
 Iterum recognovit, Apparatum Cri- 
 ticum Prolegomena Appendices ad- 
 didit, K. Ellis, A.M. 8yo. i6». 
 
 CatulluSj a Commentary on. 
 
 By Eobinson Ellis, M.A. Second 
 Edition. 8to. i8s. 
 
 Cicero. De Oratore Libri 
 Tres. With Introduction and Notes. 
 By A. S. Wilkins, liitt.D. 8to. i8s. 
 Also, separately, 
 Book I. 7s. 6d. Book II. 5s. 
 Book III. 6s. 
 
 Philippic Orations. 
 
 With Notes. By J. E. King, M.A. 
 Second Edition. 8vo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 "Pro Milone. Edited by 
 
 A. C. Clark, M.A. Svo. 8s. 6d. 
 
 Select Letters. With 
 
 English Introductions, Notes, and 
 Appendices. By Albert Watson, 
 M.A. Fowrth Edition. Svo. i8s. 
 
 Horace. With a Commentary 
 
 By E. C. Wickham, D.D. Two Vols. 
 
 Vol. I. The Odes, Carmen Secu- 
 
 lare, and Epodes. Third Edition. 
 
 Svo. 12s. 
 
 Vol. II. The Satires, Epistles, and 
 
 De Arte Poetica. Svo. 12s. 
 
 Juvenal. Thirteen Satires. 
 Edited, with Introduction and 
 Notes, by C. H. Pearson, M.A., and 
 Herbert A. Strong, M.A., LL.D. 
 Second Edition. Crown Svo. gs. 
 
 Manilius. NoctesManilianae; 
 
 site IKssertaSones in Astronc/mica Ma- 
 nila. Accedunt. Coniecturae in Ger- 
 manici Aratea. Soripsit K. Ellis. 
 Crown Svo. 6s. 
 
 Merry. Selected Fragm^ents 
 of Soman Poetry. Edited, with Intro- 
 duction and Notes, by W. W. 
 Merry, D.D. Crown Svo. 6s. 6d. 
 
 Ovid. P. Ovidii Nasonis Ibis. 
 
 Ex Novis Codicibus edidit, Scholia 
 Vetera Commentarium cum Pro- 
 legomenis Appendice Indice addidit, 
 R. Ellis, A.M. Svo. los. 6d. 
 
 Oxford : Clarendon Press. London : Henry Fbowdk, Amen Corner, E.O. 
 
STANDARD LATIN WORKS. 
 
 Ovid. P. Ovidi Nasonis Tris- 
 
 tium Libri V. Eecenauit S. G. Owen, 
 A.M. 8vo. 1 6s. 
 
 Persius. The Satires. With 
 
 a Translation and Commentary. 
 By John Conington, M.A. Edited 
 by Henry Nettleship, M.A. Third 
 Edition. 8vo. 8s. 6d. 
 
 Plautus. Rudens. Edited, 
 with Critical and Explanatory 
 Notes, by E. A. Sonnenschein, 
 M.A. Svo. 8s. 6d. 
 
 Quintilian. Institutionis 
 
 Oratoriae Liber Decimus. A Revised 
 Text, with Introductory Essays, 
 Critical Notes, &c. By W. Peterson, 
 M.A., LL.D. 8to. i2s. 6d. 
 
 Eushforth. Latin Historical 
 
 Inscriptions, illustrating the History of 
 the Early Empire. By G, McN. 
 Eushforth, M.A. Svo. los. net. 
 
 Tacitus. The Annals. Edited, 
 with Introduction and Notes, by 
 H. Furneaux, M.A. 2 Vols. Svo. 
 Vol. I, Books I- VI. Second Edition. 
 
 iSs. 
 Vol. II, Books XI-XVI. 20S. 
 
 De Germania. By the 
 
 same Editor. Svo. 6s. 6d. 
 
 Vita Agricolae. By the 
 
 same Editor. Svo. 6s. 6d. 
 
 Bialogus de Oratoribus. 
 
 A Revised Text, with Introductoi-y 
 Essays, and Critical and Explana- 
 tory Notes. By "W. Peterson, M.A., 
 LL.D. Svo. los. 6d. 
 
 Virgil. With an Introduc- 
 tion and Notes. By T. L. Papillon, 
 M.A., and A. E. Haigh, M.A. 
 2 vols. Crown Svo. Cloth, 6s. each; 
 stiff covers 3s. 6d. each. 
 
 Also sold in parts, as follows— 
 Bucolics and Qeorgics, 2s. 6d. 
 Aeneid, in 4 parts, 2s. each. 
 
 King and Cookson. The Prin- 
 ciples of Sound and Inflexion, as illus- 
 trated in the Qreek and Latin Languages. 
 By J. E. King,M.A., and Christopher 
 Cookson, M.A. Svo. iSs. 
 
 An Introduction to the 
 
 Comparative Grammar of Gh'eek and 
 Latin. Crown Svo. 5s. 6d. 
 
 Lindsay. The Latin Lan- 
 guage. An Historical Account of 
 Latin Sounds, Stems and Flexions. 
 By W. M. Lindsay, M.A. Demy 
 Svo. 2 IS. 
 
 Nettleship. Lectures and 
 
 Essays on Subjects connected with Latin 
 
 Scholarship and Literature. By Henry 
 
 Nettleship, M. A. Crown Svo. ys. 6d. 
 
 Second Series, edited by 
 
 P. J. Haverfield, with Memoir by 
 Mrs. Nettleship. Crown Svo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Ifettleship. Ancient Lives of 
 
 Vergil. Svo, sewed, 2s. 
 
 Contributions to Latin 
 Svo. 2 IS. 
 
 Sellar. Roman Poets of the 
 Augustan Age. By W. Y. Sellar, 
 M.A. ; viz. 
 
 I. ViROiL. New Edition. Crown 
 Svo. 9s. 
 II. HoKAOE and the EtEGiAc 
 Poets. With a Memoir of the 
 Author by Andrew Lang, M.A., 
 and a Portrait. Svo. 14s. 
 
 Roman Poets of the Re- 
 public. Third Edition. Crown 8to. ios. 
 
 Wordsworth. Fragments and 
 Specimens of Early Latin. With Intro- 
 ductions and Notes. By J. Words- 
 worth, D.D. Svo. iSs. 
 
 Oxford: Clarendon Presd. 
 
STANDARD GREEK WORKS. 
 
 2. STANDARD GREEK WORKS. 
 
 Chandler. A Practical Intro- 
 duction to Greek Accentuation, by H. W. 
 Chandler, M.A. Second Edition. 
 I OS. 6d. 
 
 Farnell. The Cults of the Greek 
 
 states. With Plates. By L. R. Farnell, 
 M.A. 
 
 Vols. I and II. 8vo. 32s. net. 
 
 Volume III in Preparation. 
 
 Grenfell. An Alexandrian 
 
 Erotic Fragment and other Greek Papyri, 
 chiefly Ptolemaic. Edited by B. P. 
 Grenfell, M.A. Small 4to. 8s. 6d. 
 net. 
 
 Q-renfell and Hunt. New 
 
 Classical Fragments and other Greek 
 and Latin Papyri. Edited by B. P. 
 Grenfell, M.A., and A. S. Hunt, 
 M.A. With Plates, las. 6d. net. 
 
 Menander's Fecoproc. 
 
 A Revised Text of the Geneva 
 Fragment, With a Translation 
 and Notes by the same Editors. 
 8vo, stiff covers, is. 6d. 
 
 Grenfell and MahaflEy. Rev- 
 enue Laws of Ptolemy Philadelphus. 
 2 vols. Text and Plates, il. i is. 6d. 
 
 net. 
 
 Eaigh. The Attic Theatre. 
 
 A Description of the Stage and 
 Theatre of the Athenians, and of 
 the Dramatic Performances at 
 Athens. By A. E. Haigh, M.A. 
 8vo. I2S. 6d. 
 
 Aeschinem et Isoeratem,&Ao- 
 
 lia Graeca in. Edidit G. Dindorfius. 
 8vo. 4s. 
 Aeschylus. In Single Plays. 
 With Introduction and Notes, by 
 Arthur Sidgwick, M.A. Third 
 Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. 3s. each. 
 I. Agamemnon. 
 II. Choephoroi. 
 
 III. Eumenides. 
 
 IV. Prometheus Bound. With 
 
 Introduction and Notes, by 
 A. 0. Prickard, M.A. Third 
 Edition. 2s. 
 
 Haigh. The Tragic Drama of 
 
 the Greeks. With Illustrations. 
 8vo. I2s. 6d. 
 
 Head. Historia Numorum: 
 A Manual of Greek Numismatics. 
 By Barclay V. Head. Royal 8vo, 
 half-bound, 2I. 2s. 
 
 Hicks. A Manual of Greek 
 
 Historical Inscriptions. By E. L. 
 Hicks, M.A. 8vo. los. 6d. 
 
 Hill. Sources for Greek His- 
 tory between the Persian and Pelopon- 
 nesianWars. Collected and arranged 
 by G. P. Hill, M.A. 8vo. los. 6d. 
 
 Iiiddell and Scott. A Greek- 
 English Lexicon, by H. G. Liddell, 
 D. D., and Robert Scott, D. D. Eighth 
 Edition, Sevised. 4to. il. i6s. 
 
 Monro. Modes of Ancient 
 
 Greek Music. By D. B. Monro, M.A. 
 8vo. 8s. 6d. net. 
 
 Paton and Hicks. The In- 
 scriptions of Cos. By W. R. Paton 
 and E. L. Hicks. Royal 8vo, linen, 
 vrith Map, 28s. 
 
 Smyth. The Sounds and 
 
 Inflections of the Greek Dialects (Ionic). 
 By H. Weir Smyth, Ph.D. 8vo. 34s. 
 
 Thompson. A Glossary of 
 
 Greek Birds. By D'Arcy W. Thomp- 
 son. 8vo, buckram, los. net. 
 Veiteh. Greek Verbs, Irregular 
 
 and Defective. By W. Veiteh, LL.D. 
 Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo. los. 6d. 
 
 Aesehyli quae supersunt in 
 
 Codice Laurentiano quoad effici potuit et 
 ad cognitionem necesse est visum typis 
 descripta edidit R. Merkel. Small 
 folio, il. IS. 
 
 Aeschylus : Tragoediae et 
 Fragmenta, ex recensione Guil. Din- 
 dorfii. Second Edition. 8vo. 5s. 6(J. 
 
 Annotationes Guil. Din- 
 
 dorfii. Partes II. 8vo. los. 
 
 Apsinis et Longini Rhetorica. 
 
 E Codicibus mss. recensuit Joh, 
 Bakius. 8vo. 3s. 
 
 London : Henry Fro\(;de, Amen Comer, E.C. 
 
STANDARD GREEK WORKS. 
 
 Aristophanes. A Complete 
 
 Concordance to the Comedies and Frag- 
 ments. By H. Dunbar, M.D. 4to. 
 ll. IS. 
 
 Gomoediae et Frag'nienta, 
 
 ex reoensione Guil. Diudorfii. 
 Tomi II. 8vo. lis. 
 
 Annotationes Guil. Diu- 
 dorfii. Partes II. 8to. i is. 
 
 Scholia Oraeca ex Co- 
 
 dicibus auota et emendata a Guil. 
 Dindorfio. Partes III. 8vo. il. 
 
 In Single Plays. Edited, 
 
 with English Notes, Introductions, 
 &c., by W. W. Merry, D.D. Extra 
 fcap. 8vo. 
 
 TheAcharniana. Fourth Edition, 3s. 
 The Birds. Third Edition, 3s. 6d. 
 The Clouds. Third Edition, 3s. 
 The Progs. Third Edition, 3s. 
 The Knights. Second Edition, 3s. 
 The Wasps. 3s. 6d. 
 
 Aristotle. Ex reoensione 
 Im. Bekkeri. Accedunt Indices 
 Sylburgiani. Tomi XI. Svo. zl. los. 
 
 The volumes (except Vols. I and IX) 
 maybe hadseparately,price5s.6d. each. 
 
 Ethica Nicomachea, re- 
 cognovit brevique Adnotatione 
 critica instruxit I. Bywater. Svo. 6s. 
 Also in crown 8t)o, paper cover, 3 s. 6d. 
 
 Contributions to the 
 
 Textual Criticism of the Nieoma- 
 chean Ethics. Byl.Bywater. 2s.6d. 
 
 Notes on the Nicoma- 
 
 oheanEthics. ByJ.A. Stewart,M.A. 
 a vols. Svo. 32s. 
 
 Selecta ex Organo Aris- 
 
 totdeo Capitula. In usum Scho- 
 larum Academicarum. Crown Svo, 
 stiff covers. 3s. 6d. 
 
 De Arte Poetiea Liber. 
 
 Eeoognovit Brevique Adnotatione 
 Critica Instruxit I. By water, Litter- 
 arum Graecarum Professor Begins. 
 Post Svo, stiff covers, is. 6d. 
 
 Aristotle. The Politics, with 
 
 Introductions, Notes, &e., by W. L. 
 
 Newman, M.A. Vols. I and II. 
 
 Medium 8vo. 28s. 
 
 Vols. Ill and IV. [In the Press."] 
 
 The Politics, trans- 
 lated into English, with Intro- 
 duction, Marginal AJialysis, Notes, 
 and Indices, by B. Jo watt, M.A. 
 Medium Svo. 2 vols. 21s. 
 
 The English Manuscripts 
 
 of the Nicomachean Ethics, describe in 
 relation to Bekker's Manuscripts and 
 other Sources. By J. A. Stewart, 
 M.A. (AneodotaOxon.) Small 4to. 
 3s. 6d. 
 
 Physics. Book VII. 
 
 Collation of various mss. ; with In- 
 troduction by E.Shute, M. A. (Aneo- 
 dota Oxon.) Small 4to. 2s. 
 
 Choerobosci JDictata in Theo- 
 
 dosii Canones, necmm Epimerismi in 
 Psalm^s. E Codicibus mss. edidit 
 Thomas Gaisford, S.T.P. Tomi III. 
 Svo. 15s. 
 
 Demosthenes. Ex reoensione 
 G. Dindorfii. Tomi IX. Svo. 2I. 6s. 
 
 Text, il. IS. Annotations, 153. 
 Scholia, I OS. 
 
 Demosthenes and Aeschines. 
 
 The Orations of Demosthenes and 
 Aeschines on the Crown. With 
 Introductory Essays and Notes. By 
 G. A. Simcox, M.A., and W. H. 
 Simcox, M.A. Svo. 12s. 
 
 Demosthenes. Orations 
 
 against Philip. With Introduction 
 and Notes, by Evelyn Abbott, M.A., 
 and P. E. Matheson, M.A. 
 Vol. I. Philippic I. Olynthiacs 
 
 I-III. Extra fcap. Svo. 3s. 
 Vol. II. De Pace, Philippic II. 
 De Chersonese, Philippic III. 
 Extra fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. 
 
 Euripides. Tragoediae et 
 Fragmenta, ex recensione Guil. Din- 
 dorfii. Tomi II, Svo. I OS. 
 
 Oxford ; Clarendon Press. 
 
STANDARD GREEK WORKS. 
 
 Euripides. Annotationes 
 
 Gtuil. Diadorfii. Partes II. 8vo. 
 
 I OS. 
 
 Scholia Graeca, ex Codi- 
 
 cibus aucta et emendata a Guil. 
 Dindorfio. Tomi IV. 8vo. il. i6s. 
 
 Hephaestionis Enchiridion, 
 
 TerentiamisMaurus,Prociiis,dkc. Edidit 
 T. Gaisford, S.T.P. Tomi II. los. 
 
 Heracliti Ephesii Reliquiae. 
 Recensuit I. Bywater, M. A. Appen- 
 dicis loco additae sunt Diogenis 
 Laertii Vita Heracliti, Particulao 
 Hippocratei De Diaeta Lib. I. , Epi- 
 stolae Heracliteae. 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Herodotus. Books V and VI, 
 Terpsichore and Erato. Edited, 
 with Notes and Appendices, by- 
 Evelyn Abbott, M.A., LL.D. 8vo, 
 with two Maps, los. 6d. 
 
 Homer. A Complete Con- 
 cordance to the Odyssey and Hymns of 
 Homer; to which is added a Con- 
 cordance to the Parallel Passages in 
 the Iliad, Odyssey, and Hymns. 
 By Henry Dunbar, M.D. 4to. 
 i2. IS. 
 
 A OramTnar of the Ho- 
 meric Dialect. By D. B. Monro, M. A. 
 8vo. Second Edition. 14s. 
 
 Ilias, ex rec. Guil. Din- 
 
 dorfii. 8vo. 5s. 6d. 
 
 Scholia Graeca in 
 
 Jliadem. Edited by W. Dindorf, 
 after a new collation of the Venetian 
 Mss. by D. B. Monro, M.A. 4 vols. 
 8vo. 2I. los. 
 
 Scholia Graeca in 
 
 niadem Townleyana. Kecensuit 
 Ernestus Maass. 2 vols. 8vo. 
 il. 16s. 
 
 Odyssea, ex rec. G. 
 
 Dindorfii. 8vo. 5s. 6d. 
 
 Scholia Graeca in 
 
 Odysseam. Edidit Guil. Dindorfiu s. 
 Tomi II. 8vo. 15s. 6d, 
 
 Homer. Odyssey. Books I- 
 XII. Edited with English Notes, 
 Appendices, &c. By W. W. Merry, 
 D.D., and James Eiddell, M.A. 
 Second Edition. 8vo. 16s. 
 
 Books XIII- 
 
 XXIV. By D. B. Monro, M.A. 
 [In the Press.'] 
 
 ■ Hymni Homerici. Codi- 
 
 cibus denuo collatis recensuit 
 Alfredus Goodwin. Small folio. 
 With four Plates. 2 is. net. 
 
 Homeri Opera et Reliquiae. 
 
 Monro. Crown 8vo. India Paper. 
 Cloth, 10s. 6d. net. 
 Also in various leather bindings. 
 
 Oratores Attici, ex recensions 
 Beikkeri : 
 
 Vol. I. Antiphon, Andocides, et 
 
 Lysias. 8vo. Is. 
 [Vols. II and III are out of print.] 
 
 Index Andocideus, Ly- 
 
 curgeus, Dinarcheus, confectus a 
 Ludovico Leaming Forman, Ph.D. 
 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 ParoemiograpM Graeei, quo- 
 rum pars nunc primum ex Codd. mss. 
 vulgatur. Edidit T. Gaisford, S.T.P. 
 1836. 8vo. 5s. 6d. 
 
 Plato. Apology, with a re- 
 vised Text and English Notes, and 
 a Digest of Platonic Idioms, by 
 James Eiddell, M.A. Svo. 8s. 6d. 
 
 Philebus, with a revised 
 
 Text and English Notes, by Edward 
 Poate, M.A. 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Republic. The Greek 
 
 Text. Edited, with Notes and 
 Essays, by B. Jowett, M.A. and 
 Lewis Campbell, M.A. In three 
 vols. Medium Svo. 2I. 2s. 
 
 Sophistes and Politicus, 
 
 with a revised Text and English 
 Notes, by L. Campbell, M.A. Svo. 
 I OS. 6d. 
 
 London; Henry Frowde, Amen Corner, B.C. 
 
STANDARD GREEK WORKS 
 
 Plato. Theaetetus, with a re- 
 vised Text and English Notes, by 
 L. Campbell, M.A. Second Edition. 
 8vo. I OS. 6d. 
 
 The Dialogues, trans- 
 lated into English, with Analyses 
 and Introductions, by B. Jowett, 
 M.A. Third Edition. 5 vols, medium 
 8vo. Cloth, 4!. 4s. ; half-morocoo, 5!. 
 
 The Republic, translated 
 
 into English, with Analysis and 
 Introduction, by B. Jowett, M.A. 
 Third Edition. Medium 8vo. 1 2s. 6d. ; 
 half-roan, 14s. 
 
 With Introduction and 
 
 Notes. By St. George Stock, M.A. 
 Extra foap. 8vo. 
 
 I. The Apology, 2S. 6d. 
 II. Crito, 2s. III. Mono, 2S. 6d. 
 
 Selections. With Intro- 
 
 ductions and Notes. By John Purves, 
 M.A., and Preface by B. Jowett, 
 M.A. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 
 8vo. 5s. 
 
 A Selection of Passages 
 
 from Plato for English Readers; from 
 the Translation by B. Jowett, M.A. 
 Edited, with Introductions, by 
 M. J. Knight. 2 vols. Crown 8vo, 
 
 gilt top. I2S. 
 
 Plotimis. Edidit F. Creuzer. 
 
 Tomi III. 4to. i;. 8s. 
 
 Polybius. Selections. Edited 
 by J. L. Strachan-Davidson, M,A. 
 With Maps. Medium 8 vo. 21s. 
 
 Plutarchi Moralia, id est. 
 
 Opera, exceptis Yitis, reliqua. Edidit 
 Daniel Wyttenbach. Acceditlndex 
 Graecitatis. Tomi VIII. Partes 
 XV- 1795-1830. 8vo, cloth, 3!. I OS. 
 
 Sophocles. The Plays and 
 
 Fragments. With English Notes and 
 Introductions, by Lewis Campbell, 
 M.A. 2 vols. 8vo, i6s. each. 
 Vol. I. Oedipus Tyrannus. Oedi- 
 pus Coloneus. Antigone. 
 Vol. II. Ajax. Electra. Traohi- 
 niae. Philoctetes. Fragments. 
 
 Sophocles. Tragoediae et 
 
 Fragmenia, ex recensione et cum 
 commentariis Guil. Dindorfii. Third 
 Edition. 2 vols. Fcap. 8vo. il. is. 
 Each Play separately, limp, 2s. 6d. 
 
 Tragoediae etFragmenta 
 
 cum Annotationibus Guil.Dindorfii. 
 Tomi II. 8vo. los. 
 
 The Text, Vol. I. 5s. 6d. 
 
 The Notes, Vol. II. 4s. 6d. 
 
 Stobaei Florilegium. Ad 
 Mss. fidem emendavit et supplevit 
 T. Gaisford, S.T.P. Tomi IV. 8vo. li!. 
 
 Eclogarum Physicarum 
 
 et Ethicarum libri duo. Aooedit 
 Hieroclis Commentarius in aurea 
 carmina Pythagoreorum. Ad mss. 
 Codd. recensuit T. Gaisford. S.T.P. 
 Tomi II. 8vo. i is. 
 
 Strabo. Selections, with an 
 Introduction on Strabo's Life and 
 Works. By H. F. Tozer, M.A., 
 F.R.G.S. 8vo. With Maps and 
 Plans. I2S. 
 
 Theodoreti Oraecarum Affec- 
 
 tionum Curatio. Ad Codices mss. 
 recensuit T. Gaisford, S.T.P. 8vo. 
 7s. 6d. 
 
 Thucydides. Translated into 
 
 English, with Introduction, Mar- 
 ginal Analysis, Notes, and Indices. 
 By B. Jowett, M.A. [Reprinting.] 
 
 Xenophon. Ex recensione et 
 cum annotationibus L. Dindorfii. 
 Historia Graeca. Second Edition. 
 
 8vo. 10s. 6d. 
 Eocpeditio Cyri. Second Edition. 
 
 8vo. I OS. 6d. 
 Institutio Cyri. 8vo. los.Sd. 
 Memorabilia Socratis. 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 Opuscula Politica Equestrta et 
 
 Venatica cum Arriani Libello 
 
 de Venatione. 8vo. los. 6d. 
 
 Oxford; Clarendon Preaa. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD WORKS. 
 
 3. MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD WORKS. 
 
 Arbuthnot. T}ie Life and 
 Works of John Arbuthnot. By George 
 A. Aitken. 8to, cloth extra, with 
 Portrait, 1 6s. 
 
 Bacon. The Essays. Edited 
 ■with Introduction and Illustrative 
 Notes, by S. H. Reynolds, M.A. 
 8vo, half-botind, 1 2S. 6d. 
 
 Casaubon (Isaac), 1559-1614. 
 By Mark Pattison, late Rector of 
 Lincoln College. Second Edition. 
 8to. I 6s. 
 
 Finlay. A History of Greece 
 
 from its Conquest hy the Romans to the 
 present time, b. c. 146 to a. D. 1864. 
 By Gteorge Finlay, LL.D. A new 
 Edition, revised throughout, and in 
 part re-written, with considerable 
 additions.by the Author, and edited 
 by H. F. Tozer, M. A. 7 vols. 8vo. 
 3?. I OS. 
 
 Gali Institutionum Juris 
 
 CivUis Commemtarii Quattuor; or. Ele- 
 ments of Roman Law by Gains. 
 With a Translation and Commen- 
 tary by Edward Poste, M.A. Third 
 Edition. 8vo. i8s. 
 
 Hodgkin. Italy and her In- 
 ■ ooifers. With Plates and Maps. By 
 Thomas Hodgkin, D.C.L. a.d. 
 376-744. 8vo. Vols. I and II, Second 
 Edition, 2I. 2S. Vols. Ill and IV, 
 Second Edition, il. i6s. Vols. V and 
 VI, il. i6s. 
 
 Hooker, Sir J. D., and B. D. 
 
 Jackson. Index Kewensis. 2 vols. 
 4to. lot los. net. 
 
 Justinian. Imperatoris lus- 
 
 tiniani Institutionum Libri QuaUuor ; 
 with Introductions, Commentary, 
 Excursus and Translation. By J . B. 
 Moyle, D.C.L. Third Edition. 2 vols. 
 8vo. 22s. 
 
 Machiavelli. II Principe. 
 
 Edited by L. Arthur Burd. With 
 an Introduction by Lord Acton. 
 8vo. 14s. 
 
 Pattison. Essays by the late 
 
 Mark Pattison, sometime Rector of 
 Lincoln College. Collected and 
 Arranged by Henry Nettleship, 
 M.A. 2 vols. 8vo. 24s. 
 
 Ralegh. Sir Walter Ralegh. 
 A Biography. By W. Stebbing, 
 M.A. 8vo. IDS. (>d. 
 
 Ramsay. The Cities and 
 
 Bishoprics ofPhrygia ; being an Essay 
 of the Local History of Phrygia, 
 from the Earliest Times to the 
 Turkish Conquest. By W. M. 
 Ramsay, D.C.L., LL.D. Vol.1. Part 
 I. The Lycos Valley and South-Western 
 Phrygia. Royal 8vo, linen, 18s. net. 
 Vol. I. Part II. West and West- 
 Central Phrygia. Royal 8vo, linen, 
 2 IS. net. 
 
 Selden. The Table Talk of 
 
 John Selden. Edited, with an In- 
 troduction and Notes, by Samuel 
 Harvey Reynolds, M.A. 8vo, half- 
 roan, 8s. 6d. 
 
 Stokes. The Anglo-Indian 
 Codes. By Whitley Stokes, LL.D. 
 Vol. I. Substantive Law. 8vo. 30s. 
 Vol. II. Adjective Law. 8vo. 35s. 
 
 Strachey. Hastings and The 
 BohiUa War. By Sir John Strachey, 
 G.C.S.I. 8vo, cloth, los. 6d. 
 
 Thomson. J^otes on Recent 
 
 Besearches in Electricity and Magnetism. 
 By J. J.Thomson, M.A.,F.R.S. 8vo. 
 1 8s. 6d. 
 
 London : Henby Feowbe, Amen Comer, E.G. 
 
STANDARD THEOLOGICAL WORKS. 
 
 4. STANDARD THEOLOGICAL WORKS. 
 
 St. Basil : The Book of St. 
 
 Basil on the Holy Spirit. A Revised 
 Text, with Notes and Introduction 
 by C. F. H. Johnston, M. A. Crown 
 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 The Coptic Version of the 
 
 New Testament, in the Northern 
 Dialect, otherwise called Memphitic and 
 Bohairic. With Introduction, Criti- 
 cal Apparatus, and Literal English 
 Translation. The Gospels. 3 vols. 
 8vo. 2l. 2S. 
 
 Bright. Chapters of Early 
 
 English Church History. By W. Bright, 
 D.D. Third Edition. 8to. las. 
 
 Butler. The Works of Bishop 
 
 Butler. Edited by the Right Hon. 
 W. E. Gladstone. 2 vols. Medium 
 8vo. il. 8s. 
 *if* Also in Grown 8tio, 2 vols, los. 6d. 
 
 Canons of the First Four 
 
 General Councils of Nicaea, Con- 
 stantinople, Ephesus, and Chalcedon. 
 With Notes, by W. Bright, D.B. 
 Second Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 The Book of Enoch. Trans- 
 latedfrom Dillmann'sEthiopicText 
 (emended and revised), and Edited 
 by R. H. Charles, M. A. 8vo. i6s. 
 
 Conybeare. The Key of Truth. 
 A Manual of the Paulician Church 
 of Armenia. The Armenian Text, 
 edited and translated with illus- 
 trative Documents and Intro- 
 duction by F. C. Conybeare, M.A. 
 8vo. 15*. net. 
 
 Driver. The Parallel Psalter, 
 being the Prayer-Book Version of 
 the Psalms and a New Version, ar- 
 ranged in parallel columns. With an 
 Introduction and Glossaries. By 
 the Rev. S. R. Driver, D.D., Litt.D. 
 Extra fcap. 8vo. Nearly Beady. 
 
 Ecclesiasticus (xxxix. 15 — 
 
 xlix. 11). The Original Hebrew, 
 with Early Versions and English 
 Translations, &c. Edited by A. 
 Cowley, M.A., and An. Nevbauee, 
 M.A. 4to. los. 6rf. net. 
 Hatch and Bedpath. A Con- 
 cordance to the Greek Versions and 
 Apocryphal Books of the Old Testament. 
 By the late Edwin Hatch, M.A., and 
 H. A. Redpath, M.A. In Six Parts. 
 Imperial 4to. 3 is. each. 
 
 Ommanney. A Critical Dis- 
 sertation on the Athanasian Creed. Its 
 Original Language, Date, Authorship, 
 Titles, Text, Reception, and Use. By 
 G. D. W. Ommanney, M.A. 8to. 
 1 6s. 
 
 Studia Biblica et Ecclesias- 
 
 tica. Essays in Biblical a/nd Patristic 
 Criticism, a/nd kindred subjects. By 
 Members of the University of 
 Oxford. 8vo. 
 
 Vol. I. los. 6d. 
 
 Vol. II. I2S. 6d. 
 
 Vol. III. i6s. 
 
 Vol. IV. i2s.6d. 
 
 Wordsworth and White. 
 
 Nouum Testamentum Domini Nostri 
 lesu Christi Latine, secundum Edi- 
 tionem Sancti Hieronymi. Ad 
 Codicum Manuscriptorum fidem 
 recensuit lohannes Wordsworth, 
 S.T.P , Episcopus Sarisburiensis ; 
 in operis societatem adsumto 
 Henrico luliano White, A.M. 4to. 
 Ease. I. I2S 6d.; Ease. II. J 3 6d.; 
 Fasc. III. 12s. 6d. ; Ease. TV. los. dd. 
 
 Ki: 
 
 0;ffc 
 
 THE CLARENDON PRESS 
 LONDON: HENRY FROWDE 
 
 OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE, AMEN CORNER, E.C.